Eurocopter AS350B2 RFM Rev - 06 2002

FLIGHTMANUAL
'8 eurocopter
8
FLIG HT MAN UAL
AS
350
82
DOT TYP~ APPROVAl. No. H.S3

"S~CTIONS 1, 2. 3. 4 AND 5 OF THIS MANUAl.. AS WE!.I. AS THE APPLICABI.E
6UPP/-EMENTS, CONSTITUTE THE APPROVED FLIGHT MANUAL. FOR CANADIAN
REGISTERED AIRCRAFT COMPf.IANC~ WITH SECTION 2 IS MANDATORY"
e
REGISTRATION
APPROVED
No
SERIAL
(j ::;;~~I~~~~
~~
BY:
The DIRECTldN
G~NI::RALI:: p~
L'AVIATION CIVIL~ ( DGAC )
Date of approval:
No
Dec&mber
;
.
05. 1990
"ThIs Aotorcraft Flight Manual is the translation of an approved French fright manu~l.
The note "DGAC approved" on ell pages means that these pages are an Integral
r.ranslstion 01 the French Issue approved by DGAC".
This RFM Is approvad for Canadian re~tered
marked "PGAC approved" and coded!!
aircraft and consists
of all peges
IMPO~TANTNOTE
The pratlca./ velue of this menus) depellds entirely upon-Its being correctly IIp..dated.
The re"'510ns ere recorded on the les!. pogo 01 the rnallUQI..
effectivity of the manual at the lattst rsvlslon Is specified Oil psges O.C.PS.
,A
...The
Thla manual
support8
-*
tlte hellcapter8
and SUROCOPTER FRANCE.
delivered
by bo'h
RevIsIons JO 1hla manual are made by EU~OCOPTER

same pr~cedur..
8a Aeroap8tlel8.
THIS DOCUMENT
-~::=:
=-n/l
~?===="jrJ::
SHALL ~E CARRIED
EUFlOCOPTER
uslllg th.
AT AI-I. TIMES
EtabllsB8ment
de Msrlgnane
Plroctlcn T~ch"'~uo SIJppOri -1~72S M_.lgn_n" O""ex .Franca
DGACApproved
FRANCE
IN AIRCRAFT
FRANCE
AerospoT./elf1
360 62
O.O.PI
~
~c
90-37
"r
Page
I
w03"
.
,
FI.IGHT HANUAL
C!,!STOMIZAT1.0N.
A/C ,
-SIN,
~TQF ADDITIONAL
APPROVED
PAG~
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
THIS AI~CRAFTDOESNOTOFFERANYPARTJ.CULAR
FEATURES
RJ:QIJIRING
THEQJSTOMIZAT1.0N
OF THE FL1.GHT
MANUAL
ON
GREENPAGES.
18
I-ISTOFn LATr:ST
~
NORMAl
REVISION,0
APPROVED
REVISIONS
No
Date
No
(X;AC PPPRO'JFJ)
Date
DAn:
89-17
~..",,411[) DGACApproved.
350 82
[).().~
89-17
P~
FLIGHT MANUAL
.PART
.
.
GENERAL
EMERGENCY
LIMITATIONS
PROCEDURES
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
PERFORMANCE
OGACApproved: SUPPLEMENTS
350 B2
O.O.P2
89-17
Page1
FUGHT
MANUAL
C(J,!POSmON
OF COODmONAl REVISIONS (RC)
This nanual assigned to the helicopter ~ntioned on the title

page,
contains the following pink pages except those cancelled when the
conditions are cCXl;)liedwith.
~
IF A NORMAL REVISION (RN) MODIFIES 1HE PAGE NUMBER FOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNEDBElCNI, 1HE READERWIll HAVE TO CHANGE1HE NUI.!BEROF 1HE PINK
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT 1HE INFORMATIOOREMAINS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH 1HE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
Section
Page
Date
RC.A
Applicable before condition
is ~t
AIRwOR1HINESS DIRECTIVE No 90-105B
(and further
-revisions)
0.OP3 Page 1 ~B2~ 90-29
AEROSPATIAlE Service
Telex
No 0125B (and further
revisions)
2.1
Page 7 ~B2~ 90-29
3.1
Page 2 ~B2~ 90-29
: This Conditional
to the manuals
Revision does not apply

at
Nomal
Revision
O.
RC.B
-Modification
ams 072596
: ~roved
engine
fire
0.OP3 Page 1 ~B2~ 92-33 detection system.

3.3
Page 5 ~RC~ 92-33
RC.C
-Modification
AMS 07259B
Supersedes RC.B
ID1)roved engine fire
0.OP3 Page 1 *B2* 92-39 Note:

3.3
Page 5 *B2* 92-39
NOTE : The date

-followed
DGACApproved:
W
detection
system.
Modification AMS072598 supersedes

modification AMSD72596.
The procedures remain unchanged.
is coded and consists

of the last
by the nurmer of the week in this
tWO figures
year.
of the year
350 B2
O.O.P3
92-39
Page 1
~B2'
.._I~
FLIGHT MANUAL
0 ~ ~ I <:-c:...
COMPOSITION
.OF
RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

The manual contains the following additional yellow page(s) :
No.RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
No.RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
2A
2.1
7 "62"
91-17
2J
4.1
4.1
13 "RR"
15 "RR"
97-11
97-11
2K
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
12 "RR"
13 "RR"
14 *RR"
15 "RR"
97-42
97-42
97-42
97-42
2L
4.1
15 *RR"
99-17
2M
4.1
15 "RR"
00-12
2N
RESERVED
20
4.1
15 "RR"
00-41
0.0.P4
1 "RR"
00-48
3.1
4 "RR"
00-48
Supersedes RR 2A
26
2.1
7 "62"
91-29
2C
2.1
3.3
4.1
4.1
4.1
6 "62"
5 "62"
6 "62"
11 "82"
16 "82"
92-33
92-33
92-33
92-33
92-33
20
2.1
3 "82"
92-42
Supersedes RR 2D
2E
2.1
3 "82"
93-19
Supersedes RR 2L
2F
4.1
12 "82"
93-50
2P
.2G
4.1
8 "82"
94-05
2H
4.1
4.1
12 "RR"
14 "RR"
94-08
94-08
21
3.3
5 "RR"
96-03
DGAC Approved :
IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
(~~~:)
0 .0 .P 4
00-48
Page 1
"RR"
._-"_.~,.-
,"""".
..
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
.(1)
PageRevision Code
-R
-N
: Revised,
: New, to
SECTION
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
6.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
to be replaced
be inserted
PAGE
P1
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P6
1
3
1
1
1
1/03
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
1
2
3.
4
1
1
1
DATE
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
89-17
02-03
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
92-12
92-12.
99-38
(1)
SECTION
7. 3
7. 3
7. 3
7. 4
7. 4
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 6
7. 6
7. 7
7. 7
7. 7
7. 8
7. 8
7. 8
7. 8
7. 9
7.10
7.10
7.11
7.11
7.11
8. 0
8. 1
8. 1
8. 2
PAGE
P6
DATE (1)
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
2
1
89-17
89-17
99-38
89-17
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
89-17
92-12
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
35082
O.O.P5
02-03
Page 1
-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
SECTION
8. 2
8. 2
8. 2
8. 2
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8.3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 3
8. 4
8. 4
8.
PAGE
2
3
4
5
1
2.
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 M
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
DATE (1)
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
SECTION
8.4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
9. 0
9. 1
9. 1
9. 1
9. 2
9. 2
9, 2
9. 2
9. 2
9. 2
9. 3
9. 4
9. 4
9. 4
9. 5
9. 6
9. 7
9. 7
9. 8
9. 8
9. 8
P6
PAGE
DATE (1)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
99-38
02-03
99-38
99-38
99-38
02-03
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
02-03
89-17
89-17
89-17
02-03
99-48
02-03
02-03
02-03
02-03
89-17
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
9.
99-38
8. 4
8. 4
4
5
99-38
99-38
9.10
9.10
1
2
99-38
99-38
350 82
R
~
R
N
N
N
N
O.O.P5
02-03
Page 2
MANUEL DE VOL COMPLEMENTAIRE
SECTION
.
.
.
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.12
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
10. 0
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 2
10. 3
10. 4
10. 4
10. 4
10. 4
10. 4
10. 4
10. 4
10.4
PAGE
P6
DATE (1)
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
1
2.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Date
89-17
99-48
92-12
02-03
93-05
93-15
99-38
No
REVISIONS
No
PAGE
DATE (1)
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
92-12
93-05
99-48
99-48
99-48
99-48
99-48
99-48
99-48
99-38
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
LlSTE DES DERNIERES

NORMALES
SECTION
REVISION
NORMALE:
Date
350 82
O.O.P5
02-03
--
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAl.
COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONALREVISIONS (RC)
This manual a$s1gned to the he11copter mentfoned on the t1tle

page,
contafns
the followfng
pink pages except those cancelled when 1~
cond1tfons a~e compliedW1th.

CAIJTION
IF A NORMALREVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGENUMBERFOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNED
BELOW. THE READERWIll. HAVE TO CHANGETI MJMeeROF THE PINK
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATIONREMAINS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE
PARAGRAPH
CC>NCERNEP.
Section
Page
Dete
Applfceble
before
cond1tfon
1s met I
NOTE I The date 1& coded and consIsts of the last

-followed
by the nunber- of the week In this
aDGAC Approved,
of- the year
350B2
two figures
hea~.
O.O.P3
89-17
---~.c,..
-~
Page1
"
:=
r'-"'"'In'
SECTION
PAGE
4.
4.
4.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
5.
1
2
3
1
J.
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
10
J.1
J.2
2
2
2
0
1
1
J.
J.
].
1
1
1
1
1
1
J.
PATE (1)
90-37
89-17
90-37
90-37
90-37
89-17
89-17
89-J.7
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
90-37
SECTION
PAGE
"""'U1\L
DATE (1)
R
R
R
R
8
LIST OF THE I.ATESTNORMAL
APPROVEDREVISIONS
No
Date
89-17
90-37
No
NORMALREVISION: 1
DGACAPPROVED
DATE.
-.. 09
Date
PGAC
Approved:
350~2
r-r-1
().().~!5
90-37
Page 2
co)"
FLIGHT MANUAL
.SECTION
~
CONTENTS
Page
1.1
PELIMINARYNOTES
1.2
UPDATING
1.3
SYMBOLS
.
.
OGAC
Approved.
[g
350 B2
1.0.P
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHTMANUAL
.SECTION
1
1 PRELIMINARY
NOTES
1.1
GENERAL
To achieve the required degree of safety, this manual must be used in
conjunction with the relevant regulations covering aircraft
operation,
such as aerial navigation laws in the operator's country. It is essential
for the crew to become f~iliar
with the contents of this manual, special
certification
requirements and any information specific to custcxnized
configurations,
and to check all revisions and related requirements.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
OF MANUAL
This manual contains legally approved information, together with additional manufacturer's
information not subject to approval; the entire
manual ccxnplies with the reccmnendations of the Helicopter Association
International
(HAl).
-The approved information is contained in PART1 -FLIGHT MANUAL-,
in sections 1,2,3,4,5 and in the Supplements.
-The information not subject to Approval is contained in PART2
-COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL-,as a Supplement to PART1.
This information is covered by sections 6,7,8,9 and 10. Each PARTof
Manual makes up a whole and, for this reason, incorporates its own
List of Pages and is revised separately.
1.2.1
Basic Aircraft
The basic helicopter
1.2.2
specifications
are covered by sections
1 through 10.
Special Systems and Procedures

Information concerning optional equipment systems and operational
procedures is covered by Supplements. These are mini Flight Manuals
covering any differences
frcxn the basic aircraft
information, section
by section. The supplements are approved on an individual basis.
1.3
ADAPTATION
OF MANUALTO CERTIFICATIONREQUIREMENTS
Specific certification
requirements maynecessitate modifications to the
text or layout of certain pages.

Therefore, a specific Flight Manual (PART 1) is drawn up for each certification.
Each Flight Manual includes its own particular
title page; the
alphabetical code, corresponding to the relevant certification,
appears
in the lower left-hand corner of each page of the approved PART1.
.DGAC
Approved:
~
350 82
Jl.()
89-17
---
Page1
--
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.4 CUSTOMIZATION
MODIFICATIONS
(printed
ongreen
paper)
Special features of a particular

helicopter may justify
prioritary
addenda
to the information on certain basic manual and supplement pages.
These pages, printed on green paper, are filed in the manual over the
corresponding white pages.
The information contained in the green pages supersedes or supplements
the information covered by the relevant white page. No white page is
deleted.
Page O.O.P1 page 3 gives the list
of green pages.
.
DGAC
Approved:
[]
350B2
89-17
1l. ()
Page2
~
~
,
,
FLIGHTMANUAL
.A
J~
2 UPDATING
2.1-~~
This Manual is updated
revisions
(RN).
2.2
periodically
through
rush
revisions
(RR) or
normal
REVISIONS
Aerospatiale
makes every effort
to keep this manual updated by revisions
to complete the user's information
and capabilities.
Each revision is
accompanied by instructions
sunmarizing the major points affected by the
change and advising the person responsible for incorporating
the revised
pages in the manual. (The instruction
sheet can be filed separately from
the manual).
The user is responsible for ensuring proper updating of the manual
complying with the List of Pages given at the beginning of PART1, PART2
and of each supplement, since each of the these PARTSor Supplements is
revised separately.
R
R
The date code is composed of the last two digits of the year, followed
by the number of the week in that year.
The variant code includes two digits
placed under the page number for
identification
of the version, certification
or related customization.
2.2.1
Normal revisi~
(printed
on white paper)
Normal revisions fully or partially

update the manual. The pages may be
new pages or may supersede the existing pages. They are printed on white
paper.
The manual effectivity
is specified
on the new introductory
(O.0.P1
page 2). Normal revisions are identified
in numerical order.
2.2.2
Rush revisions
(printed
on yellow
paper)
Rush revisions partially

update a few major points in the manual.
The new information
is given on a page which must face the former text to
be modified or completed. The Rush Revision is printed on yellow paper.
No white page is deleted. The revised pages are specified on a separate
list
CO.0.P4, page 1)
Rush revisions are identified

by the number of the next normal revision
and a letter suffix
in normal alphabetical
order. Several rush revisions
may be issued between two normal revisions.
All rush revisions are
cancelled when the normal revision bearing the same number is issued. If
certain rush revision provisions
remain after the subsequent normal
revision,
they are confirmed by a new rush revision with another
identification
code.
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 82
1.()
90-37
to",..
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2.3
Conditional revisions RC (printed on pink paper)
a.
The revised manual issued on white pages. corresponds to the reconmended ~.

standard.
For helicopters authorized to fly at an earlier standard, the conditional
revision (RC) retains the previous standard.
The user is responsible for embodimentof the aircraft modification(s)
required for compliance with the recommended
standard, after which the
pink pages may be deleted under the user's responsibility.
The pink pages are specified on a separate list(0.0.P3 page 1).
~
: These pages are unaffected by nonnal and rush revisions or by

customization.
.
DGAC
Approved:
W
35082
1.() ~
89-17
Page 4,
FLIGHT MANUAl
.3
SYMBOLS
& ABBREVIATIONS
SYMBOLS
French
~:
English
--
-Rate of climb
-Indicated
airspeed
-True airspeed
-Calibrated
airspeed
-Optimum climbing speed
-Takeoff
safety speed
-Critical
decision speed
-Never exceed speed
-Wind velocity
~
R/C
I.A.S.
T.A.S.
C.A.S.
Vy
V. TOSS
Vl
VNE
Vw
: Unless otherwise specified.

airspeed.
Vz
Vi
Vp
Vc
Vy
VSD
Vl
VNE
Vw
speed values used refer to indicated
Altitudes:
-Take-off
-Critical
-Pressure
-Density
or landing height
decision height
altitude
altitude
h
hl
Hp
Ho
h
hl
Zp
ZcI"
~:
-Weight
-Maximum take-off
weight
-Empty weight
-Equipped empty weight
-Operating
empty weight
-All-up
weight
Wt
M. TOW
E.W
E.E.W.
E.O.W.
A.U.W.
M
m
M.V.
M.V.E.
M.O.E.
M.T.
Temperature,
-Outside
air temperature.
in degrees centigrade -O.A.T.
e s
Miscellaneous:
= ~~~~~e-========================================= ~
-Barometric
pressure, in millibars
Po
-Degrees centigrade
C
-Rotor
speed
NR
-Gas generator speed
Ng
-Free turbine speed
Nf
-Exhaust Gas Temperature (E.G.T.)
t4
-Out of ground effect
D.G.E.
-In ground effect
I.G.E.
-Main gear box
M.G.B.
-Tail
gear box
T.G.B.
.DGAC
Approved,
~
~
Po
"C
NR
Ng
NTL
t4
H.E.S.
D.E.S.
B. T .P.
B.T .A.
350B2
jl. ()
89-17
-I
Page5
1
FLIGHTMANUAL
.SECTION
2
LIMITATIONS
CONTENTS
Pages
2.1
OPERATING
LIMITATIONS
1
APPLICABILITY
TYPESOF OPERATION
APPROVED
BASIS OF CERTIFICATION
'
WEIGHT
LIMITS
"I
CENTRE-Of-GRAVITY
LIMITS
MAXIMUM
SPEED
APPROVED
FLIGHT ENVELOPE
MAIN ROTORSPEED
ROTORBRAKELIMITATION
TORQUE
LIMITATIONS
10
,e
2.2
-~
11
ENGINELIMITATIONS
12
LUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIMITATIONS
13
ELECTRICALANDHYDRAULIC
POWER
SYSTEMLIMITATIONS --7
14
LANDINGANDSTOPPINGLIMITATIONSON SLOPES
15
RESTRICTIONS
16
MINIMUN CREW
17
TRANSPORT
OF PERSONNEL
18
LIFED COMPONENTS
PLACARDS
AND INSTRUMENT
MARKINGS
1
PLACARDS
INSTRUMENT
MARKINGS
DGAC
Approved:
i~
350 B2
2.0.P
89-17
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION2.1
OPERA~~-~~TIONS
1
APPLICABILITY
THE LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTIONAREMANDATORY.
They cover the basic aircraft
version.
Any additional
restrictions
resulting
from installation
of optional
equipment items are specified
in the relevant SUPPLEMENTS.
TYPESOF OPERATIONAPPROVED
Operating the helicopter
-Day VFR flight
is approved, out of icing
-Night
VFR flight,
when the
serviceable,
provided
such
regulations
3
conditions,
for:
equipment
items are jnstalled
is permitted
by the flight
and
concerned.
BASIS OF CERTIFICATION
The helicopter
of the country
required
operation
is approved in the "NORMAL"category
of FAR PART 27.
WEIGHTLIMITS
-Maximum permissible
weight:
2250 kg
(4961lb)
.
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 B2
2.1
89-17
Page 1!I
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 CENTRE
OFGRAVIlY
LIMITS
5.1
Longitudinal
C.C!.
The c.g. datum is located -3.40 m (133.8 in) forward of the main rotor
head centre line.
The longitudinal
c.g. limits
are given by the graph below:
3.
3.25
:
CENTRAGE
3.30
3.35
( m)
3.40
2400 ~:~~:~:~:~:::::
:~::~::;~:: :~:~;~~:~::::::
~::.:~:;~:
::~:::::::: ::: :~;;~;~:~~:~:~:~:
::~:~::~;~;~:;~
;~:~;:~:~
:::
~
i
...0 000000
18001;,~;1
:::::000
5500
0..'.0.0.0000'0'0..0.0000.
0.00::
;;;::~~;
.;~.:o
:,0:
i
~ 1750:;:;:
1600:.:00:
00..
~
1400...,0.
GO
~ci
LIMITE
ARRIERE
REARWARD
LIMIT
:;::::;:; 3858
',:.:': 3500
0..
:::;:: 3000
0.0.
IT
i
5.2
Lateral
-L.H.
c.o.
limit:
0,18
-R.H.
limit:
The datum is the aircraft
m (7.08
0.14 m (5.51
in)
in)
symmetry plane.
6 MAXIMUM
SPEED
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
VNE with
doors closed
VNE Power-on
-Absolute
VNE is 155 knots (287 km/hr -178 MPH) at zero pressurealtitude.
-At
higher altitudes
this speed is to be reduced by 3 knots (5,5 km/hr
or 3,5 MPH) per 1000 ft and 18 km/hr per 1000 m,
VNE values versus altitudes
are marked on the airspeed indicator,
-In
cold weather the following must be subtracted from VNE:
10 knots (19 km/hr -12 MPH) when O.A.To is below -30. C.
VNE Power-off
-Absolute
VNE is 125 knots (231 km/hr -144 MPH) at zero pressurealtitude.
-At
higher altitudes
this speed is to be reduced by 3 knots (5,5 km/hr
-3,5 MPH) per 1000 ft or 18 km/hr per 1000 m.
-In
cold weather, reduce the VNE as follows:
20 knots (37 km/hr, 23 MPH) when O.A.T. is below -20.C without
dropping below 65 knots (120 km/hr, 75 MPH).
I
2.1.
R
DGAC
Approved:
350
82
-=
Page
2
--,.'--
FLlGiT MANUAL
tj
I
I
I RR2E I
I
I
RR2E SupersedesRR20
: Flight in falling snow.

Add the following text in Section 2.1. para. 7 "ApprovedFlight
envelope".
7.4
Fliqht
in fallino
-Flight
flight
snow
when viSibility
in falling
is greater
than 1500 m (0.81 /11) :
""
snow is authorized.
Flight when visibility

is 800 to 1500m (0.43 to 0.811t1) :
the total flying time in falling snowis limited to
10 minutes. This time limit includes the time required to
leave all snowyconditions. irrespective of the visibility.
-Flight when visibility
is less than 800 m (0.43 1f1) : flight
in falling snowis prohibited.
m
; For the preparation before flight.
refer to Supp. 4.
.
,
..".
Ix;A.CApproved
---IAIBICIOIEIFIGIHI
35082
93-19
2.1
Page 3
*B2*
FLIGHT MANUAL
6.2VNE
withdoors
removed
VNE is limited
to 70 knots
permissible
configurations:
.4
~~
doors removed
2 R.H. doors removed
.2 L.H.
doors removed
(130
km/hr
-Any
-B1
other
MPH) for
configuration
is
prohibited
APPROVEDFLI GHT ENVELOPE
7.1
Altitude
Maximum substantiated
7.2
pressure-altitude,
20000 ft
(6096
m)
Temperature
"-
~::=-:emperature
40 *C
For temperatures
in Cold Weather-Maximum
7.3
lower than
(SUP.4)
-25*C,
refer
to -Instructions
temperature
Manoeuvring
Do not
for
Operation
ISA +35*C limited
to
+50*C
limitations
exceed
reversibility
8
the following
the
load factor
corresponding
to the servocontrol
limit.
MAIN ROTORSPEED
8.1
Power on
.On
the
.In
stabilized
ground
at
low pitch
380.:.
flight
5 r~
390 + 4 r~
-5
8.2
Power
off
.Maximum
430 r~
320 r~
.~~~n::e-:~~-::~::-::~-:::-~:::~-:::::-~:-~-
-.below
.above
9
DGAC Approved:
[f]
(continuous
( intermittent
sound)
sound).
ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATION

-Maximum
-Minimum
360 r~
410 r~
rotor
time
speed for rotor

brake
between two consecutive
application:
brakings
170 r~
5 minutesI
350 B2
~.JlI
89-17
Page 3I
FLIGHT MANUAL
10 TORQUE
LIMITATIONS
When
airspeedis lowerthan 40 kt (74 km/hr) (46 MPH)
:
-Maxim~
-Maxim~
transient torque (10 sec.)

continuous torque:
: 107 %
100 %
When airspeed is equal to or higher

-Maxim~ continuous torque:
than 40 kt (74 km/hr) (46 MPH):

94 %
11 ENGINELIMITATIONS
The aircraft
is equipped with a TURBOMECA
*ARRIEL 101* engine.
Operating limitations
are determined by the free turbine rotation
(Ng), by the exhaust gas temperature (t4) or by the gas generator
speed (Nf) depending on the operating conditions.
speed
rotation
11.1 Gas Generator Speed

-Maxim~
transient
rating
(less
than 5 sec.)
Ng = 107.5 % -Ng diff
= +6
-Maxim~ takeoff rating (5 minutes)without P2air bleed -Ng diff -0

-Maxim~
continuous rating:
with P2 air bleed

Ng = 98 %
-Ng dfff
-Ng diff
= -0.6
= -3.5
: 100%Ngcorresponds
to 51800rpm.
11.2 t4 Tsnperature
-Maxim~
for engine starting
795'C
-Maxim~
-Maxim~
on takeoff
continuous
845'C
795.C
-Maximuntransient during starting (5 sec. max.)-865'C
11.3 FreeTurbineSpeed
-Maxim~
continuous
equivalent
-Transient limits (5 sec. max.)

.minim~
.maximum
417 rpm
330 rpm
463 rpm
NOTE:A rotor speedof 394rpmcorresponds

to a free turbire speedof
-42452
rpm.
DGAC
Approved:
[fJ
350B2
.-
2.1
89-17
Page4
FLIGHT MANUAL
.11.4
~
11.4.1
Standard Fuels
Type of fuel
Kerosene
NATO
symbol
Anti-ice
Additive
-50
Yes
(AVTUR-FSII X JP8)
Kerosene -50
(AVTUR) (JP1)
Kerosene
s
-dash
11.4.2
nlJnber.
Emergency fuels
Type of fuel
NATO
SPECIFICATION
U.
Aviation
Gasoline
F 12
MIL G 5572
-AIR
340180/87
(AVGAS)
0
5
Au omo ive
Gasoline
estrictions
-Within
anyone period between overhauls of the engine. the use of
gasoline is limited to 25 hours maximum.
-Add 2 %of mineral lubricating
oil if possible.
-Hp
up to 1500 ft.
-Fuel
temperature up to 30"C.
11.5 Fuel Pressure

-Pressure
in the event of filter
clogging:
under 0.4 bar.
-Prec10gging
indicator set for 200 mb differential
pressure.
: The filter
DGAC Approved:
[I]
is equipped with a clogging
indicator.
350 82
~.
89-17
JL
Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.5
Additives
11.5.1 Anti-Ice
Additive
If the fuel does not contain a fuel system icing inhibitor,

the use
of an anti-icing
additive is canpu1sory if O.A.T. is below OOC. The
additive shall comply with French specification
AIR 3552 (equivalent
to MIL-I-27585, O.Eng.RO2451, S 748, PHILLIPS PFA/55MBJ.
Maximumconcentration
11.5.2 Antistatic
shall
be from 0.08 7; to 0.15 7; by volume.
Additive
SHELLASA 3 ; maxim~ concentration:
0.00017;
by volume.
12 LUBRIFICATIONSYSTEMLIMITATIONS
12.1 Authorized
Main and Tail Gearbox Lubricants
-Synthetic
oil (3
-Synthetic
oil (3
-Synthetic
oil (5
-Synthetic
oil (5
-Mineral-base
oil
cstJ
cst)
cst)
cst)
.
NATO0 148 or
NATO0 150 or
NATO0 155 or
NATO0 160 or
NATO0155 or
Mineral-base and synthetic oils

In the event of a change in oil
in the Maintenance Manual.
are not miscible.

specification,
refer
MIL-L-7808
AIR 3514
MIL-L-23599
O.Eng.RD 2797
MIL-L-5085
to procedure defined
12.2 M.G.B. Oil Pressure and Temperature

The oil low pressure warnin9 light
must remain off in flight.
and the oil
overheating
warning light
12.3 Authorized EngIne Lubricants

LUBRICAN
NORMAL
OIL
whole flight
envelope
TYPE
Synthetic
5 CST
NATO
SYMBOL
0155
SP CIFICATION
FRENCH
USA
MI -L
-23699
UK
-
--O.ENG.RO
OTHER
OILS
Temperature
below + 15OC
In the event of a change in oil specification,

defined In the Maintenance Manual.
OGAC
Approved:
2497
--
refer
350B2
to procedure
89-17.
Page
5 ~l
~. Jl
FLIGHT MANUAL
.EJ
Paragraph12.3
Replace the existing text as follows:

12.3 Aoproved EnQine Lubricants
NORMAL
OIL TYPE
USE
NATO CODE
SPECIFICATION
FRENCH
Medium synthetic oil

5 cSt at 98.9'C.
U.S.A.
0156
OTHER
U.K.
MIL L.23699
.
OILS
AUTHORIZED
BUT NOT RECOMMENDED
PROHIBITED ABOVE 15'C
OIL TYPE
NATO CODE
SPECIFICATION
FRENCH
0.148
U.S.A.
U.K.
MIL.L7808
Fluid synthetic oil

3 to 3.5 cSt at 98.9'0
0.150
AIR 3514
Fluid synthetic oil

3.9 cSt at 98.9'C
OTHER
USE PROHIBITED
0
OIL TYPE
NATO CODE
OILS
BELOW -10'C
SPECIFICATION
FRENCH
Thick synthetic oil

7.5 cSt at 98.9'C
0. 149
U.S.A.
U.K.
DERD2487
: -The temperature limitations

mentioned above apply to engine starting.
-When the oil specification
or grade differs from the approved one,
the engine manufacturer's
agreement must be obtained for using this
oil.
-The oils mentioned under OTHEROILS may be the subject of particular

recommendations from the engine manufacturer.
-Comnercial
designation of oils authorized for engines is specified
in
TUR8OMECAdocument.
-In
the event of a change in oil grade or specification,
the oil
system must be flushed as prescribed in TUR80MECA
Maintenance Manual.
).
(
\
DGAC
Approved:
W
350
82
2.1
92-33
-*B2*
Page6
FLIGHT k/..
EJ
~:
1)
RR 2B supersedes RR2A.
For helicopters
subjected to the restrictions
laid down in
Airworthiness
Directive No 91-D95-057B, or in Service Telex
No Ol-32,or in Airworthiness
Directive N 91-156(B), add the
following
to the prohibited manoeuvres of paragraph 15 :
-Intentional
engine shutdown in flight.
Mark the following
on the instrlanent
panel:
.INTENTIONALENGINESHUTDOWN
IN FLIGHT IS PROHIBITED.
2)
The above restriction

Mod. TU 221.
does no longer apply after
embodiment of
.
DGACApproved
IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
2.1
91-29
PAGE 7
FUGIfT MANUAL
15 PROHIBITED
MANOEUVRES
For the helicopters subjected to the restrictions
specified in paragraph A
of Ainworthiness Directive No. 90-105B (and further revisions), or in
AEROPASTIALE
Service Telex No. 0125B (and further revisions), add the
following prohibited manoeuvres:
-Autorotational
-Intentional
I-
-CI
landing training
de-synchronization
without engine shut-down.

of the engine (torque lower than 10%).
DGACApproved:
350 B2
2.1
90-29
Page 7
~B2"
L-
FLIGHT MANUAL
.12.4
~1ne
Oil Pressure and Temperature
12.4.1 Oil Pressure

-Minimum pressure above 85 % Ng
-Minimum pressure between 70 % and 85 % Ng
-Maximum pressure outside starting sequence
1.8 bar (25 psi)

1.3 bar (18.9 psi)
5
bar (72.5 psi)
12.4.2 Oil Temperature

-Maximum oil
-Minimun oil
temperature
temperature before power application
115"C
--O"C
13 ELECTRICALANDHYDRAULIC
POWER
SYSTEMLIMITATIONS
13.1 Hydraulic
.13.1.1
System
~
-Synthetic
-Mineral-base
If the fluid specification
is changed. refer
13.1.2
Hydraulic
System Pressure
In flight
the warning light
13.2 Electrical
MIL-H-83282 (recoovnended)
MIL-H-5605 (AIR 3520 DTD585 -NATO H 515)
to the procedure specified
must be off.
System
-Maximum voltage
Rated voltage range 25-29 V
-Maximum current
31.5 V
150 A
14 LANDINGANDSTOPPINGLIMITATIONSON SLOPES
-Nose-up
-Nose-down
-Sideways
10'
5'
S'
15 RESTRICTIONS
The following are prohibited:
-Flying
in icing conditions
-Aerobatics
-Engine power reduction in flight
autorotational
traIning.
using fuel
flow control
except for
15 MINIMUMCREW
One pilot.
DGACApproved:
m
in starboard seat.
350 82
2.1
89-17
Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
17TRANSPORT
OF
PERSONNEL
NlJI1berof persons carried:
6 maximum(pilot
.
included)
18 LIFED COMPONENTS
Lifed canponents. and the corresponding S.L.L. are indicated in the
Master Servicing Recommendations(P.R.E.).
SECTION
5.99. and must be
replaced in accordance therewith.
.
.
DGAC
Approved:
[]
350
B2
~.1l.
89-17
Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
2.2
PLACARDS
AND INSTRUMENT
MARKINGS
1
PLACARDS
1.1 Plates
Displayed
.Operating
in the Cockpit
limitations
THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATEDIN COMPLIANCEWITH T

APPROVED ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL.
HE D.G.A.C
THE AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS SECTION DF THE ROT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MUST BE COMPLIED WITH
ORC
RAFT
8.
1.2 Loading InstructIon
Plates
.On the side face of the

control pedestral
.In
the rear hold
CHARGESREPARTIES
MAXI
DISTRIBUTED
LDAD-iM~;;.
SUR
PlANCHER
CABINE
.In
the L.H.
AR.R'ERE
ON REARCABIN FLOOR
SUR PlANCHER AVANT GAUCHE
ON LH. FORWARDCASIN flOOR
3IQ.g
hold
CHARGE
MAXI.120kg
; MAX.LOAD
2641b
~~~o':D.~~~:;E~OiARGE
REPAAT'E
MAXI
1 DISTRIBUTED
lOAD.MAXI:==
SO..
mu
:6821
ISOIg
J301b
.In
the R.H. hold
~ CHARGE
MAXI.100k
~ MAX..LOAD
220lbg
1.3 Fuel
Placard
A placard on the instrument panel displays the correspondence between
the fuel contents gauge percentage and the fuel quantity for the
selected units.
DGAC
Approved:
[f]
35082
2.2
89-17
Page 1
-01-
~---
FLIGHTMANUAL
2 INSTRUMENT
MARKINGS
Colour code
-Red
-Red with white hatching
-Yellow
-Green
-White
INSTRUMENTS
: Safety limit
: VNE. power-off
,Caution range
,Normal operating range
,Equipment operating limit.
MARKINGS
AIRSPEEDINDICATOR
( NOTE)
Red
Red
Gree
TORQUE
INDICATOR
Red
Red line
Green arc
Yellow arc
White triangle
Red line
ROTOR
AND
ROTOR Yellow arc
FREE
RANGE
125 kt / 231 km/hr/144 MPH
155 kt / 287 km/hr/178 MPH
from 40 to 155 Kt
74 to 287km/hr-4"6 to 178 MPH
%
100 %
10 -94 %
94 -100 %
170 rpm
320 rpm
320 -375 rpm
Green arc
Yellow arc
375 -394
394 -430
rpm
rpm
Red1ine
430 rpm
Red line
330 rpm
Yellow arc
330 -375 rpm
TURBINE
TACHOMETER
FREE
TURBINE Green arc

Red line
NG DIFFERENCE
rNDICATOR
Green arc
Yellow line
Yellow arc
375 -417
417 rpm
rpm
From lower stop to -3.5

-3.5
From -3.5 to 0
Red line
Red triangle
+6
EXHAUST
GAS
Greenarc
300 -795"C
TEMPERATURE
(T4)
INDICATOR
Yellow arc
Red line
Red triangle
795 -845"C
845"C
865"C
NOTE, Each altitude marking corresponds to

-a
power-on VNE value for temperatures
above-30"C.
DGAC
Approved,
m
350 82
~"~
89-17
Page2
FLIGHTMANUAL
INSTRUMENTS
MARKINGS
ENGINEOIL PRESSURE
Red arc
INDICATOR
Green arc
Yellow arc
ENGINEOIL TEMPERATURE
Green arc
INDICATOR
Red line
Green arc
RANGE
1.3 -1.8 bar
(18.9 -25.1 p.s.i.J
1.8 -5
bar
(26.1 -72.5 p.s.i.J
above 5 bar (72.5 p.s.i.J
30 -115'C
115'C
Yellow arc
0.4 -0.9 bars

(5.8 -13.1 p.s.iJ
0 -0.4
bar(O -"5.8 p.S.i
VOLTMETER
Green arc
Yellow arc
Red line
26 -29 Volts
29 -31.5 Volts
31.5 Volts
AMMETER
Red line
150 A.
FUELPRESS. INDICATOR
.
.
DGAC
Approved:
m
350 B2
~.~
89-17
Page3
-01-
--
I
FLIGHT MANUAL
.SECTION
3
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
CONTENTS
3.1
INTRODUCTION
AUTOROTATION
LANDING
ENGINEFAILURES
GOVERNOR
FAILURES
ENGINEFIRE
.5
3.2
Pages
EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
SMOKEIN THE~""..~~.~
TAIL ROTORFAILURE
4
4
SYSTEMFAILURES
1
LOW(OR NO) FUEL PRESSURE
ENGINESYSTEMFAILURES
Ng diff-
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEMFAILURES
BLEEDVALVEFLAGON Ng INDICATOR
TORQLE-t4-NRINOlCATORFAILURES
3.3 WARNING-CAUTION-AOVlSORY
PANELANDAURALWARNING
C!D
AURALWARNING
WARNING-CAUTION-ADVlSORY
PANEL
DGACApproved:
[fJ
350 B2
~.().f1
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.SECTION
3.1
EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
1
INTRODUCTION
The procedures
outlined
in this
section
deal with the common types of
anergencies
; however,
the actions
taken in each actual
emergency must
relate
to the canp1ete situation.
Throughout
this section,
-land
immediately-,-land
as soon as possibleand -land as soon as practicab1eare used to reflect
the degree of
urgency and are to be interpreted
as follows:
-land
(or ditch)
Immediately
-land
as soon as possible:
land at the nearest site
at which a safe
landing
can be made
-land
as soon as practicable:
extended flight
is not reconwnended. The
landing
site and duration
of the flight
are at the discretl6n
of the
pilot.
.
2
2.1
AUTOROTATIONlANDING
Autorotation
landing
Procedure
following
Engine
Failure
-Set
low collective
pitch.
-Monitor
and control
rotor
r.p.m.
-Establish
approximately
65 knots (120 km/hr) airspeed.
-Move the fuel
flow control
to the shutdown position.
-According
to the cause of loss of the engine:
.Re-light
the engine (see paragraph 3.2 of this
Section).
.Otherwise
: close the fuel shut-off
valve
switch off:
the booster
punp
generator
alternator
(if
installed)
electrical
power master -AlL-OFF-
(if
switch
smell of burning).
.Manoeuvre to head the helicopter

Into the wind In final
approach.
.At a height
of approximately
65 ft (20 m) above the ground, flare
to a nose-up attitude.
-At
height
20-25 ft (6-8 m) and at constant
attitude,
gradually
apply
collective
pitch to reduce the sink-rate.
-Resune
level attitude
before
touch-down,
and cancel any side-slip
tendency.
-Gently
reduce collective
pitch after
touch-down.
NOTE:
2.2
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE TAIL SKID MAY TOUCH THE GROUNDFIRST.
landing
-Do not
-Control
-Cushion
-Reduce
.DGAC
after
Approved:
m
Engine
Failure
in Hover I.G.E.
reduce collective
pitch.
yaw.
touch-down
by increasing
collective
pitch.
collective
pitch as soon as the aircraft
is
on the ground.
350 B2
~.jl
89-17
Page1
".I~.
~IIIIIIII..FL
IGHT
MANUAL
2.3Landing
afterEngine
Failure
inHover
C.G.E.
-Reduce collective pitch.

-Apply forward cyclic pitch to gain aIr speed according to available
height.
-Terminate
in accordance wIth paragraph 2.1 procedure.
2.4
Autorotation
Landing Training
Procedure
-Reduce collective
pitch to establish autorotation configuratIon.
-Monitor
and control rotor r.p.m.
-During final approach, shut down the engine, or reduce power,
maintaining the Ng above 67 X.
-After
touch-down, still
at low collective
pItch, apply the normal
start
ingprocedure.
3 ENGINE
FAILURE
3.1Flame-out
inFlIght
The symptoms of an engine failure

.Jerk
in the yaw axis (only
are as follows:
in high-power flight).
.Drop
inrotorspeed
(aural
warning
sounds
below
360
r~).
.Torque at zero.
.Ng falling
off to zero:
.Generator warning light illumInates.
.Engine oil pressure drop warning light illuminates.
In the event of an engine failure
in flight,
carry out autorotation
transition
procedure (see paragraph 2).
3.2
RelIghting
the Engine in FlIght
The normal relighting

ceiling is 13000 feet,
attempted throughout the altitude envelope.
Proceed as outlined
-Booster
but,
relighting
may be
below:
pumps -on
-Generator
-on
-Wait until Ng falls below 30 X then
carry out normal starting
procedure.
In order to avoid any jerk on re-synchronlzation,

accelerate the engine
progressively,
when free turbine speed approaches rotor speed.
DGAC
Approved:
m
350
B2
~.1l .
89-17 Page
2
FLIQiT
MAN
G
2.4
AUTOROTATIONAL
LANOING
1RAININGPROCEDURE
For the helicopters
subjected to the restrictions
specified
in paragraph A
of Ai !"WOrthiness Di rective
No. 90-1058 (and further
revisions),
AEROPASTIALE Service Telex No. 01258 (and further
revisions),
autorotational
-Reduce
-Monitor
-shut
landing training
collective
and
pitch
control
to
rotor
down the engine (fuel
-After
landing,
engine stops.
with
procedure is as follows :~
establish
r.p.m.
auto
then,
rotational
without
DGAC
Approved:
configuration.
delay,
flow lever in the .shut-down. gate).
the collective
lever
in
low position,
-APply the rotor brake.

-After
rO1:or stopping, apply the normal starting
t;)
or in
the
wait
until
the
procedure.
350 82
3. 1
90-29
Page2
"B2"
FLIGHT MANUAL
.4
GOVERNOR
FAILURE
4.1
Samesymptoms as for complete engine failure but after a few seconds, Ng

stabilizes
at a low r.p.m. value (less than 70 h).
.Establish
autorotation I.A.S. 65 kt (120 km/hr), then advance the fuel
flow control into the emergency sector. Ng and t4 should rise.
Control engine speed to 70 % Ng.
If necessary. increase collective
pitch to bring rotor speed to
350r.p.m.
.Increase
fuel flow until rotor speed is approximately 380 r.p.m.
.Trim collective
pitch and fuel flow control to hold level flight
at
this rotor speed.
j
i
Large Drop in Fuel Flow Rate
4.2
Exessive Fuel Flow Rate

Ng, t4, NR and torque increase
.Do not reduce collective
pitch.
Reduce fuel flow until rotor speed corresponds to a position of
the indicator pointer in the centre of the green area.
.Continue flight
with the governor out of action. Any reduction of
collective
pitch will cause an increase in rotor speed which must be
counteracted by adjusting the fuel flow control position.
In both cases mentioned above, the landing approach should be made
along a low gradient path, at 65 knots (120 km/hr) I. A. S., holding the
rotor speed at the upper limit of the green area (394 r.p.m.) using
the fuel flow control.
In final approach, reduce forward speed without
touching the fuel flow control.
The rotor speed will drop when the
collective
pitch is increased on touchdown. After touchdown, reduce
the fuel flow control setting before decreasing the collective
pitch.
4.3~
Surging is evidenced by hunting of the r.p.m., torque and t4 indications
and jerks in the yaw axis.
.Change the collective
pitch setting.
If surging persists while fuel pressure and engine oil pressure are
correct, reduce fuel flow slightly
to leave the governed range.
If surging still
persists,
land as soon as possible and shut down
the engine if there is a tendency to divergence (see paragraph 2.1).
.
5
5.1
ENGINEFIRE
Fire during Engine Start
-Close the fuel shut-off
cock and apply the rotor brake if necessary.
-Switch off the booster pumps.
-Crank the engine for 10 seconds then switch off the battery.
-Use the nearby extinguishers to fight the fire.
~
..,
DGAC
Approved:
m
350B2
89-17
3.1
Page
3
FLIGHT MANUAL
5.2 Fire in Flight (*FIRE*light on)
-Enter autorotation
(seeparagraph
2.1).
-Close
-Switch
the fuel
off the
shut-off
booster
(if installed).
-Switch
off
of burning.
the
cock to shut down the engine.

pumps, generator
and alternator
electrical
master
*ALL OFF* switch
if
there
is a smell
SMOKE IN THE CABIN
6.1
If
Source
of Smoke is
-Shut
off the
-If
necessary,
identified --
corresponding
use the fire
system.
extinguisher-.
-Air the cabinbyopening:
6.2
The
.The
front
ventilator
ventilation
ports
.The
bad weather
If
source
windows.
of Smoke is
not
identified
-Shut
off the heating -demisting
system.
If the smoke does not clear:
-Switch
off the electrical
master switch (*ALL OFF-).
-When the smell of smoke has cleared,
set all switches
to *OFF*,
including
the generator
and alternator
(if
installed),
close the
cabin ventilators.
-Reset
the *ALL OFF- electrical
master switch to normal position.
-Switch
on the generator,
check voltage
and current.
-If
everything
is normal,
switch
on the circuits
one by one until
the
malfunction
is identified.
NOTE,
If
the
electrical
-appropriate
7
power
procedure,
supply
system
as detailed
is
faulty,
in Section
carry
out
the
3.3.
TAIL ROTOR FAILURE
7.1
Tail
Rotor
Drive
Failure
Lossof the tail rotor ~npower-on

flight results in a yawmovement
to
the left;
the extent
of such rotation
will
speed configuration
at the time the failure
7.1.1
Failure
of
the
Tail
Rotor
in Hover
or
at
depend
occurs.
on the
power
and
~---
Low Speed
-I.G.E.
: bring the aircraft
to the ground by reducing
collective
pitch before
the yaw rate
is too high.
-O.G.E.
: reduce collective
pitch
moderately,
to reduce yaw torque,
and simultaneously
start
to pick up speed.
.If
installed
DGAC
Approved:
crJ
350B2
~.Jl
89-17
Page4
~-
~:
FLIGHT MANUAL
.B
Add the following text to paragraph "7 TAIL ROTOR FAILURE" :
CAUTION:
LANDING IS MADE EASIER BY A WIND COMING FROM THE RIGHT. IF THE

AIRSPEED is LOWER THAN 20 kt (36 km/h), GO-AROUND IS iMPOSSIBLE
DUE TO THE LOSS OF EFFICIENCY OF THE FIN.
-8
.
.
DGAC Approved
IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
3 .1
00-48
Page 4
RR"
FLIGHT MANUAL
.7.1.2
Failurein Forward
Flight
-In forward flight
reduce the power as much as possible and maintain
forward speed (weathercock effect),
select a suitable landing area
for a steep approach at a power enabling a reasonably coordinated
flight.
-On final approach, shut down the engine and make an autorotative
landing at the lowest possible speed.
7.2
Tail Rotor Control Failure

-Set I.A.S. 70 knots (130 km/hr), in level flight.
-Press the hyd. accumulator test push-button (this cuts off hydraulic
power to the yaw servocontrol and depressurizes the load-cOOtpensating
servo accumulator). After 5 seconds, reset the test button to the normal
position.
-Make a shallow approach to a clear landing area with a sli'ght side

slip to the left.
Perform a run-on landing;
the side slip will be
reduced progressively as power is applied.
.
J
DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
3.1
89-17
Page5
---=~
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION3.2
~TEM
FAIL~ES
FUEL SYSTEMFAILURES
1.1
No fuel pressure
Failure is confirmed by i11unination
Section 3.3 para. 2.2.
If failure
is not confirmed.
Flight may be continued.
1.2
Low fuel
~
'\:J1
of the FUELP. warning light.
the faulty
See
item is the fuel pressure gauge.
pressure
Failureis co--:;;rmed
by i11unination
of theF.FILT.warn1ng.1ight.
See
Section3.3para.2.2.
If failure is not confirmed.
Flight may be continued.
2
the faulty
item is the fuel pressure gauge.
ENGINESYSTEMFAILURES
2.1
Low Engine Oil pressure *Gauge pointer

-Test
Warning-Caution-Adv1sory
in red arc for
Ng above 85 %*
Panel and check ENG. P. light
i11uninates.
.Light
does not i11uninate
If torquemeter reading
autorotation
whef)tested:
is much too low, shut down engine and make an
landing.
If torquemeter reading is correct,

.Light
land as soon as possible.
i11lJninates when tested:
If torquemeter reading is much too low, land as soon as possible.
'.
If torquemeter reading
Monitor ENG. P. light.
DGAC
Approved:
'J
is correct.
land as soon as practicable.
35082
3.2
Page
1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2
Engine Oil Temperature higher than Maximumspecified
2.2.1
At Low Speed or in Hover

.Land if possible.
-Stop the engine.
-Check that the cooler fan operates.
.If
landing impossible:
-Increase
speed and reduce power
-Fly at approximately 80 knots (148 km/hr)
The temperature should fall rapidly.
If this result is not obtained, land as soon as possible.
2.2.2
In Cruising
Flight
Reduce
power; then proceedas prescribedabove.
3
3.1
Ng DIFF.,
TORQUE,t4 doNR INDICATORFAILURES
Ng difference
Indicator
.,
Failure
In the event of an indicator failure,

do not exceed the maximum
authorized torque value, and keep the t4 temperature below the following
limits:
O.A.T.
t4limit
Below15-C
Above15-C
3.2
730-C
750.C
Torquemeter Failure
In the event of a torquemeter failure,
rise above following Ng limits:
do not allow the engine speed to
Zp(ft)
8000
6000
96
97
94
95
96
97
NG -98
4000
92
93
94
95
96
96
90
91
92
93
94
95
2000
-35
-25 -15
-5
1 (-C)
-TEMP. EXT. -O.A. T.

3.3
t4 Indicator
Failure
-Comply with the Ng limitations

(refer
-Do not attempt to start the engine.
DGAC
Approved:
m
to *LIMITATIONS* section).
350B2
3.2
89-17
Page2.
---
FLIGHT MANUAL
.3.4
AbnormalNR/NfReadings
3.4.1
NR/Nf readings below green arc

-Nf and NR values agree
.Excessive power demand: reduce collective
pitch.
Indicator reading should rise to governed value.
.Governor failure (refer to Section 3.1 paragraph 4).
3.4.2
Different
NR/Nf readings
-NR reading exceeds Nf

.NR reading is incorrect,
except in autorotation (near zero torque).
-Nf reading exceeds NR
On the ground during the starting sequence: reduce the engine fuel.
flow control setting to check for possible freewheel slippage.
.In flight:
NR reading is probably incorrect (refer to 3.5).
"'
3.5
Rotor RPMIndicator
Failure
In the event of complete loss of NR indication:

-Maintain
engine torque above 10 % : NR reading is then gIven by the
Nf poInter.
-Land as soon as possible.
3.6
Free Turbine RPMIndicator
Failure
Check that NR reading remains within governed range when collective

pitch is slowly modified with engine torque above 0 %.
Continue flight.
4
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
FAILURES
4.1
4.2
Yaw Servo-control
-In
hover
-In
cruisIng
Slide-valve
flight:
Main Servo-control
Seizure
: If no movement about the yaw axis, land normally;

If rotation about the yaw axis, cut off hydraulIc
pressure by actuating the switch situated on the
collective
pitch control lever.
Reduce speed, entering into a side-slip
if
necessary, then cut off hydraulic pressure by
actuating the switch situated on the collective
pitch control lever.
Slide-valve
Seizure
-Actuate
the switch, situated on the collective
pitch control lever,
to cut off hydraulic pressure.
Load feedback will be felt immediately;
load feedback may be heavy
if the helicopter
is flying at high speed:
collective
pitch:
20 kg pitch increase load
.cyclic
: 7 to 4 kg left-hand cyclic load
.cyclic:
2 to 4 kg forward cyclic load
.yaw pedals:
practically
no load in cruising flight.
-Reduce speed to 60 knots (110 km/hr) and proceed as in the case of

illumination
.DGAC
Approved:
m
--.J
of the NHYDNlight.
350 82
3.2
89-17
Page3
FLIGHT MANUAL
BLEED
VALVEFLAGONNg DIFFERENCE
INDICATOR
.I
The flag disappears when the bleed valve closes.

The bleed valve is normally open when the engine is shut down, during
starting and at low power.
The Ng values at which the bleed valve opens and closes depend on the
temperature and altitude,
and are specified in the NORMAL
PROCEDURES
Section.
If the flag does not disappear above the specified Ng value, the maximun
available engine power is reduced, especially
in cold weather.
If the flag does not appear below the specified Ng value, engine surging
mayresult.
Avoid sudden power variations.
.
DGAC
Approved:
~
350B2
~.~
B9-17
Page4
4IIJ
FLIGHT MANUAL
SEmON 3.3
WARNING-CAUTION-AD~~~~L
1
AND AURALWARNING
AURALWARNING
The horn sounds to warn of :
-Rotor
speed (NR) between approx. 250 and 360 r.p.m.
-Rotor
speed above 410 r.p.m. (intermittent
sound).
-Hydraulic
pressure drop (below 30 bars).
(continuous
sound).
It is operative only if the .HORN. push-button

When this push-button is out, at nominal rotor
the warning-caution-advisory
panel is ON.
Alarm
-If
-If
procedure
(if
sounds)
of
the HYDwarning light is on :

The malfunction
is in the hydraulic
system; see paragraph 2.
the HYDwarning light is out:

Check NR ;
.If
NR below 360 r.p.m. (continuous sound)
Reduce collective
pitch.
This can only occur in the event of an engine failure.
Check the
engine parameters by pulling slowly on the collective
pitch lever.
.If
NR above 410 r.p.m. (intermittent
sound)
Slightly
increase collective
pitch in oder not to exceed 430 r.p.m.
fmN CIPTIOO
LffiICS
__IN-'~UM
,
, ,.1
0
""1--
00.
~
Ie 410
--n
:;~:::,:,~:.:;,:,::::='
rJl'TIDI""",lIMOJT
I
I ,
CAPTImI
LIOIT
= mIT
'S "laG nMN
JO
HYD
-_00 0
p<
'~
P>3Oboo
UQlT Tro.CUT
.,.
I
nDi
""1-
s:
8
i
DGAC
APproved:
W
I(RII
a]
NJTE
Do
... t
..
~
~
.~.
""'.':
..~.
=
-DE L!!!!!JCAPT""
L'GHT
ODES
...
~_OHI_,","~8ARS,
mADr LmlT -III
250...~"__360,."
.FLA9111G
LDoT
,360...
we,
IS EnIB
..'"
.-.
ET-.
UM
00.
HYD
~
~
~
I
Ie 4tO
--.DE
I
I
CAPTlOO
iURjuarr
IlIT
-P<OOb..
0
HORN
is pushed in.
soeed, the HORNlight
[E!PJ
CAPTIDI
u...TmE9
mIT
--'SHDJ&_JO-
P>3Oboo
.IIJ1[
CN'T'Qo0i!!1J
LIIJITCIIT
.n
--DOGS
WtH ,
ttJFEUn1~~ !ftDPLm-JO_DIIIMDS_'
n_v
If! EnEENzo , ,..
AI()360
.{CGlTDOAS
-.
If! HlGP ,
y-
'.-'TTo.T
4'0...
~,
350 82
:3.:3
90-37
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
WARNING-CAUTION-ADVISORY
PANEL
The Warning-Caution-Advisory
lights of different
colours:
Panel located
on the instrument
panel includes
-Red to indicate a failure

requiring
inrnediate action.
-Amber to indicate a failure
which does not require inrnediate action.
2.1
Red LiQhts
Light
Failure
Pilot
Servo-control
system failure.
The pressure stored in the
accumulators allows sufficient
time to reach the fall-back
speed with hydraulic
servoassistance.
HYD
I Warning
of the pressure drop is also

confirmed by sounding of the horn
in the cabin.
~
action
-In
flight:
.Calmy reduce collective
pitch and qjust the airspeed to between 40 and
60 knots (74 to ill
km/hr)
in level flight.
.Cut off the hydraulic
pressure, using collective
lever pushbutton.
Control loads are felt:
-on collective
pitch
increase
-on forward and LH cyclic.
The horn stops (but the
rotor r.p.m. function
remains operative).
If necessary, increase
I.A.S.,
but the control loac
feedback will also increase.
.Make a flat approach over a
clear landing area and land
with slight forward speed.
Shut down the engine,
holding the collective
pitct
lever on the low pitch stop.
-In
hover
.Land
normally.
: The yaw servo-control

is
equipped with a load
compensator and a
hydraulic accumulator.
which remains pressurized
indefinitely
after a
hydraulic pump failure
or
after hydraulic power
cut-off
via the collective
lever hydraulic power.
release control.
The accumulator may be
depressurizedby pressing
the HYD. TEST pushbutton.
Do not press the HYD.
TEST push button:

this.
would cause inmediate
depressurization
of the
accumulator and the resulting control loads could
be heavy.
FEU/FIRE Refer to Section
DGAC
Approved:
3.1 paragraph 5
Shut down the engine.

holding the collective
pitct
lever on the low pitch stop.
35082
:3.:3 4It
~
Page2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.Red
liQhts
(Cont'd)
Light
PH
BTP
Failure
Main gearbox oil
pressure
Pilot
minimum
action
-Reduce power, and land as

soon as possible.
MGB.P
R
R
R
R
R
R
.R
lH.BTP
Main gearbox oil
max.
temperature
Battery
PH II
Engine oil
maximum te~erature
ENG P
the warning caution
advisory panel to check the

MGB.P light.
.If
the light does not
illuminate,
proceed as for
MGBoil pressure at zero.
.If
the light illuminates,
land and check the M.G.B.
oil level. If the oil level
is normal, fly to the
nearest base.
MGB.T
T.BATT
BAT T.
-Test
pressure
alarm
-Isolate
the battery (pushbutton "OFF") and land as
soon as possible.
-Reduce power.
-Check engine oil
indicator:
pressure
.If pressure
is loworzero
read torquemeter :
.If
reading very low shut
down engine
.If
reading correct land
inmediately
.If
both pressure and
torquemeter readings are
correct,
land as soon as
possible.
I.
DGAC
Approved:
w
350
B2
3.3I
90-37
Page 3I
*01"
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2
AnDer
liGhts
.
.I
Light
GENE
Failure
Pilot
-D.C.
power supply failure
(See NOTE1)
-Overvoltage
detected
GEN
action
-Test
the D.C. voltage.
-Check the position of the
push-button.
-Attempt
to reset
-If
unsuccessful:
Shed the least essential
consumer circuits;
continue
flight,
according to
circumstances,
keeping a ClOSE
check on voltage (22 volts
minimum).
-Maximum
flight timeon
battery :
Day:
50 mn.
Night:
20 mn.
-Land
(see NOTE2)
as soon as practicable.
Seealtitudelimitsafter
BATT
BAT
Battery isolated from the d.c.

network;
no longer charging
(see NOTE2)
KLAXON
Horn not set
HORN
COMB
Fuel quantity less than 60

litres
(15.8 US.Gal)
FUEL
booster pumps have been

switched off.
-Check the push-button (ON).
-Keep a watch on voltage.
-Continue
flight,
according
to circumstances.
-Set
the horn by actuating
the push-button situated on
the control pedestal panel
(see paragraph 6 of this
Section).
-Avoid
large attitude changes.
~
: Remaining usable fuel
allows approximately
18 minutes level
fl ightat maximum
PITOT
(if
.,
fitted!
PORTES
Pitot
heating
system
not
-Check
continuous
Dower.
the push-button
(ON).
energized
-Monitor
One or both baggage hold side

doors unlocked
-Reduce airspeed (120 kt 222 km/hr -138 MPHmaximum).

-Check visually
that doors are
closed.
-If
one or both doors are open,
or if checking is i""ossible
:
Land if possible, or continue
flight
at reduced speed
(120 kt -222 km/hr -138 MPH
DOORS
~
: If sliding
doors fitted
see relevant supplement.
airspeed indicator.
maximum).
R
DGAC
APproved:
W
350B2
~.~.
90-37 Page
4
CO
B
Illumination
of ENGCHIP (MOTLIM) caution light:
Replace the existing
CAPTION
-.
text as follows:
MAlFUNCTION
PILOT ACTION
IENG
CHI~ oilMetal
particles
inengineLand
assoon
aspossible
system.
IIIOTLIMI
I
I
-.
-OCoACApproved:
350
82
3.3
92-33
Page 5
~B2~
'-
FLIGHTMANUAL
[~~J
illumination of ENG CHIP (MOT LlM) caution light:

Modify the text of RR2C as follows:
CAPnON
ENG CHIP
MALFUNCTION
Metal particles In engine 011system.
MOT LlM
PILOTACT10N
Land as soon as passible

It Is prohibited to take off again as
long as the checks scheduled In
TURBOMECA Maintenance Manual
have not been performed.
.
DGAC Approved:
IAI
350 B2
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
3.3
96-<J3
Copyright Euroccpter Canada Umited 1996
PAGE 5
C\
RRO~
FLIGHTMANUAL
.B
Illumination
of ENGCHIP (MOTLIM) caution lioht
Before embodiment of modification
AMS072598 :
In addition to Pilot Action, apply the fire-in

paragraph 5.2 of Section 3.1 if the following
flight procedure specified

occurs:
in
-Smoke in assumed engine area and/or
-Smell of burning in cabin and/or

-Hunting
of engine oil
pressure indicator
pointer.
10;
,DGACApproved:
~
~
350 B2
3.3
92-39
Page
"B2"5--
FLIGHT MANUAL
.2.2
Amberlights (Cond'd)
Light
FaIlure
Pilot
PORTES
DOORS
(Cont'd
~T LIM
-Maintain
low sink rate and flat
landing approach.
Metal particles
oil system
ENGCHIF
action
in engine
-Monitor
oil pressure variations.
the engine parameters (Ng-oi1
temp.) being identical.
If oil pressure increases by
1 bar approx. or if abnormal
hunting of torquemeter pointer
is notIced:
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
Inmediate1yafter
landing:
-Check the engine in accordance
with TURBOMECA
Maintenance
Manual.
-Otherwise.
remove the magnetic
plugs:
.If
fine metal powder is found.
clean the magnetic plug
(with electrIcal
indicating)
and fly to the nearest base
for carrying out the checks
specified In the TURBOMECA
MaIntenance Manual.
.If
shiny particles or dark
shavings are found on one of
the magnetic plugs. take-off
is PROHIBITEDuntil the checks
specifIed in TURBOMECA
Maintenance Manual are
performed.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
~
350B2
~.~
89-17
-'I
Page5
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2
Amber
lights
(Cont'd)
Light
FILTRE C
Failure
Fuel filter
Pilot
clogging
Metal particles
in TGB
detected
LIMBTP Metalparticlesdetected
-Continue
flight
avoiding
prolonged hovering.
-Reduce
engine
power.
in MGB
-Monitor
MGB.P. and MGB.T.
lights.
Should either or both lights
illlJ11inate refer to illlJ11inatior
of relevant light (s),
in
*LIGHT* colunn.
Fuel pressure lower than

0.2 bar on either or both.
plJ11pS
-Check fuel pressure:

If pressure is normal, only
one plJ11pis faulty:
flight
may be continued.
.If
pressure is zero, both
pumps are faulty:
flight
may be continued at an
altitude
lower than 5000 ft
CHIP MGB
P. COMB
FUELP.
action
Reduce engine power

-If
light goes out, continue
flight
at reduced power.
-If
light remains on, land as
soon as possible.
F FILT
LIM BTA
CHIP TGB
(1524
m).
OOTE1 : Whenever an electrical

circuit
failure occurs,
-corresponding
fuse and change it if necessary.
check the
Replacement fuses are provided on R.H. side of cabin.

OOTE2 : List
-battery
of functions
-~
only:
: Battery,
which must remain ON when flying
on the
fuel punps, VHF, Radio-Nav.
-Night: Same
asdayplus: Instrunent
lighting(1 and2),
-horizon,
DGAC
APproved:
~
position
lights,
anticol11sion
light.
350B2
B9-17
~.~
Page
6
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4
NORMA~~~URES
CONTENTS
Pages
4.1
OPERATINGPROCEDURES
1
EXTERNALAND INTERNALCHECKS
CHECKSBEFORESTARTINGTHE ENGINE
1
3
3 STARTING
CHECKSBEFORETAKEOFF
.-6
5 TAKEOFF
6 CLIMBING
6
--7
CRUISING FLIGHT AND MANOEUVRES
APPROACH
AND lANDING
9 AFTER LANDING
4.2
10
USE OF THE HEATING/ DEMISTINGSYSTEM
11
DAILY CHECKS
.DGAC
IN-FLIGHT CHECKPROCEDURES
GROUND
CHECKPROCEDURES
USING THE ENGINE POWER

CHECKCHARTS
Ng DIFFERENCECHECK
Approved:
W
ENGINEPOWERCHECK
-2
.4
350 B2
4.0.P
90-37
Page 1.
FLIGHT MANUAL
SEmON 4.1
OPERA~~-~~URES
1
EXTERNALCHECKS
~
: Ensure that the inspection after the last flight

of the preceding
day and before the first
flight
of the day have been carried out.
-Check
-Carry
that the ground round the aircraft

out the following
check:
R
R
is clean and unobstructed.
~,.-~-- 4~ ---"
.01
~~
3-__~
~7
>'
~
Figure 1
Station
-Total
pressure head (PITOn
-Landing
gear (cross-rneRtJers,
skids, wear-resistant
plates)
Station
-Port
2
hold ---Door
-Fuel
tank and system
-M.G.B.
cowl
-All
lower fairing
-Main Rotor Head
panels
-Hydraulic
Unit/System
-Engine Air Intake
-Rear hold
-Main
Rotor Blades
Station
-Oil
-Tail
-Tail
-Tail
.DGAC
opening action. No loose objects.

Closing, latching.
-Filler
plug closed.
Check M.G.B. oil level (steps).
Close
cowl, check closed.
--Closed,
check
Inspect star, sleeves (peeling),
spherical thrust bearing, adaptaters
(separation).
Check hyd. reservoir fluid level.
Clear (water, snow, foreign matter).
If applicable:
open door, net hooked in
place, close door.
Security (attachment),
inspect from
ground, for signs of impact.
3
leaks
boom and T.G.B.
Rotor Gear Box
unit
Approved:
W
-Cover removed -Check clean

-Security
-visual
check
fairings
No oil under scuppers.

-Security
(Dzus fasteners
Oil level
Security.
locked).
350B2
4. 1
90-37
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Station4
=-:;:~tor
-T.G.B.
Section
~~
blades--Condition
and Tail
boom fairings
of skin, no impact(dents,
etc), laminated stops (separation).

-Security
(Dzus fasteners locked).
-Starboardhold
If necessary:opendoor, checknoloose
objects,
-Landing
gear (crossmembers,
skids, wear resistant
plates)
-All
lower fairing
panels
-External
power receptacle door
-M.G.B.
cowl
close door, check.
-Security
-visual
check.
Closed, check.
-Closed,
check.
-Check engine oil level (steps).
-Foreign
objects on transmission
-Close cowl,check.
deck.
INTERNALCHECKS
-Cabin
-Fire extinguisher
Clean
Fitted
-Fuses
Fitted
-Objects carried
-Door jettison
Stowed
Checked
Figure 2
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Description
Engine monitoring instrument!
and systems
Stand-by compass
Flight monitoring instrument!
Warning-Caution-Advisory
Panel
Yaw Control Pedals
Spare fuses
Cyclic stick grip
Cyclic stick friction
clamp adjuster
Fuse panel
Collective
pitch control
lever
Pilot and Copilot headset
jacks
Item
12
13
14
15
16
17
18*
19
20
21
Description
Utility
power outlet
Cabin heating (*) control
Demister control
Control Quadrant, comprising:
a) Rotor brake control
b) Fuel Flow Control lever
c) Starting
switch
d) Fuel shut-off
control
Collective
Pitch Lock (low
pitch)
Control console
Radio, I.C.S and Radio- Navigation -Control
Panels
Cabin ventilation
ports and
lighting
fixtures
O.A.T. Indicator
Instrument panel lighting
dimllerpotentiometers.
* Optional
DGAC
APproved:
W
35082
4.1 .
89-17
Page2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.Figure
2
I
':0;.:.
d
~l
I.9
SECOURS
P~GE
OUVERT
-: -om--
EMERGENCY
RANGE
~
CLOSED
2
CHECKS
BEFORESTARTINGTHE ENGINE
Determine
aircraft
performance
limits
for
the
expected
flying
conditions
(see kPERFORMANCEk
section)
Ensure
that
weight
and C.G.
limits
are observed.
Carry out the following

checks:
(Item nLlnbers refer
to Figure 2)
-Seats
and control
pedals
,.
-Seat
belts
NOTE,
Check particularly
-this
seat
-Battery
that
the
Adjusted
Fastened
co-pilot
seat
belt
is fastened
and Generator
in circuit
Switches
-ON-
.Lights
on with a/c battery
power:
HYD. GEN. MGBP. PITOT. ENG.P
.Lights
on with external
power:
HYD. GEN. MGB P. ENG P.
-Battery
when
is not occupied.
PITOT.
BAT
voltage
(1])
(4)
Checked
(1)
-Press
the HYD TEST pushbutton
for approx.
2 seconds to depressurize
the
yaw hydraulic
accumulator
in order to center the yaw pedals
(5) (1])
-Flight
controls
-Cyclic
pitch
-Collective
low pitch
control
pitch
stick
control
,
lever,
-Cyclic
stick
friction
lock
-Collective
lever friction
lock
-Rotor
brake released
-Fuel
shut-off
lever
lockwired
-Fuel
Flow Control
DGACApproved:
[g
,.
,.
Freedom of travel
(5) (])
Neutral
(])
Locked
(10)(16)
Adjusted
Adjusted
Forward
Forward
Off
(B)
(10)
(15a)
(15d)
(15b)
350 B2
(10)
lI.JL
89-1]
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
-Test Warning-Caution-Advisory
Panel lamps -WILT TEST
(FIRE light illumination
time delay = approx. 1 sec.)
(17)
-Ng difference indicator:
.Test """""""""""
Ng difference equal to zero.
Ng displayed equal to theoretical
"Ng.MAXTIO PWR"(see section 4.2).
.Bleed valve flag
Visible
(4)
-Hydraulic
pressure
On
(10)
(If isolated the HORNlight will come on)
-Heating system'", demister, air
conditionerOff
(13X14X21)
-Gyroscopic
instrllTlents
On
(17)
.\
~
STARTING(Item nunbers refer
to Figure 2)
-Switch
the booster
pumps..
.Check: on -Fuel
quantity
-Fuel
On console
.iii (17)
",:,"
pressure on each plJnp separately.
-30 seconds after switching on the booster plJnp, press the

"start"
pushbutton
-When Ng reaches 10 %. move fuel flow control forward
about 1/3 of its travel range
(When O.A. T. is below O'C, open the fuel flow control at
the same time the start pushbutton is pressed).
NOTE: In all cases, keep the starter running throughout
-the
starting sequence.
.Check:
Ng increase and
.Control
t4 by modulating the fuel flow as required
(hold t4 below specified "starting
limit")
.Check that the rotor starts to turn.
-At Ng = 40 -45 % release the "start"
push-button
.Check that engine oil pressure rises.
-Gradually
increase the fuel flow, maintaining a constant
rate of rotor acceleration
.Check that the following Warning-Caution-Advisory Panel
lights go out:
(see NOTE)
-PHM (ENG.P) (should be out at 70 % Ng)
-PH BTP (MGB.P)
(15c)
(15b)
-1(Y~RN~i~~g~im~~~~~~~~.
~~~~~~~~~~~.
~~.~~~.
~~~~~~
-KLAXON (HORN) light
-Check
aural warning
flashing
operates
from 250 rpm (NR)

at approximately
350 rpm
Check NR -pointer
in the green zone of the indicator,
the lower limit .'."'..'.."
"..""".""."'.'.."'...
.Check:
fuel flow control in "f11ght" position.
J (4)
near
(3)
NOTE: Ouring engine acceleration.

do not allow NR value to remain
-steady
between 300 and 320 r.p.m.
.Optional
DGAC
Approved:
[]
350
B2
4.1.
89-17
Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
-Disconnect
external
power,
if
used
..~~~~~s:o~~r~~~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~.~:~.~~~.~~:
-Switch
on PITOT heating
On pedestal
Switch on the HORN

.Check that the PITOT and HORNlights
(4)
panel
go out
(4)
-Check:
.All
warning and caution lights
off
.Electrical
system voltage and current
.Engine
-Run
oil
pump separately
fuel
pressure
is correct
FUEL P. warning
light
is
-Switch
(4)
(1)
pressure
each booster
.The
.The
on/engage all
and check that:

(1)
(4)
on
necessary systems (VHF, 1 ights,
windshield wiper*, etc)

!:!QI : Do not use the wiper on a dry windshield
or in light
-Carry
out a hydraulic accumulator test:
.Check:
collective
pitch -locked
.Cut off hydraulic pressure by actuating the test
push-button
On console
.Check that the HYD light illuminates
and HORNsounds
.Move the cyclic stick 2 or 3 times along both axes
separately on 10 % of total travel,
check for hydraulic
(17)
absence of control load.

.Press the test pushbutton to restore hydraulic
pressure
On console
Check that the HORNis cancelled and HYD light
rain.
(10)(16)
(17)
assistance
by
(17)
goes out.
-Carry
out a hydraulic pressure isolation
check:
.Isolate
hydraulic pressure by actuating
the switch on the
collective
pitch lever:
the HYD light illuminates
and
control load is felt immediately, except on yaw pedals, where
control load should remain low because of load-compensating
.Restore
servo.
hydraulic
until
the HYD light
pressure
using the switch:
goes out (2 -3
the HORNsounds
sec.).
: In strong wind, apply a little

forward cyclic and accelerate the
engine, up to approx. 320 rotor r.p.m., as fast as is c~atible
with t4 limitations,
then follow normal procedure.
* Optional
.DGAC
Approved:
350 82
4.1
89-17
c..
.".,..,c.., ,..'.","","-
"ce",
Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
: .If thestartingcyclehasto beaborted,returnthefuel flow

control to the closed position, and switch off the fuel pump
and the generator.
.If
the reason for aborting the start is high E.G.T. (t4) ,
check the battery voltage.
.If
voltage is normal, crank the engine for about 15 seconds
and inrnediately makea second attempt to start, increasing
the fuel flow gradually (without allowing Ng to drop between
cranking and the second attempt to start).
.If
battery voltage falls below 15 Volts during the attempt to
start, it may be impossible to obtain light-up.
CHECKSBEFORETAKE-OFF
-Doors
-Rad~o
-Navigation
naviga~ion.*
-Radlo conmunlcatlon
-General
and cyclic friction
clamps
Closed
Tests, correct operation
R.
Adjusted
-Pressure and temperatures
Correct
-All warning
andcautionlights
Out
5~
Take off by gradually increasing the collective pitch and maintain hover,
head into wind, at a height of about 5 ft (1.5m).
Check that the engine and transmission monitoring instruments are within
their nonnal operating ranges.
For transition from hover, increase speed without increasing the power
demand(power required for hover I.G.E.) and without climbing until I.A.5.
is 40 kt (74 km/hr).
MQIl : The bleed valve flag disappears when the valve closes.
The bleed valve is nonnally open when the engine is shut down,
during starting and at low power. Bleed valve closing dependson the
O.A.T. and on the altitude as shownin the following table of Ng
values at which the bleed valve should close.
Zp (ft)
2000087.1
88.8 90.7 92.4
94
95.6
1500085.987.789.4
91.1 92.7 94.4 95.8
10000
90.1
85
86.788.4
8
".500084.285.987.689.4
91.893.4
95
91 92.694.1
96.3
95.696.9
~
0
83.7 85.4 87.1
88.790.4
-40
-10
-30
-20
91.9 92.7 94.9 96.2 97.6

10
20
30
TEMP. EXT. -O.A.T.
40
50
( .C )
* Optional
DGAC
Approved:
W
350B2
90-37
4. 1.
Page
6,
"
EJ
paragraph 4
COO1Plete
the collective
and cyclic
-Collective
friction
and cyclic
!!QE : Sufficient friction

so that the controls
friction
cl~s
clamps check as follows:

Adjust as required
mustbe applied to the collective and cyclic

do not move without specific
pilot action.
8.-
DGAC
Approved:
m
350B2
4.1
92-33
Page6
*B2*
FLIGHT MANUAL
.5~
-Climb to a height of at least 100 feet (30m), while maintaInIng the same
power setting.
Set an I.A.S. of 55 knots (102 km/h) or that shown at point C on the
height/airspeed
diagram if greater than 55 knots.
-Above
100 ft (30m) the max. continuous
power
speed of 55 kt (102 km/h) may be assumed.
and the
optimum climbing
CRUISINGFLIGHT, MAOOEUVRES
7.1
Cruising
FlIght
-For fast cruise apply the M.C.P. for the prevailing

flight condItions
permitted by the first
of the followIng two limitations reached:
Ng
difference,
or Torque.
.7.2
Manoeuvres
-Maximlln load factor in turns is felt in the form of servo-control
"transparency" ; this phenomenonis smooth, and presents no danger.
-In maximumpower configuration,
it is advisable to decrease collective
pitch slightly
before initiating
a turn, as in this manoeuvre power
requirement is increased.
-In hover, avoid rotation faster than 5 seconds for one full rotation.
8
APPROACH
ANDLANDING
8.1
Approach
-Final
approach should be made into the wind at a low sink rate and
recOllY11ended airspeed
of 55 knots
(120 km/hr).
8.2~
From hover, reduce collective

pitch very gradually until initial
touch-down is made, then cancel collective
pitch completely.
CAUTION:
-NEUTRAL
.DGAC
Approved:
m
WHEN LANDING ON A SLOPE, RETURN THE CYCLIC CONTROLSTICK TO

BEFORE FINAL CANCELLATION OF COLLECTIVE PITCH.
350 B2
LI. JL
B9-17
Page 7
---~
FLIGHT MANUAL
9 AFTER
LANDING
Engfne and Rotor shutdown

-Switch off all unnecessary power-consuning systems.
-Wait 30 seconds until temperatures have stabi11zed, hold Ng corresponding
to full
low pitch (flight
idle) or reduce Ng to 67 and 70 % by retarding
fuel flow control.
-Switch off the generator, fuel pumps, then all other consuner circuits.
-Schutdown the engine by setting the fuel flow control to the schutdown
position.
-Fully
apply rotor brake when rotor speed is :
140 r.p.m. or lower -Normal NR
170 r.p.m. or lower -Maximun NR (High wind condition)
-After
complete rotor stopping:
Press the HYD. TEST push-button and leave it in for 1-2 seconds, then
press
it
out,
1n
.depressurize
.recenter
the
order
to
hydraulic
the yaw pedals,
accunulator.
if required.
10 USEOF THE HEATING/DEMISTING

SYSTEM
At temperatures
exceeded.
higher than +10-C, check that the t4 temp. limits
are not
.
DGAC
Approved:
m
350
B2
lI.Jl.
89-17
Page8
.
.
FLIGiT MANUAl
EI
Paragraph 9 AFTERLANDING
2nd. sub-paragraph read:
-Wait 30 seconds until temperatures have stabilized.
67 .70% by retarding fuel flow control.
reducing Ng to
.
.
I);A.CApproved
IAI
ICIDr-EIFIGIHI
350 62
4.1
94-05
Page 8
*62*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
11
DAILY OPERATINGCHECKS
~::lY helicopter
operation requires three checks:
-check before the first
flight
of the day,
-check
in conjunction with flight,
-check after the last flight
of the day.
These daily checks may be carried out by qualified
maintenance
personnel or by a qualified
pilot.
Any alteration
or detailed inspection to determine serviceability
as a
result of these checks must be done under the supervision of a properly
endorsed Aircraft
Maintenance Engineer and duly entered in the Aircraft
Log Book.
Checks before the first
11.1
fliaht
of the day (BFF)
Outside checks
~:
IF THE AIRCRAFTHAS BEENGROUNDED
FOR MORETHAN ONEWEEK, BEFORE
OPERATINGTHE FLYING CONTROLS,WIPE THE SERVOCONTROl
PISTON RODSWITH
A RAG IMPREGNATED
WITH SERVICEFLUID.
-Check that the area is clean and clear.
-Remove the blade socks, if applicable.
-Perform
the following checks.
~ 5-,
4-n""'",
/(~~~=~~~
~
~,~~~~~~~~~~~~
.~
""':::~;~~2
II
""""""'~,-3-1J..,
,.,.
.../
STATION1
-Transparent
panels ,.."..".'"
Cleanliness
-Pi tot heads and static
vents ...Blanking
cover,
-Sideslip
indicator
Condition
drain
removed
N
..DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
4.1
90-37
Page 9
*01*
.~"'..
,,"
FLIGHT MANUAL
STATION 2
~~
air intake
-MGB """"""""""""""
-Open the engine cowling:
.Transmission
deck and engine..
-Close
the engine cowling
-Tail
pipe cover
-Fuel
tank
-Filler
cap
-LH baggage cn1Jartment door
-Lower cowlings
-Aft
baggage compartment
-Main rotor blades
Blanking cover removed

Oil level
Condition, cleanliness
Correctly
locked
Removed
Purge
Closed
Loads tied down, door locked
Closed
No foreign matter, closed
No dents
STATION 3
-Tail
-TGB
boom and TGB fairings

"""""""""""'.""
Security
Oil level
STATION 4
-Tail
-Tail
rotor blades
Condition
Security
of skin
STATION 5
-RH baggage con1Jartment
.Battery
.Loads
Open
Connection
Tied down,
Close and lock compartment
door ...Closed
-Ground power receptacle

.Transmission
deck and engine..
.Engine oil tank
.Close the engine cowling
Condition, cleanliness
Oil level
Correctly
locked
STATION 6
-Collective
pitch control
and yaw pedals
-Gas generator control
-Rotor
brake control
-Fuel
shut-off
control
-Fire
extinguisher
Free travel
Free movement
Free movement
Forward position,
In place
snap wire fitted
DGACApproved:
350 B2
4.1
90-37
Page 10
.~
~
B
Paragraph 11.2 : Turnaround check (TA)

Complete the Turnaround check as follows:
-Check the engine aft reduction gear magnectic plug (without electrical
indication)
every 5 flying hours maximum.
.
-DGAC-APproved:
W
35082
4.1
92-33 Page
11
"82"
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.2 Turnaround check (TA)

The turnaround
check consists
in :
-checking
fluid levels,
-a rapid check of the main and tail
rotor blade skins,
-checking
that all loads are securely tied down, baggage co~artment
doors and cowlings are correctly
locked.
Should the turnaround time be prolonged, short-term picketing of the
aircraft
is recomnended : blanking plugs, covers fitted,
even blade
socks and poles in winds greater than 40 knots.
CAUTION: IN THIS CASE, ALL PICKETING AND HANDLINGTOOLINGMUSTBE
REMOVED
BEFORE
THENEXTFLIGHT.
.
N
.DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
~. 1
90-37
"'"
",c
Page11
,,"",..c",'"
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.3Check
afterthe1astfl iahtafthedav
(AlF)
~:
This check maintains the aircraft
flightworthy.
It consists in carrying
out a visual or tactile
examination of the condition of a component, an
assembly so as to detect defects which could affect correct operation,
but does not require the use of any special techniques or tooling.
Pay particular
attention
to the elements marked with an asterisk "*".
~
: Magnetic plugs which do not have an electric
indicating
system
may be checked for metal chips during the AlF check nearest to
the 3D-flying
hour limit.
NOTE8 : This check for
-nearest
defects
may be performed during
tothe3D-flying
hour
limit.
the AlF check
(AlFCHECK)
STATION1
-All
transparent
panels .'"
Cleanliness
(clean if
-Door jambs, canopy arch members. No faults
nor cracks
-Cabin
access door
Security and correctly
-Pi tot heads and static
vents ...Fit
blanking covers
required)
locked
STATION2
-lH
baggage compartment door
Condition,
security,
open, all
objects tied down, close and lock
.
N
DGAC
Approved:
W
350
82
~. 1.
90-37 Page
12I
.FLIGiT
MANUAL
EI
Paragraph 11_3 -Check After the Lasr Flight of the Day (AlF)
Station 1
C~lete
the checks with:
-Sliding
window (pre nKldifi-
cations 07-2573 and 07-2582)
Free fran faults. cracks.

unbonding. loss of slide.
.
.
Ix;AC Approved
.-IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 82
4 -1
93-50
Page 12
*62*
FUGHT MANUAL
.[~~
Paragraphe
11.3
After "~".
please
IMPORTANT:
Check After the Last Fliaht of the Day (ALF)

read:
For the ARRIEL lDl engines not modified TU 197 nor TU 202.
When shutting down the engine after the last flight of the day. confirm that there is
no abnormal noise during the autorotation
of the gas generator. This check can be
performed
completion
of 0 cranking operation of no more than
5 seconds.
immediately onafter
engine shutdown.
-
.
.DGAC
~~
APproved:
IAllclDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
4.1
94-08
PAGE 12
.RR.
"
..FLIGHT
MANUAL
B
REPLACES THE INFORMATIONS CONTAINED IN RR 2 H.
Paragraph 113
Check After the Last Fliaht of the Day (ALF)
After GENERAL please read:
.This
.hour
IMPORTANT:
check for defects can be performed during the ALF check before the 3D-flying
or 150 operating cycle limit
For the ARRIEL 1 D1 engines not modified TU 202.

When shutting down the engine after the last flight of the day, confirm that there is
no abnormal noise during the autorotation of the gas generator. This check can be
performed on completion of a cranking operation of no more than 5 seconds,
immediately after engine shutdown
.
./
.
DGACApproved
IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
35082
4.1
97-42
Page 12
"RR.
"" k
,..."
.I
FLIGHTMANUAL
[~J
Paragraph 11.3 -Check
after the last Flight of the day (AlF) :
S1Q1iQn-2
Complete
the checks with:
-DUNLOP servocontrols
No cracks on the body
leading to seepage
DGAC Approved:
IAlclDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
4.1
97-11
page
.R"
8
~
-c
..
FLIGHT MANUAL
B
Paragraph 113
Check After the Last FliQht of the Dav (AL~)
Complete the checks with
~
-LH
landing gear
Shock absorber
Wear resistance plate
-Bidirectional
cross beam
pre Mod. 07-2720
.,...
Condition
Condition. no leaks
Condition
Check for cracks on laminate bearing

upper face. on MGB pick-up side
See NOTE C.
..
.
.
\.~
DGAC Approved:
IAlclDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
4.1
97-42
Page 13
*RR*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
-Shock absorber, LH landing

gear
.Wear resistance plate
-MGB cowlings.
Condition, no leaks
Condition
Open: condition of systems.
locking system
-MGB oil
Check level
-Transmission
deck
Cleanliness
-MGB suspension bars
Security
-Servocontrols,
hydraulic system. Security.
no leaks, lines
-Hydraulic
reservoir
Check fluid level,
security
-Cooling
fan
Motor security,
condition of blades
-Fuel
filter
Security;
check paint marks;
clogging indicator
not visible
-Universal
joint assembly
Security,
pins in place and locked
-MAIN ROTORSHAFT
'" Swashplate bearing:
be performed within
minutes after rotor
check to
five
stops
.Scissors,
swashplates,
swivel bearings
rods,
.Swashplate/pitch
change rod
end-fitting
interface
'" Pitch
No abnormal heating felt when touched

with hand, no grease runs, no change
in colour nor scaling of paint.
No friction
point
No traces of contact,
paint scaling
on swashplate attachment yokes
change rods
PIN 350A37.1S0B.00
to
.05
Rod upper and lower

marks must be visible
'" Rotor shaft PIN 350A37.1076.00

to .06 inclusive.
All visible
section of the shaft.
particularly
under the hub ...Condition
of paint,
crazing, blistering,
tool marks.
'" MAIN ROTORHUB
'" Star
'" Star recesses
.
or play.
'" Spherical
and frequency
thrust adapters
bearings
end-fitting
paint
and aligned
no craks,
corrosion
nor
Security,
general condition
No delamination (splinters)
No cracks
No elastomer
scratches,
faults.
blisters.
unbonding,
extrusion,
cracks.
N
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 B2
4.1
90-37
Page 13
"'01'"
FLIGHT MANUAL
* 2-1ayer frequency adapter
Check for clearance betweenthe

8
adapter
.Self-lubricating
bearings
-Flared
housing magnetic plug
-Shock mount.
* MAIN ROTORBLADES
and
.Systems
metal
condition
of skin,
no
bonding separation of stainless

steel
leading edge and no dents.
Security,
blanking cover fitted
Condition of seal
Open: condition of locking systems
Condition,
security
General
condition,
cleanliness
No leakage
.Controls
.Transmission
deck drain
-Freewheel
Interference
Not plugged
Operate from the tail
rotor:
the free turbine should be driven

when the tail
rotor turns clockwise.
When the tail rotor turns counterclockwise, the freewheel should desynchronize (less important load).
-Tail
-Aft
"
shim.
SEE NOTEB
No debris nor play. SEE NOTEB
...No metal chips. SEE NOTEA
Security
Security,
-Engine
air intake
.Aerospatia1e
air intake
-Engine cowling..
-Engine mount
-Engine
and engine compartment
.Engine and accessories
the
SEENOTEB
Security. blanking cover fitted
pipe
baggage compartment door ...Security,
closing
STATION3
-Horizontal
stabilizer,
fin,
tail bumper
-TGB
Security, condition
Oil level, no leaks
STATION
4
-TGB
Security by applying a load on the

drive
shaft
.Be11crank hinge pin
No play
.Sealant
Condition
bead
.Magnetic plug
-Horizontal
tail
stabilizer,
bumper
No metal chips. SEENOTEA

fin,
Security, condition
DGAC
APproved:
w
350 82
4.1
90-37
Page14:
"01*
FLIGHT MANUAl
.[~~~
Complete
the checks
with :
~:
-Gas generator
ARRIEl 1 D1 engine not modified
TU 197 nor TU 202
.abnormal
When the T4 is less than 150 .C. tuming the

compressor by hand. confirm thot the gas
generator rotates freely and that there is no
noise.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
IAI
IclDIEIFIGIHI
350 82
4.1
94-08
PAGE 14
*RR'
FUGH\'"';v1ANUAt:
RR 20 SUPERSEDES RR 2L
Paragraph 11.3 : Check After the Last Flioht of the Dav (ALA
STATION 4
-TRH
The check: Pitch change rod swivel bearing is replaced by :
.Pitch change rod swivel bearing ...Check, (refer to NOTE 8):

.The absence of play (J) by twisting the blades
back and forth, lowamplitude movements (A).
(Refer to Figure 3)
.The condition of the ball joint by
visual inspection.
That no Teflon material has squeezedout.
That the ball shows no signs of burnishing or
scoring.
R
R
R
.
Figure 3
0
0
.;0
~
DGAC Approved:
IAI
ICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 82
.
4.1
00-41
Page 15
'RR'
FLIGHT MANUAL
[~~J
Paragraph
11.3-Check
.
.
after the last Flight of the day (AlF) :
~
Complete the checkswith:
-DUNLOP servocontrols
No.cracks on the body

leading to seepage
()
\.
.
DGAC Approved:
IAlclDIEIFIGIHI
350 82
97-11
pagel
.RR
4.1
0- " .
FLIGHT MANUAL
B
Paragraph 113
Check After the Last Fliaht of the Dav (ALF)
Complete the checks with :
~
-RH
landing gear
,
Shock absorber
Wear resistance plate .""",."",..,
-Bidirectional
cross beam
pre Mod 07-2720
...Check
Condition
Condition. no leaks
Condition
for cracks on laminate bearing

upper face, on MGB pick-up side
See NOTE C
;---\
.
.
-0
DGAC Approved.
IAICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 B2
4.
97-42
Page 15
*RR*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
,. TAIL ROTORBLADES"""'..."'.
,. Tail
rotor
.Laminated
blade spar
half-bearing
.Blade horn
-nlR
.Pitch
change control
.Pitch
change rod swivel
bearing
:'
Security,
general condition of skin,
no dents, no bonding separation on
the stainless
steel leading edge.
Check for abnonnal spar noise when
the rotor is bent inwards and
outwards to form an arc.
SEE NOTEB
No bonding separation,
deep crack or
emergence
No play
Condition,
security
No play.
SEE NOTEB
,. BALANCEARMHINGE: (Flapping
hinge bearing) according to
type:
.Type 1 : cups on either side
of the pin
Visual play and no metallic

particules
.Type 2 : flapping bearings ...No play
.Type 3 : bearing outside cone
rubber
No cracks, extrusion,
bronze
chips
-Tail
boom fairing
Security
STATION 5
-Battery
-RH baggage compartment door
-RH landing gear
.Shock absorber
.Wear resistance plate
-MGB cowling.
-Transmission
deck.
-MGB
.Magnetic
plug
-MGB suspension bar
-Servocontrols,
hydraulic
system
-Eng~ne 0~1 tank, system
-Englne 011 cooler
Security
Security,
condition,
locking
Condition,
no leaks
Condition
Open: condition of locking
Cleanliness
Leaktightness
No metal chips. SEE NOTEA
Security
Security,
no leaks,
Oil 1:ve1, security,
Securlty,
no leaks
systems
lines
tightness
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 B2
4.1
90-37
Page 15
*01*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
-Universal
joint
-Engine mount
assembly
-Engine and engine compartment

.Engine and accessories
.Systems
.Controls
.Transmission
deck drain
Security,
pin fitted
Condition,security
General
condition,
Noleaks
Interference
cleanliness
Not plugged
* MAGNETIC
PLUG
-ARRIEl
engine magnetic plug
No metal chips on forward and aft

reduction gear magnetic plugs:
.Aft
reduction gear magnetic
plug
-Pre-modification
TU 135
Daily check
-Post-modification
TU 135 ...SEE NOTEA
.m
reductiongearoptional
magnetic plug
-Engine
and MGBcowlings.
SEE NOTEA
Closing,
locking
STATION 6
-Seat
-Cabin
Security,pin in place
Generalcleanliness
.
N
DGAC
APproved:
W
350B2
4.1 .
90-37
Page 16
EJ
The check of the ARRIELengine magnetic plugs is modified as follows:
-ARRIEL engine magnetic plugs
without electrical indication.
-Aft
reduction
gear magnetic
No metal chips on forward and

aft reduction gear magnetic
plugs.
plug
-Forward reduction gear magnetic

plug (oPtional)
Check every
daily.
5 flying
hours and
See ~
.
DGACAPproved:
W
350 82
4.1
92-33
Page 16
*82"
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
4.2
ENG~~-;~HECK
1
IN-FLIGHT CHECKPROCEDURE
The engine power check is made in flight.
1.1
Record of oarameters
-Fly
a stabilized,
level course, preferably
at an altitude
where there
is little
or no turbulence;
shut off heating and demisting.
-Set the engine speed to the maximum compatible with the mechanical
limitation
(torque no higher than 94 %) and Ng limit (M.C.P.). The
bleed valve flag should not be visible
in these conditions.
-Record
1.2
the following
parameters:
torque,
Ng, NR, altitude,
O.A.T..
Use of the chart

Read the chart
follows:
in the direction
indicated
by the arrows,
-Torque
-NR -Altitude
-O.A.T.
-Ng
entering
as
and
Follow the ex~le
to locate
Engine power is O.K. if

"CORRECT".
Mill
: -If
"p"
"p".
is located
in the region marked
in doubt as to condition of the engine,

eliminate any error of reading.
-If
2
point
point
necessary,
check the T.,
repeat the check to
Ng and NR indicating
systems.
GROUND
CHECKPROCEDURE
The engine power check cannot be carried out at high power level
ground with a high-power single-engine
helicopter
of this type.
Before forward flight
in a 5 ft hover, increase the collective
enough to ensure a momentary Ng increase of at least 1 %.
After having reached a safe altitude,
check may be performed.
a normal inflight
on the
pitch
power assurance
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 B2
4.2
90-37
Page1,
FlIGHT MANUAL
(.~o) ::!:!::::;:;::::,:!::::!::::!:!:!:::::::!:::!::::;::l::::!::::;::::::,:::::.:::::::::::i::::::::!:::::::::~:::::::;:::::.::::::::::::::':::::::::
.*
40 :::::::.
:;:: ::::::::::;:;::;;
.:; ::: :;;::::::; ;::
::; :;:: ;::;:
::::; :::;::
::::
:: ;;;c
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
INCORRECT
:::::::::::::
::;:::::;;:::::::::::::.:::;:.::::::::::.:::::::::::-;;:::::
30
:.:::::::::::.:::::;::.:.:.:.:.:.;.:..:.:...
::"..;:::.:
.:.: .,., ,:., '" ,.. ,.,.:.:.,..,.::
..:.:. :. ,:.: : "'.': ,c :""'.
:::::;'::..:::::::: ::::::::"::..:::::::..':,,;:::::::
:"'.:.,:
-', .:: c.,., -':

::, -'.,.:.,.:
".,..:. ::
,:."
.,.,
.c"c.cc.c'c'.c.
,,: .,.:,
:: ,:: .:.:: co'
'""'
: .:.,.,. ,,: ,:,.,.
..'c.'.'c.'.".'...'.'.'.
,:20-:.':::::::::"':;::::::::.:::::=-'.::::;::':'c::::::..::::.:::::;:::::::';".::::;
~
'
.:.:::;.'...:. .:::':c;;::.:
.;:::
;:: c;":::;::.;::::.:::;:
0
c "gcc
~ :0
t-
CORRECT
~:: :-;at~~
.100
.-".
~
r\"
~ -.~
~
"
~
~ 50
"
cc
c c
..ccc
00
.""'C
.". ".
'...
.'.'."
'.
.:
-30
(ftx100) "
.c.
:.
"
(,.,,100)
~"
30
'"'
: "
.-~-
-r\
~
r-,
~
'
",
"
20,
"
1\
"\
1\
"-
.~
r\
i'
r\'
1\
10
~"
1\
~tr-/lDn~ -..
400
0
"
"
.390
CO
.z
0
"!
~
a:
01
0
l'
380
U1 lc
cJI ~(
I
COUPLE TORQUE (X)
ENGINE POWERCHECK
DGAC
Approved:
w
35082
4.2 (I!
89-17
Page 2
--
FLIGHT MANUAL
NQ DIFFERENCE
-Record
INDICATOR
CHECK
the prevailing
-Determine
pressure-altitude
the theoretical
IH~EMP.
EXT. -4D
Hp-Zp O.A.T. a
(It)
10'0
and O.A.T.
values.
Ng. using the table below:

15'0
20'0
25'0
30'0
35'0
40'0
45'0
50'0
+5'0
-1000
~'III~~~t
1000
:~~::::::~~:!;~:::::~~~:
101.7 101.6 101.5 101.3 101.2 101.0 100.9 100.7
101.7 101.5 101.4 101.3 101.1 101.0 100.8
3000
101.8 101.7 101.6 101.5 101.4 101.2 101.1 100.9 .~.~.~:.~;..::::~~~:::~~:~:;
5000
101.7 101.6 101.5 101.4 101.3 101.1 101.0 .~.~.~.:~...:j~j:j~:~::;:;~j~j~j::~:~j~j~
THEORETICAL"Ng. MAXT/O PWR"

-Press
the test
The following
1)
2)
push-button.
readings are displayed
successively
'Q~:=10.
then:
'L.L.L'
---(code
probe:
in the window:
indicating
correct operation
see NOTE1). then:
of the O.A.T.
3) Value of the "Ng MAX. T/O PWR"prevailing

on the site.
.The analogical
pointer reads zero during a few seconds.
-Check that the "Ng. MAX. T/O PWR" read on the instrument
theorical
"Ng. MAXT/O PWR"within 0.2 %.
!!QIU :
NOTE 2 : When the

-continuous
is equal to the
aa
LL
.. operatlon (hsort clrcult

def ectlve
.. ) .
a~'
L,
,
defective
operation
Ng displayed
is equal
power).
the pointer
(open circuit).
to 98 % within
0.2
should
read -3.5.
% (Max.
lilt
DGAC
Approved:
m
35082
~.~
90-37
Page 3I
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 5
REGULATOR~~~~~NCE
DATA
CONTENTS
Pages
INTRODUCTION
SUBSTANTIATED
WIND ENVELOPE
3 A.S.I.
4
CALIBRATION
SPEEDVERSUSHEIGHT ENVELOPE
.2
5 HOVERPERFORMANCE
I.G.E.
(Height 5 ft -1.5
m)
6 HOVERPERFORMANCE
O.G.E.
RATESOF CLIMB
NOISE LEVELS
12
,!
I'
[I
DGACApproved:
W
350 82
!).().f>
90-37
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION5
REGULATOR~~RMANCE
DATA
1
INTRODUCTION
The following
performance curves apply to the basic version of the
aircraft.
Refer to the supplements when optional
equlpment is fitted.
2
2.1
SUBSTANTIATED
WIND ENVELOPE
Wind envelope for
spinninQ and stoDPinQ the rotors
Spinning or stopping of rotors has been substantiated

40 kts from any direction
and for 50-kt headwinds.
2.2
for winds of
Wind envelope in hover

Hovering with wind from any direction
has been substantiated
over the
entire flight
envelope up to winds of 17 kts. although this is not to
be taken as a limit.
For example hover at sea level at maximumweight.
for all c.g. locations.
has been substantiated
at 30 knots.
3 ASI CALIBRATION
0
150 I
50
I
100
I
150
I
200
I
250 (km/h)
I ...E
(k1)
?'
ili
f"
111
P250
i100
~
200
//
/
;;
150
.J
-<.J
-'I
100
60
/V"
I.,;-:
1//
50
0:
~
>
.DGAC
Approved:
W
00
60
100
(kt) 160 0
CAS I VITESSE CORRIGEE
350 B2
5. 1
90-37
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
AIRSPEED-HEIGHTENVELOPE
The avoidance zone (2) is defined
by four points:
A, B, C, D.
DeterrnininQ Points A and 8

-Point
A
Point A is located
-Point
8
Point 8 is located
(74 km/hr).
at a height
of 8 ft
at a height
of 25 ft
(2.5 m) at zero airspeed.

(9 m) for an airspeed
of 40 knots
DeterrnininQ Points C and D

-Point
C
Point C is defined by :
.a constant height of 100 ft (30 m)
.a variable airspeed depending on the altitude
weight as determined by line (C).
-Point
D
Point D is defined by :
.a constant zero airspeed
.a variable height depending on the altitude
weight as determined by line (D).
.
and on the aircraft
and on the aircraft
.
DGAC
APproved:
w
350
82
5.1
.
89-17
Page2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.~OO
~ 7000
-:
~6000"
1\1I I'
B~I
l"e\j'g
~
;t; 5000
0
...~";4000 -Mf~
II 1/
II.IJ
iI'
I
1/
II
/
'
---0-4-
---
..:3000
t;
cf
I
2000
1000
If
J
If
-31 -~ -10 0 10 ~ 31 .0
TEIt'. EXT.10.A.T. I'CI
MASSEllE.latT ' ..~

11bx1OO) 4.6
45
~
40
35
50
a
1ft)
D
':!'.
.:~.:..
400
:~:~;:;::
::: ~~..
~ ...:.:f:...;.:!i.':i:i;~~~t.
200
I~
.0
C
10
20
30
40
5OIkt)60
"
=0
"0
,;
~
DGAC
Approved:
[I]
"-
350B2
!5.Jl
B9-17
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 /-K)VER
PERFORMANCE
I.G.E.
20000
18000
+++j
j-j:-f-+++j-j-f++6000
111]
::::
l: 1111
-1-l11
:::: ::::
-fttj
+j:-ft+t;..!-~t
-fti-i
I -It+i':""'"
~16000:'::
+++:
-ii-It
~
5000
j-ji-f+++jj.f+:
14000Wi-i1tt j-!i-r
! mf~
.4000:
CI1
+++;....;++i-j-.+
; -;++;- ++
~ ::::
~~
! 1tt~
Z
0
t-
3000~
:::: :::: ::,i

8000~[. .tttt 1-j-[-r
: iiii Ii:'
r ~~t1:
:;~++
-i.-i.L'
6000t++!
i -l-i.Li
i-l-i.L 2000
f t++~
-~Ht
ii:i
':i: :i'i Ii::
4000+++1-f-f++
t!-f-f++]:1:
:;+++
:j:;:r:;
i::i :::, :::: ::': :::: -i-;-;-;
::::
-;;-i-;--;-;-;+i-i-;-;i-;-j-;--;-;+i~ 2000~~;--;-~~~
;-;-i~
~~j-;.
-~l~~
-;-;-l-~
""
1-10~0 iili~
,."
""
~ ~~~~
1500
3010~..35~~
.,
, :::: i:i:
f +++]:
~+++ 1000
:; +.;.;.,.
:::: ..-;-;+
::::
~~~l;..;~l~
""
,,',
""
+1:1:t::[~+t:i:t:tI
i ~~
2000
220
-~05
(kg) 2500
~010~' , ~510~' .~~IO~ ; l~)' I
MASSE WEIGHT
CONDITIONS
/-K)VERPERFORMANCE
-Height 5 ft -1.5
-No P2 air bleed
DGAC
Approved:
I.G.E.
35082
~. JL
89-17
/'
Page4
FLIGHTMANUAL
.20000
+++
++j-j-f+++
j-\-f+
tj i-\-+++j-i-i-fi 6000
'"
,.,
'"
'"
~1BOOO:::
~
'I~
",'
,,"
",'
",'
,."
""
,.,
",.
;:::::::::::
i-i ;-;- -f+i-i::::
::::
:,::
::::
+++
:::
:::
""
",'
""
""
~
e
~
-H++
I:::
I:::
UJ16000:::
++i-
;.;
;.;.-,+;.;..;-;+-, 5000 0Z
::::::::::::
1it: :;:t11
+i:-i-ftti..I-fi-f
-J
([
14000
:::: ;;
;;
::::
;;;;
Q..
UJ
-'-"-,- -,-,-"-
iiij--i-iii
::::
::::
UJ
0012000::::::::
:.::
a:
Q..
4000
::::
10000
+ttj-
""
""
""
".,
,,',
""
""
.,.,
~~
.".
.",
""
".' ~
BOOO ++~j. i-f++
.J
<I
""
".,
"..
~~
",.
.",
""
",.
",.
".,
".,
,..,
,..,
~~
""
",.
",.
.',.
i-1-f-f
""
""
,,"
,."
""
,."
"" "-"- -,-,-,,',
~i-i-i- -f-f++
3000
,..,
,..,
""
-"---,-""
-i-f-f-f
J.J.i
6000
2000
+:1
."
4000 I::
;::
".
'"
e:-
.".
tti-i-
-H-tt .j-j-rt
,
",.
++'
""
;I:::; ;; ::::
;;:;
tti
2000
I-
-j~~t 1-j-H ttt1- -H++ -H.H
,.,.
,."
,."
+;';.1-w-;.;.
::::
i:::
",.
",.
""
~~~..".
0
0
,.
.",
';';'H--W;';'
:::
:::
: : ::
::::
'"
' I::
;;:;
.",
1000
"
""
.",
H-;-'
::::
::::
""
,."
".,
.,.,
;-1'-i--;;.;-1--w-;-;
::::
:::
::::
::::
::::
::::
::::
::::
111;-!-~++
~j-i-~
~~;.j.
-~.~++
-j-j-i-~
ill::::[III:::::[IIJ::[:[li]::::[:U
-10~0
+t~-
-j.~+t +1-H +++1- -f-f++ -j.H+ +++1. .Ht+ -1-H-:- +11-1+U+ -1~++
1500
~O~~ ..~510~
..~O~~
.,
2000
MASSE WEIGHT
22
~510~ .,
0 (kg)
~b~~ ~ 1~)'
-:05
2500
CONDITIONS
HOVERPERFORMANCE
-Height
-Heating
.DGAC
5 ft -1.5
m
do demisting
systems
Approved:
m
I.G.E.
on
350 82
!J.jl
89-17
Page5
6 HOVER
PERFORMANCE
O.G.E.
20000
; j
FLIGHT MANUAL
6000
3000
2000
1000
0
-305
-1
l([
Page6
.
~.jl.
~~
4000
g .
00
~
0
5000
18000
w 16000
:)Q
I-
~ 14000
~
I/)
8000
4000
MASSE
WEIGHT
O.G.E,
350
B2
89-17
f>VERPERFORMANCE
2202 _'-,;~~
..45100'
"sb1oo ~k~)
' (l'b;~5?0
"0
bleed
2000
6000
"
~
1
ll:
Q.
0
"'0
'"
2: -1000
~0
10000
I/)
w 12000
'~
.00
.UJ
'I-
+'
---
_1~02
3000
' , 35100 ..40.00
wind
P2 air
CONDITIONS
-No
-No
DGAC
Approved:
m
FLIGHT MANUAL
.20000
6000
i
~
18000
..
'~
+'
't-
-I
16000
'
+.-
I-
..;;:;
cn
"
...0
~ 14000
w
~
.;9:
a.
.T
UJ
:.
J.
:>
I i
~ 12000
UJ
4000
:::.
,~t-
10000,
.:..
I:.
8000
c
~
~..
UJ
[:
-..5000z
'0
:>
3000
..~~
...
2000
6000
..-
4000
1000
0
2000
.;01
'"
.5
0
~
-1000.
305
~010~
1500
'
,
~510~
MASSE
'
~010~
'
2000
, ~5~~
22
'
WEIGHT
.DGAC
Approved:
2500
~ l'b !
~~=J
f>VER
wind
-Heating
OCkgJ
~~IO~
'
CONDITIONS
-No
PERFORMANCE
OGE
and demisting systems on

350
B2
~.Jl
89-17
Page
7l
'",
FLIGHT MANUAL
7 RATE
OF
CLIMB
.
31 33
35
I /
36
'38
V I
1<1
42
0'
/
V
40
'0
48
..If
0\1
,it;
IltIl
"'If.
v:
52
..,\.64
-,*,M
1/
q I
il
:/
..06
...'
1~100)
,...
JIr: I,
'"
II
"!J /
/
.:
.,, :
il
I
'I
1 f
:',
.1.
; :
1/
II
1/ ;i'~
..
..
I
I
Taf'.EXT.
If
0
0"
~ 1
~
. II
0
-40 -30 -20 -10
.,
.,
i
..
;
10 20 30 00 50 60 1500
I O.A.T.
NOTE:
WeTght limitation
2250 kg (4961 lb)
C'C)
with
i;
2000
HASSE~!E
internal
DGAC
Approved:
m
load:
3000
I C(IICTED II:!GiT
CORRECTEDWEIGHT FOR
DETERMINING RATE-OF-CLIMB
(on facing
page)
350
B2
5.1 .
89-17 Page
8
'
"
Ii
FLIGHT MANUAL
.RATE
OF CLIMB(Cont'd)
...,..
--T--'
,-
--, -,--,-
," .
,.
. , ,.--,-
,
,
,.
tt-- -i- -ii---t --!-'

-t : t-t
i -ti-or
.., j--1-
-i-i- ,-i.1--
.I
i-1-.
-t-t-t.t-
-40-30-20-10
0 10 20 30 40 50
TEMP.EXT. to.A.T.
(OC)
CONDITIONS
~~
55kt -102 km/hr
-MCP
-No
.DGAC
1CXX>
1~
VI~Is:.IRATEa:a.IIB
2(XX)
2500
[ft/m)
~~~
RATE OF CLIMB
P2 air bleed
Approved:
~
35082
!).jl
89-17
-~--
Page9I
, , ' ~,: r
:'
,
FLIGHT MANUAL
313335.
1,1'
II'
f'"
=
s8
..0
ltl
;0'
I'
042
-44
-45
/
0'
/-co
.1t;
-62
./'~
.c4
W~
"',,
/'
-65
/,,'.'1"'100)
Ij
(I
'"
-48
".l~
II
""
I,
.,
I~ I
t:r
I
I
I
I
./
.i
I.
! /
..
i i
-.,
; !
,//.
0
0
..I!
II
II
..-2
~
~
II
-40 -30 -20-'::10 0
f:
, .
'
I!
10 20 30 40 50 60 1500
T94P.EXT.
I O.A.T.,00)
NOTE:
welght
limitation
2250 kg (4961 lb)
DGAC
Approved:
[]
! /
.'
I!
with
internal
;
2000
..-CORRI=
load:
3000
I ~TED
~IQjT
CORRECTEDWEIGHT FOR
DETERMINING RATE-OF-CLIMB
(on facing
page)
350B2
!JojL
B9-17
Page 10
...
, ii'
FLIGHT MANUAL
.RATE
OF CLIMB (Cont'd)
-I--r
.{.
.iii
.I
-40
-30
-20
-10
TEMP.EXT. IO.A.T.
10
1C)
500
1CXX>
1500
2(XX)
VI~IS:./R41E(Fa.I16
2500
I ft/m I
CONomONS
-C.A.S.
-MCP
= SS kt -102
-Heating
and demisting
.DGAC
Approved:
W
km/hr
systems
ON.
~~~~
RATE OF CLIM8
3S0 82
5. 1
89-17
Page 11I
FLIGHTMANUAL
NOISE LEVELS
The noise levels determined under the conditions prescribed in Chapter 8

and Appendix 4 of Annex16 of OACI, volume1, are as follows:
Reference measurement
configurations
Noise levels
EPNdB
OACI max. noise level!

EPNdB
Take off
89.8
93.5
Approach
91.4
94.5
Overflight
87.6
92.5
..
.
N
DGAC
Approved:
w
350
B2
5.1
.
90-37
--
Page12
..eurocopter
FLIGHT
MAN"AL
FLIG
HT
AS
MAN
UAL
350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
INCOMPATIBILITY OF UTILIZATION
EFFECT ON PERFORMANCE
DATA
DAILY CHECKSOF OPTIONAL INSTALLATIONS
.IMPORTANT
.The
NOTE
information
contained herein supplements
or supersedes
the informetion
given
In the basic flight manual and/or applicable
flight manual supplements.
The effectivity
of the supplement
at the latest revision is specified
on the List of
Effective Pages.
This
supplement
supports
and EUROCOPTER
Revisions
to this
seme procedures
-::;~::::'Ml
helicopters
delivered
by both
Direction
DGACApproved:
by EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Technique
Support
FRANCE
Etabllssement
-13725
Marlgnane
350 B2
I FIG
AEROSPATIALE
FRANCE.
supplement
are made
as AEROSPATIALE.
EUROCOPTER
~?~--=jI:[
I A I B I ~ I DIE
the
I HI
using
de
the
Merlgnane
Cedex
-France
SUP.O.P1I
93-09
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
CUST~IZATION
:
...AIC
: AS 350 82 -SIN:
lIST
SECTION
PAGE
OF ADDITIONAL APPROVEDPAGES
---
DATECODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
THIS AIRCRAFTDOESNOTOFFERANYPARTICULAR
FEATURES
REQUIRING THE CUSTOMIZATIONOF THE FLIGHT MANUALON
GREENPAGES.
...
...
...
DGACApproved:
I A I 8 I C .to I ElF
350 82
IG I H I
SUP.O.P1
90-15
Page 3
--
..
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
.Some
supplements
covering
installations
helicopter
may be withdrawn from this
supplements
appears on this page.
No.
or procedures
not used on this
manual. The complete list
of
DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONAL AND OPTIONAL SUPPLEMENTS
RESERVED
.2
RESERVED
RESERVED
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION IN COLD WEATHER
EXTERNAL LOAD TR,'\NSPORT"CARGOSWING"
12
EXTERNAL LOAD TR,'\/ISPORT"CARGO SLING"
..13
SLIDING DOORS
14
SAND FILTER
15
RESERVED
16
SFIM 85 T 31 3-AXI5 AUTO~IATIC PILOT SYSTEM
17
EMERGENCYFLOAT,'\TIONGEAR
.R
DCAC
Approved:
350 82
SUP
92-40
.O.P2
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL.
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS (cond'
t)
18
AIR EQUIPMENTOR BREEZE 136 kg (300 1 b) ELECTRIC HOIST
4t
19
RESERVED
20
RESERVED
21
FORWARDTWO-PLACESEAT
22
RESERVED
23
FUEL HEATING SYSTEM
24
RESERVED
25
PROTECTIONOF THE AIR INTAKE AGAINST INDUCTION OF SNOW
28
LONG AND SHORTFOOTSTEPS
.R
4t
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTS
50
FERRY FLIGHT FUEL TANK
56
ABSEILINGINSTALLATION
-4t
DGACApproved
350 82
4t
5UP.O.P2
page2
-
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)
...The
Supplements contain
when the conditions
are
the following
complied with.
pink
pages except those
cancelled
CAUTION
IF A NORMALREVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGE NUMBERFOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNEDBELOW, THE READER WILL HAVE TO CHANGETHE NUMBEROF THE PINK
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
...
Sup.
Page
Date
Applicable
before
condition
is met :
II
...
NOTE:
The date code includes
the
last
two digits
of the year followed
by the week number in that year.
DGACApproved:
I A I B I C I D j ElF
350 B2
I G IHI
SUP.O.P3
90-15
Page 1
---
FLIGHT MANUAL
-COMPOSITION
U
OF RUSHREVISIONS
(RR)
SUPPLEMENT
NoRR
SUP.O
SUP.11
DGACApproved:
[]
2A
PAGE
DATE
CODE
P4.1
99-37
98-43
SUPPLEMENT
35082
NoRR
PAGE
DATE
CODE
5UP.O.P4
99-37
Page 1
*RR*
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF RUSH REVISIONS (RR)
TheSupplements
contains
thefollowingadditionalyellowpage(s)
:
No.
SUP.
-PAGE
CODE
DATE
No.
SUP.
-PAGE
CODE
DATE
~
DGACAPproved:
I A I 8 I C I DIE
350 82
I FIG
I H r
SUP.O.P4
90-15
Page 1
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVEPAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Page Revision
Code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
-N : New, to be inserted
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PI
PI
P2
P2
P3
P4
PS
DATE
1
3
1
2
1
1
1/01
1
2
3
4
5
6
93-09
90"715
92-40
99-45
90-15
90-15
99-45
99-37
92-40
99-37
90-37
90-37
90-37
(1)
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
DATE
(1)
.
LIST OF THE LATEST NORMAL
APPROVED REVISIONS
No
Date
No
89-17
99-37
90-15
99-45
90-37
92-40
93-09
DGAC Approved:
w
NORMAL REVISION:
Date
350 82
SUP
99-45
.O.PS
Page 1
,,"
FLIGHT MANUAL
2
.The
INCOMPATIBILITY OF UTILIZATION BEtWEENOPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ITEMS

following
list
approved equipment
HQIl
Incompatibility
Master Servicing
Operation
of
installations:
and covers
incompatible
only
with
of installation
between items
Recommendations (PRE).
those DGACone or more items.

is
stated
in the
the following
:
ITEM
Makes operation
with the
following
equipment items
impossible.
SUPPL.
No.
15
Emergency floatation
17
32* -66
17
Float
type undercarriage
15
32 -70
21
Ferry
flight
50
22 -23
-32
-41
-68
-72
22
External
load carrying
installation
"CARGO5LING"
12
21 -25
-32
-44
-46
-66
23
External
load carrying
installation
"CARGOSWING"
11
21 -25
-32
-44
-46
-66
25
Air
-22
-23
-32
-41
-72
32
Electric
15*- 17 -21
41 -44
-46
-22
-66
-23
51
21 -25
-32
-44
-46
21
22 -23
-32
-41-
72
-22
-23
-32
-41-
72
56
15 -22
-23
-32
-44
-46
ambulance
Crop spraying
44
Forward
46
Blind
flying
installation
18
installation
seat
screens
installation
TAP kit
70
T 31 Automatic
72
Water bomber
remain possible
DGACApproved:
tank
two-place
68
* Hoisting
gear
hoist
abseiling
[]J
fuel
41
.66
is non-exhaustive
items which are
-25
-21
pilot
system
when the
floats
16
17
53
21 -25
are folded.
350 B2
SUP.O
99-37
Page 1
'FLIGHT MANUAL
INFLUENCE OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTITEMS ON PERFORMANCE

DATA
Where several optional equipment items are used simultaneously, the

basic performance data must be reduced by the value corresponding to
the influence of each optional item.
3.1
...
REGULATORYPERFORMANCE
DATA
-Take-off
weights
Whenthe installation
of an optional equipment item modifies the takeoff weights specified in the basic Flight Manual, the take-off weights
are indicated on new charts.
-Rates
of climb
When the rates of climb are modified, the relevant Supplement either
provides a new chart or prescribes a reduction with respect to the '"
basic performance.
3.2
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE
DATA
-The
reduced performance data are given in Section 10.
DGAC
APproved:
I A I 8 I c I~ I E IF I G I H I
.
.
350 82
SUP.O
92-40
Page 2
---
FLIGHT MANUAL
4
.For
DAILY OPERATING CHECKSFOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

each optional
equipment
check must include:
-a
-a
item
installed
on the
helicopter,
the
daily
check before
the first
flight
of the day,
check after
the last flight
of the day.
These daily
checks may be carried
out by qualified
maintenance
personnel
or by a qualified
pilot.
Any alteration
or detailed
inspection
to determine
serviceability
as a
result
of these checks must be done under the supervision
of a properly
endorsed Aircraft
Maintenance
Engineer and duly entered
in the Aircraft
Log Book.
These checks consist
in performing
a visual
examination
equipment item in order to check its aeneral condition
aircraft,
in particular
for:
-windshield
wipers,
-fire
extinguisher,
-ski
installation,
-air
ambulance installation
-flares,
-cargo
swing,
-ferry
tank,
-blade
protection
against
-sand
filter.
The optional
below.
equipment
of each optional
and security
on the
(stretcher),
sand,
items
which
require
specific
checks are listed
AIR EQUIPEMENTOR BREEZE ELECTRIC HOIST INSTALLATION

The hoist
-Check
that
the hoisting
by the
hoist
blocks
and snap hooks function
-Perform
a hoist functional
check:
0.6 m (2 ft) and then rewind it :
contact
functions
correctly.
-Check
limit.
must be checked
to be performed
DGACApproved:
during
ODerator.
correctly.
unwind the cable over approximately

check that the "Up' end of trayel
the ALF check nearest
the
30-hour
350 B2
SUP.O
99-37
---
operating
Page 3
.
.
-FLIGHT MANUAL
USE IN COLD WEATHER:
Manual.
Check before
CAUTION:
the fi rst
fl ight
(BFF) , refer
to
Section
SUPPLEMENTSof th
DO NOT DRAIN WATER FROMFUEL SYSTEM AT TEMPERATURESEQUAL

TO OR LESS THAN MINUS 10.C.
DGACApproved:
IAIBICIDIEIFIGIHI
'
.
.
350 B2
SUP.O
90-37
Page 6
.FLIGHTMANUAL
AIR EQUIPEMENTHOIST fitted
with
an end-of-travel
microswitch
monitoring
system:
Completethe check with the following :

-Switch
on the electric
-Unwind
the cable by approximately
-Wind
hoist.
one to two meters.
the cable:
As the cable winds up, check that:

-the GREENlight is LIT,
-the REDlight is EXTINGUISHED.
-On completion of the hoisting
the hoist operator's grip.
.During
-the
-the
the "Up" order,
operation,
maintain the "UP" order using
check that:
GREEN light
is EXTINGUISHED,
RED light
is EXTINGUISHED.
-Maintain
the "Up" order on the hoist operator's
pushbutton:
grip and press the test
.During the "Up" order, check that:

-the GREENlight is EXTINGUISHED,
-the REDlight ILLUMINATES.
-Check to be Derformed everv 2S hoistina
.Free rotation of the hook.
.Condition
of the cable.
.Operation of the cable extraction
-Operations
oDerations :
mechanism.
to be Derformed everv 50 hoistina
oDerations :
.Grease the hoist brake assembly.

.Clean then grease the cable winding screw.
DGAC
Approved:
IAIBICIDIEIFIGIHI
350 82
SUP.O
90-37
Page4
~--
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
EMERGENCYFLOATATION GEAR INSTALLATION
.Check
before the first
fliaht
-Place
the emergency
safety pin in place.
-Check
that
engaged.
the
floatation
circuit
~ear
breakers
in
in the
low position,
aft
pins
locked,
baggage compartment
are
Checkafter the last fliaht

If
the
cylinders
aircraft
and
has flown
at low altitude
the cradle
assemblies.
over
the
sea,
wash
the
inflation
FLOATATION GEAR INSTALLATION
.Check
before the first

-Visually
and free
-Check
fliaht
check the protective

from tears.
that
the pressure
covering
and that
in each compartment
the floats
is 0.300
are clean
to 0.450
bar.
Checkafter the last fliaht

-After
alighting
-After
landing
in
salty
water,
on a muddy field,
wash with
soft
water.
wash with
soft
water.
Parkina
Park
in the
shade,
if
possible,
and protect
the floats
against
the
heat.
CROP SPRAYING INSTALLATION

This
.the
optional
equipment requires
daily operating
checks.
the presence
of
qualified
staff
to
perform
ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

-Check
that
the pressure
of the cylinders
is correct.
CARGOSWING
-After
the last flight,
at the lock input.
lightly
grease
(G3S4) the
end of the load
hook
.N
DCACApproved:
350 82
IAIBICIDIEIFIGIHI
SUP.O
90-37
--
PageS
--FLIGHT
.18
MANUAL
eurocopter
FLIGHT
AS
MANUAL
35082
'
.SUPPLEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
FOROPERATIONIN COLDWEATHER
IMPORTANT NOTE
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given
in the basic flight manual and/or applicable flight manual supplements,
The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is specified an the List at
Effective Pages,
*
ThIs supplement
supports the helicopters
delivered
by bath AEROSPATIALE
and EUROCOPTER
FRANCE.
Revisions to this supplement sre made by EUROCOPTER
FRANCE usIng the
same procedures
as AEROSPATIALE.
-~==
Jil
~-='-IQ:
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I 0 I ElF
IGI
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Direction
Support
Technique
Etablissemenl
-13725
Marignane
35082
da Marignane
Cedex
-France
SUP.4.P1
94-05
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.LIST
OF APPROVED EFFEmVE
PAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Evolution
page code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
SUP.
4
4
4
4
4
4
P1
P5
DATE
1
1/01
1
2
3
4.
94-05
94-05
94-05
94-0S
94-05
94-05
.DGAC
Date
89-17
91-{)8
94-{)5
No
Approved:
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
NORMAL REVISION:
DGAC APPROVED
Date
SUP.4.P5
94-05
--
(1)
DATE: 2
35082
DATE
R
R
R
R
R
N

APPROVED REVISIONS
No
(1)
Page 1
FLIGHTMANUAL
.1~
This supplement details all the procedures to be followed when the aircraft
is used in particular
climatic conditions,
such as cold weather and snow.
Aircraft
servicing does not require any special tools or systematic
replacement.
2
GENERALRECOMMENDATIDNS
For rational operation of the aicraft in cold weather and snow, it
reconmended to carry out the following basic operations:
is
R
R
R
-Remove ice or snow deposits from the whole of the aircraft,

particularly
at hinges and movement transmitting
items (main rotor, rotor mast, tail
drive and tail
rotor, flight
controls, engine controls).
-When the aircraft
has been subjected to very low temperatures,
it
is
R
R
R
:
recommended that:.
.either
regular ground runs be carried out every two hours for
temperatures of about -2D'C and every hour for lower temperatures.
.or preheating of the engine, transmission assemblies and cabin be
effected before take-off (althourgh the helicopter
is capable of
carrying out engine start up and rotor spinning at temperatures
down to -4D'C).
During the preheating operation.
carefully wipe out the deicing water to
avoid all water accretion on the aircraft
and water re-icing as soon as
preheating is over, particularly
on the AIR INTAKES and c~onents
located above the air intakes.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
PRACTICAL ADVICES
R
R
-For the preheating and deicing operations, use appropriate heaters in

good condition only. Do not refuel the aircraft
while the heaters are
functioning.
-During
the preheating operation, do not leave the aircraft
unwatched.
Keep an extinguisher
available at hand.
-Avoid directing
hot air towards the following part of the aircraft;
tanks and fuel, oil and hydraulic fluid lines.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
LUBRICANTS
TO BE USEDFORTRANSMISSION
ASSEMBLIES
Below -25 'C, do not use AIR 3525 (0 155) oil for transmission assemblies
R
without initial
preheating.
The other oils authorized in Section LIMITATIONS of the basic Flight Manual
may be used down to -40 'C without preheating.
NOTE: It should be remembered that when changing the oil, the system is
-first
to be flushed in accordance with the recommendations in the
maintenance publications;
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I DIE
I FIG I
350 B2
SUP.4
94-05
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 USE
OF
BATTERIES
FOR
STARTING
During long periods in inoperation it is recorrmended that the battery be

stored in a warm area.
If a ground power unit is not available,
start-up may be carried out using
the aircraft
battery or two aircraft
batteries connected in parallel.
The starting
envelope is related to the temperature and is indicated in the
following
chart.
DOMAINE DE DEMARRAGE
AVECBATTERIE DE 16 AH
STARTING ENVELOPE WITH 16 AH BATTERY
TEK'. EXTrCJ
O.A. T.
f.C)
:\
-~.
-25.
-15.
!MARRAGE
AVEC
BATTER1E
1 BATT",
FROlDE
DlARGEE
E'1CI~
m.D.
START ON
CHARGED
BATTERY
~
!
1CI~
START ON
WARN (20'C).~RGE'D
>
8AT7ERY
2 BATT
!MARRAGE
AVECBATTERIE1 BATT
CHAl (NC) CHARGEE
~
oq
""
2 BATT
"
.'
PREPARATION
FOR FLIGHT
Independently of the inspections
perform the following
operations
R
prescribed in the basic Flight
and inspections:
Manual,
R
R
R
Main rotor
blades
Remove the blade socks, then remove snow if need be and, if necessary
remove ice from blades using hot air flow at a temperature not exceeding
80.C.
R
R
R
R
R
R
Main rotor
hub and mast
Remove ice from the swashplates,

rotor head spring antivibrator.
the scissors.
the servo controls
and the
Power plant
R
R
R
R
R
R
-Remove the air intake cover and the exhaust nozzle blank after removing
snow from the aircraft
surface.
-Remove snow and ice accretion in the vicinity
of the air intake, on
either side of the screen and inside the engine air intake duct (remove
the air intake screen if necessary).
DGAC
Approved:
IA Ic
I DIE
I F IGI
350B2
R
R
R
R
R
SUP.4.
94-05
Page 2
FLIGHT
.-It
is
irroerative
that
Manually
and
up
to
In
the
of
.remove
stage
be
of
snow
the
clean
and
ice
c~ressor
inside
the
air
intake
duct
ice
using
wipe
.inspect
wooden
the
or
plastic
surface
drains,
Tail
intake
for
icing:
.carefully
static
air
check
first
case
the
visually
MANUAL
scraper,
using
unblanked
cloth
scuppers;
soaked
check
with
for
isopropyl
snow
alcool
and
ice
on
vent
and
ports.
rotor
-Remove
the
pitch
blade
rods..
sockets,
-Manually
remove
ice
from
the
TRH
assentJly
(blades,
rotate
least,
th~n
.).
the
tail
rotor
so
that
the
main
rotor
performs
turn
at
then check:
.the
swashplate
.the
TRH
.the
freewheel
R
rotation
(rotor
brake
not
blocked).
rotatioR,
operation.
Structure
-Remove
the
-Make
cabin
sure
cover
that
once
the
the
windshield
inspection
is
wiper
has
completed.
not
remained
stuck
on
the
canopy
Fliaht
controls
-Enaine
controls
-Before
operating
the
the
controls,
it
is
recOlmlended
to
heat-up
the
inside
of
cabin.
-Operate
the
controls
controls,
progressively,
fuel
complete
flow
then
control
and
operate
collective
the
pitch
rotor
brake
control
over
their
travel.
R
It
is
recommended
rotor
Do
-10
oerform
extensive
travel
of
the
cvclic
and
tail
svstem
bleedina
not
'C
bleed
the
where
valve
the
fuel
system
seals
procedures
given
Approved:
I A I C I DIE
under
prove
ten1)erature
equal
to
or
lower
than
inefficient.
STARTING
All
.DGAC
to
controls.
Fuel
not
I FIG
in
this
basic
manual
remain
applicable.
350 B2
I
SUP.4
94-05
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
7 AFTER
STARTING
.:
When nominal speed is reached with the fuel flow control in the gate, check R
that all warning, caution and advisory lights are off, that pressure
R
readings are O.K. Test the hydraulic accumulators with the collective
lever R
secured at full low pitch. When control loads are felt,
move the stick
R
grip 3-4 cm to evaluate the load, then center the stick (no load) and
R
restore pressure.
R
R
If operating loads are considered higher than at normal temperatures, move R

the cyclic stick 3-4 cm forward (nose-down) for 2 minutes to warm up the
R
spherical thrust bearings.
R
R
Move the yaw pedals about SO%of their travel range on either side of the
R
mid-position.
R
R
IN CASEOF ENGINEFAILURE
R
Following an engine .failure
at light weight, the stabilized
rotor speed may R
be below the audio warning threshold:
the pilot can switch of the horn
R
using the relevant pushbutton.
R
R
R
9 CHECKAFTER LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
R
The operations described in the Basic Normal are to be completed by the
R
following actions:
R
-Observe the general recommendations mentioned above.
R
-When the rotor stops rotating,
place the cyclic pitch stick close to the R
neutral position and the collective
pitch lever secured at full low
R
pitch, with tail rotor blades in the horizontal position.
R
-Inspection
of the engine magnetic plugs should be performed within 30 mn R
after the rotor has stopped rotating,
in order to avoid seal damaging.
R
-Care must be taken not to leave doors open.
R
-Install
the air intake cover and exhaust nozzle blank.
R
-When the aircraft
is parked in an unsheltered area it is recommendedto
R
apply anti-icing
materials and to carry our the aircraft
parking and
R
mooring.
R
NOTE: ANTI-ICING MATERIALS

--Anti-icing
fluid -isopropyl
alcool as per AIR 3660 or deicing as
per AIR 3565 (MIL-A-6091).
-Anti-icing
sealing compound8.437.
-Anti-icing
compound E.57.
.
-Anti-rain
material S.P.R. G7.
"",.
-Anti-icing
material to be applied on blades: Kilfrost
ABC or
Kilfrost
DF.
CAUTION: -REFER TO GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
FORTHE USEOF ANTI-ICING
-MATERIALS.
-ANTI-ICING MATERIALSCAN DAMAGE
THEHELICOPTERCOMPONENTS.
-USE RECOMMENDED
ANDAPPOVED
ANTI-ICING MATERIALSONLY.
10
EOUIPMENT
ITEMS
All the aircraft
equipment items allow flying in cold weather conditions
except spherical thrust bearing PIN 704A 33.633.109 which must not be used
at temperatures below -25 'C.
N
DGACApproved:
IA I C I DIE I F I C I
350 B2
SUP.48
94-05
Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
.18
eurocopter
FLIGHT
AS
MANUAL
350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
EXTERNAL LOAD TRANSPORT "CARGO SWING"
Per drawings:
.
-I
350A 82.8014
350A 82.8015
IMPORTANT
NOTE
in the basic flight manual and/or applicable flight manual supplements.
The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is specified on the list of
Effective Pages.
This supplement
supports the helicopters
delivered by both AEROSPATIALE
and EUROCOPTER
FRANCE.
Revisions to this supplement
are made by EUROCOPTER
FRANCE using the
same procedures
as AEROSPATIALE.
THIS SUPPLEMENT
MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE
EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.
-~
=:::...JId
~=---=q
.DGAC
Approved:
IAICIDIEIFlclHI
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Etablissement
Direction Technique Support -13725
de Marignane
Marignane Cedex -France
35082
SUP.
94-01
11.P1
Pagel,
.
.
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVEPAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Evolution
page code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
SUP.ll
SUP. 11
SUP.l1
SUP.l1
SUP.l1
SUP.l1
SUP.l1
P1
P5
DATE
1
1/01
1
2
3
4
5
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
NORMAL REVISION:
APPROVED REVISIONS
.DGAC
Date
89-17
94-01
Approved:
w
No
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
DATE
(1)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
No
(1)
DGAC APPROVED
Date
DATE: 0
35082
SUP
94-01
.11.P5
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
The "CARGO
SWING" external load carrying installation
is composed of :
-A suspended pyramid frame (3) designed to reduce swinging of the load,
equipped with a release unit (4). The release unit hook can be opened
electrically
in normal operation and mechanically in emergency
conditions.
-A control and indicating system, for the pilot,
comprising:
.load indicator (1), on the instrument panel, with a zero setting
control (2) ;
an electrical
system supplying power to the normal release circuit
via
a pushbutton, on the control console and a switch on the pilot's
cyclic
stick grip;
.an "EMERGENCY
RELEASE"(jettison)
control handle mounted on the
underside of the collective
lever.
The load indicator electrical
circuit
is protected by a fuse and the
normal release hook control circuit
by two fuses.
2;
2 LIMITATIONS
EXTERNAL LOAD OPERATIONS MUST BE IN ACCORDANCEWITH OPERATING
REGULATIONS
GOVERNING
THESEOPERATIONS.
.
The limitations
but are c~leted
laid
down in the
by the following
basic Flight
limitations.
Manual
remair)
applicable
R
R
-Maximum load
The maximumpermissible slung load is 1160 kg (2S57 lb).
-Maximum Qross weiQht with external load
Maximumpermissible gross weight with an external load is that at which
hover O.G.E. can be held. (See Section of the basic Flight Manual).
Maximumweight including
CAUTION:
-LIMITED
external
load:
2500 kg (5512 lb).
THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT WITHOUT EXTERNAL LOAD IS

AS SPECIFIED IN THE LIMITATIONS SECTION OF THE BASIC
FLIGHT MANUAL.
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I D IE I FIG I H I
350 B2
SUP
94-01
.11
Page 1
--FLIGHT
MANUAL
-LonQitudinal
C.Q.
limits
Use chart
weights.
below to define
longitudinal
c.g.
"":CENTRAGE
(m)""
WITH RELEASABLE LOAD
1750 .;..;.
'.".'
.:...
.'.'.
.'.
.'.'.
1400 .'.'.
'.
:.::..
1200.' ..'
"j:!!!!~~~ .
LIMITE ARRIERE
REARWARD LlM
1600
;. .;;. ;.; 3858 w

3:
:.:.:..:.,.:
.'. '.' 3500
".'
'.'..,'
.:.: .:.
" .:. 3000
..'.:.
:.. .'.
..' .'. 2646
LIMITE AVANT
FORWARD LIMIT
.j.
...'..
s
~
124
5512
'.'.':.:'::.:':':
i ':~~
!!~::':::::.'
S
.;
with respect to
r3:ffi 13.21l
L1.4253.44
3~
3.15 3.20
3.30
3.35
3.40
3.45
~::~:~
:~:.~:
~:::~::~:
::::,.:~~~~..~.~~~~:~.:~~~~~~~:.:.
'...~::::
::::: ::: ::~::~
:::
<
2
limits
.' .'.
12E
130
124.811126.411128 I"
132
CG (in)
134
I'
136
38
1137.4137.8
~
Absolute
(148
km/h
maximumpennissible
-92
Particular
care
on the sling.
tlm
speed with a load on the hook is 80 kt
MPH).
must be exercised
when bulky
loads
: The pilot is responsible for determining

according to the load and sling length.
DGAC
Approved:
I A I c I DIE I FIG I
are be.ing
the limit
carried
speed
35082 SUP.11
.
94-01
Page 2
---FLIGHT
.-Instruction
MANUAL
Dlates
.An
instruction
R
plate
in
the
cockpit
indicates:
CARRYING OF EXTERNAL LOADS

CLASS OF APPROVEDAIRCRAFT/LOAD COMBINATION B. WHEN EXTERNAL
LOADS ARE CARRIED, NO PERSON MAY BE CARRIED UNLESS:
-HE IS A FLIGHT CREW MEMBER;
-HE
IS A FLIGHT CREWMEMBER TRAINEE;
OR
-HE
PERFORMSAN ESSENTIAL FUNCTION IN CONNECTION WITH THE
EXTERNAL-LOAD OPERATION.
OR
EMPORT DE CHARGES EXTERNES
CLASSE DE COMBINAISONS GIRAVION~CHARGES APPROUVEEB AUCUNE
PERSONNENE PEUT ETRE TRANSPORTEE A MOINS DE :
-ETRE UN DES MEMBRESDE L'EQUIPAGE.
-SUIVRE
UN COURS DE FORMATION EN TANT QUE MEMBREO'EQUIPAGE.
-REMPLIR UNE FONCTION ESSENTIELLE AYANT TRAIT A L'UTILISATION
DU GIRAVION AVEC CHARGEEXTERIEURE.
.A
.
.
plate,
visible
hook, indicates
to the ground operator

the maximum sling
load.
and located
near to the
R
R
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
The emergency procedures
laid
applicable
but are completed
down in the basic Flight

Manual
by the following
procedures.
Enaine failure
load
with external
remain
R
R
-If
an engine failure
should
occur in flight
with an external
load,
establish
auto rotational
flight
and immediately
release
the load.
-If
engine failure
occurs whilst
ground personnel
are hooking up the load,
the pilot
should move away to the right,
applying
collective
pitch
to
hold the aircraft
up. Ground personnel
are to be forewarned
that in
the event of engine failure
they are to move away to the left.
DGACAPpraved:
I A I C I DIE
I FIG
350B2
I H I
SUP.11
94-01
Page 3
L__-
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL
PROCEDURES
The procedures laid down in the basic Flight Manual remain applicable
but are c~leted
by the following procedures.
R
R
Carring heavy loads is a delicate operation, due to the possible effects

of a swinging load on the flight
behaviour of the helicopter.
Consequently,
pilots are advised to train with gradually increased sling loads before
undertaking heavy load carrying operations.
CAUTION: IN WETWEATHER,
THICK RUBBERGLOVESSHOULDBE WORNBY THE
-OPERATOR
HANDLINGTHE HOOKANDLOAD. RELEASE
THE CHARGE
OF
STATIC ELECTRICITYBY PLACINGAN ELECTRICAL
CONDUCTOR
CABLE
OR TUBE BETWEEN
THE GROUND
AND THE CARGORELEASEUNIT (Hook).
-Check
of the installation
On the ground, before carrying
out a load transport
operation:
.Check that the hook opens correctly

both in normal and jettison
control modes.
.Zero the load indicator.
.In flight,
press the "SLING" pushbutton in order to set the system in
readiness for normal release of the load which will be acc~lished
by
actuating the rocker-switch on the cyclic stick control grip.
-~
.When the load is secured, apply collective
pitch very smoothly,
while maintaining the aircraft
directly
above the load. Whenthe cables
are taut, dwell briefly
before raising the load.
.Lift
the load off the ground vertically,
keeping a watch on the load
indicator,
then move off in a forward climb.
-Manoeuvres
All control movements should be made very gently, with very gradual
acceleration
and deceleration,
and only slightly
banked turns.
DGACApproved:
3S0 B2
SUP.11
I A I C I 0 I ElF IG I H I
94-01
---
Page 4
.
.
FLIGHTMANUAL
[=~~~~~J
Paragraph 4
.In
NORMAL
PROCEDURE
the subparagraph Check of the installation
"Check that the hook ...control

text
after:
modes"
added as follows:
.Check the free rotation

its return spring.
of the retaining
latch and correct
operation
of
.
8
.
350 82
SUP.II
DGAC Approved:
I AI
C I DIE
I FIG
I H I
98-43
---~
Page 4
*RR*L
---FLIGHT
MANUAL
.-~
Establish zero translational
ground speed sufficiently
high to ensure
that the load is not dragged along the ground, then descend vertically
until
the load is deposited. The load indicator
reading is zero.
-~
To release the load, actuate the switch on the cyclic
Check that the load is effectively
If
5
.The
the load is not off,
stick.
released.
actuate the jettison
R
handle to release it.
PERFORMANCE
Perfonnance Data given in the basic Flight
Manual apply.
The perfonnance curves for weights in excess of 2250 kg (4961lb)

are
plotted
in dotted line on the performance charts contained in the
PERFORMANCE
Section of the basic Flight Manual.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
IAlclDIEIFIGIHI
35082
SUP.11
94-01
Page 5
I
FLIGHT MANUAL
.'8
eurocopter
FLIG HT MAN UAL
AS 350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
EXTERNAL
LOADTRANSPORT
"CARGOSLING"
Per drawings:
IMPORTANT
350A 82.8012
350A 82.8013
NOTE

The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is speciiied on the List of
Effective Pages.
..
This supplement
supports the helicopters delivered by both AEROSPATIALE
end EUROCOPTER
FRANCE.
FRANCE using the
seme procedures
as AEROSPATIALE.
THIS SUPPLEMENT
MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE
-~;:::::
JJd
~~
.DGAC
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Direction Technique Support
Approved:
I A I C I 0 I ElF
Etablissement
-13725
350 82
I GI HI
de Marignene
Marlgnane Cede.
-France
SUP.12.P1
94-01
Page 1
.
.
-FLIGHT
MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVEPAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Evolution
page code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
SUP.12
SUP.12
SUP.12
SUP.12
SUP.12
SUP.12
P1
P5
DATE
1
1/01
1
2
3
4
(1
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
94-01
.DGAC
Date
0
1
89-17
94-()1
Approved:
W
No
DATE
(1)
R
R
R
R
R
R
LISTOF THE LATESTNORMAL

APPROVEDREVISIONS
No
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
Date
NORMAL REVISION: 1
DGACAPPROVED
DATE: 03
35082
SUP.12.P5
94-01
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
The external
load-carrying
installation
includes:
-A
release unit featuring

electrical
control of hook release in normal
operation and mechanical opening in emergency.
-A control and indicating
system, for the pilot, comprising:
.load
indicator
(1), with a zero setting control (2).
an electrical
system supplying power to the normal release circuit
via
a press-key on the control console and a switch on the pilot's
cyclic
stick grip.
.an "EMERGENCY
RELEASE"(jettison)
control handle mounted on the
underside of the pilot's
collective
lever.
The load indicator
.normal
release
electrical
hook control
circuit
circuit
is protected
R
R
by a fuse and the
by tWo fuses.
1
R
g
IJ
~
2 LIMITATIONS
EXTERNAL LOAD OPERATIONS MUST BE IN ACCORDANCEWITH OPERATING

REGULATIONS GOVERNING THESE OPERATIONS.
The limitations
laid down in the basic Flight
are completed by the following limitations.
-Maximum
Manual remain applicable
but
load
The maximumpermissible
sling
load is 750 kg (1660 lb).
-Maximum Qross weiQht with external
load
Maximumpermissible gross weight with an external load is that at which

hover O.G.E. can be held. (See PERFORMANCE
Section of the basic
Flight Manual).
Maximumweight including
CAUTION:
.DGAC
load:
2500 kg (5512 lb).
MAXIMUM WEIGHT WITHOUT EXTERNAL LOAD IS LIMITED AS SPECIFIED

IN THE LIMITATIONS SECTION OF THE BASIC FLIGHT MANUAL.
Approved:
I A I C 101 ElF
external
350 B2
I G I HI
SUP.12
94-01
Page 1
R
R
-FLIGHT
MANUAL
-LonQitudinal
C.Q.
limits
Use graph below to define
weights.
longitudinal
c.g.
limits
with respect to
-;;
;e-
;;;
I-
co
co
I,I~~~ AR~'ER~
REARWARDLlM
:..:..
.,;
g
g
,;
~
-Y.,J!.,!.,.
Absolute maximumpermissible
speed with a load on the hook is 80 knots
(92 MPH) (148 km/h).
Particular
care must be exercised when bulky loads are being carried
on the sling.
~
: The pilot is responsible for determining

to the load and sling length.
DGAC
Approved:
I AI CI DIEI FIGI
the limit
35082
speed according
SUP.12 .
94-01 Page
2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.-Instruction
olates
.An
instruction
plate
in
the
cockpit
indicates:
CARRYING OF EXTERNAL LOADS

CLASS OF APPROVED AIRCRAFT/LOAD COMBINATION B. WHEN EXTERNAL
LOADS ARE CARRIED, NO PERSON MAY BE CARRIED UNLESS:
-HE IS A FLIGHT CREW MEMBER;
-HE IS A FLIGHT CREWMEMBER TRAINEE;
OR
-HE
PERFORMSAN ESSENTIAL FUNCTION IN CONNECTIONWITH THE
EXTERNAL-LOAD OPERATION.
OR
4It
EMPORT DE CHARGES EXTERNES

CLASSE DE COMBINAISONS GIRAVION-CHARGES APPROUVEEB AUCUNE
PERSONNENE PEUT ETRE TRANSPORTEE A MOINS DE :
-ETRE UN DES MEMBRESDE L'EQUIPAGE.
-SUIVRE
UN COURS DE FORMATION EN TANT QUE MEMBRED'EQUIPAGE.
-REMPLIR
UNE FONCTION ESSENTIELLE AYANT TRAIT A L'UTILISATION
DU GIRAVION AVEC CHARGE EXTERIEURE.
.A
plate,
visible
hook, indicates
to
the
the ground operator

maximum sling
load.
and located
near
to
EnQine
-If
-If
R
R
remain
R
R
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
The emergency procedures
laid
Manual
applicable
but are calf)leted
by the following
procedures.
the
failure
with
external
load
an engine failure
should occur in flight
with an external
load,
establish
autorotational
flight
and immediately
release the load.
engine failure
occurs whilst
ground personnel
are hooking
up the load,
the pilot
should move away to the right,
applying
collective
pitch
to
hold the aircraft
up. Ground personnel
are to be forewarned
that in
the event of engine failure
they are to move away to the left.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
The procedures
laid
Manual
but are completed
by the following
procedures.
remain
applicable
R
R
Carrying
heavy loads is a delicate
operation.
due to the possible
effects
of a swinging
load on the flight
behaviour
of the helicopter.
Consequently,
pilots
are advised to train
with gradually
increased
sling
loads before
undertaking
heavy load carrying
operations.
WARNING:
4It
IN WETWEATHER, THICK RUBBER GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN BY THE

OPERATOR HANDLING THE HOOK AND LOAD. RELEASE THE CHARGEOF
STATIC ELECTRICITY BY PLACING AN ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORCABLE OR
TUBE BETWEENTHE GROUNDAND THE CARGORELEASE UNIT (Hook).
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I DIE
I F IG I H I
350B2
SUP. 12
94-01
Page 3
-FLIGHT
MANUAL
-Check of the installation

On the ground, before carrying out a load transport operation:
Check that the hook opens correctly
both in normal and jettison
control
modes.
Zero the load indicator.
In flight,
press the "SLING" pushbutton in order to set the system in
readiness for normal release of the load which will be acc~lished
by
actuating the switch situated on the cyclic stick grip.
-Takeoff
-:-whenthe load is secured, apply collective
pitch very smoothly, while
maintaining the aircraft
directly
above the load. Whenthe cables are
taut, dwell briefly
before raising the load.
.Lift
the load off the ground vertically,
keeping a watch on the load
indicator,
then move off in a forward climb.
-Manoeuvres
All control
acceleration
movements should
and deceleration,
be made very gently,

and only slightly
with very gradual

banked turns-
R
R
R
-~
Establish zero translational

ground speed sufficiently
high to ensure
that the load is not dragged along ground, then descend vertically
until
the load is deposited. The load indicator
reading is zero.
-Release
TOre1ease the load, actuate the switch on the cyclic
Check that the load is effectivelv
released.
stick
grip.
R
R
R
If
5
the load is not off,
actuate
the jettison
handle to clear it.
PERFORMANCE
The Performance Data given in the basic Flight
Manual remai~ applicable.
The performance curves for weights in excess of 4961lb (2250 kg) are
plotted in dotted line on the performance charts contained in the
PERFORMANCE
Section of the basic Flight Manual.
DGAC
Approved:
IAICIDIEIFIGIHI
35082SUP.12
.
94-01
Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
.~='Y
5&
IfILO~IJ111r MIAIMIlJJIAIL.
IA$
~~(Q1
[m:?2
.$ll1JlFlFlLlE~IEOO1'
SLIDING DOOR
LH door per drawings:

350A 82.2001.00
or [350A 82.2000.00
350A 82.2000.02
RH door per drawings:
.350A
350A 82.2081.01
82.2000.01
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The infonnation contained herein supplements or

supersedes the information given in the basic Flight
Manual and/or applicable Flight Manual supplements.
The effective
of the Supplement at the latest revision
specified on SUP.13.P5 Page 1
-~~=]/7
~=~IVISION
DGACApproved:
aerospaIfd8
SOCIETENATION
ALE INDUSTRIELLE
HELICOPTERES-OIRECTION
SUPPORTCLIENTS -B.P.17~
350 82
-13723
-HARIGNAIE
SUP
89-17
---
FRANCE
.13.P1
Page1
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
.
DGAC
Approved:
[I]
350B2
SUP .13.Pl
.
89-17 Page
2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.CUSTOMIZATION
A/C:
350 82
-SIN:
LIST OF ADDITIONALAPPROVED
PAGES
SECTION
..
PAGE
DATE CODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
THIS AIRCRAFT DOES NOT OFFER ANY PARTICULAR FEATURES

REQUIRING THE CUSTOMIZATION OF THE FLIGHT MANUAL ON
GREENPAGES.
LIST OF ne LATEST~
Nf'R(NED REVISla-IS
No
Date
89-17
No
~
REVISla-I : 0
~
I!l'PRO\lO
DATE
Date
':I"'~
.DGAC
Approved:
~
350 B2
SUP .13.Pl
89-17
Page3
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF CONOITIONAL
REVISIONS(RC)
This manual assigned to the helicopter
mentioned on the
contains
the following
pink pages except those cancelled
conditions
are complied with.
title
page.
when the
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL
REVISION(RN) MODIFIESTHE PAGENUMBER
FOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNEDBELOW. THE READER WILL HAVE TO CHANGETHE NUMBEROF THE PINK
PAGE BY HAND. SO THAT THE INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
.Section
Page
Date
Applicable
before condition
is met:
.
OOTE : The date
-followed
.DGAC
Approved:
[I]

by the number of the
of the last
week in this
two figures
year.
350 B2
of the
SUP
89-17
year
.13.P3
Page 1
FLI GHTMArIJAL
COMPOSITION
OF RUSHREVISIONS(RR)
The Manual contains
No
SECTION
the following
-PAGE
additional
CODE
No
yellow pagels) :
SECTION -PAGE
CODE
DATE
DGACApproved:
~
1111111111-
DATE
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.13.P4
Page 1
-C
--FLIGHT
MAMJAL
.LIST
OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVE
PAGES
(1)
Evolution
-R
-N
page code
: Revised.
: New. to
SECTION
13. 0
13. 0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13. 0
13. 0
13. 0
13. 0
to be replaced
be inserted
PAGE
P1
P1
P1
P3
P4
P5
DATE (1
1
2
3
1
1
1/ 1 -011
2
3
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
Date
89-17
tJ
PAGE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
LIST OF THELATEST~
N'PR().,DREVISI~
tJ
SECTION
DATE (1
~
REVISIOO: 0
OOACU'PROI,.D
DATE
Date
""ON
DGACApproved:
m
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.13.P5
Page 1
*01-
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
The aircraft
can be fitted with one or two sliding door installations.
These installations
are of same design and synwnetrical.
Each installation
mainly comprises:
-A small. jettisonable
forward door (1). providing access to the pilot's
or copilot's
seat.
-A large. sliding.
rear door (2). running on three guide rails.
This door is fitted with:
.an open position catch (3) (door held fully open)
.an inner control lever (4) connected to the outer handle (5) for
opening and closing the door
.a closing system locking lever (6).
These sliding doors can be opened in flight
by the crelolnembersfor rescue
hoisting operations. and on ground to facilitate
freight loading.
.or
.DGAC
Approved:
[fJ
350 82
SUP .13
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
---~~
2LIMITATIONS .
2.1
Aircraft
~1ae
Fitted
with L.H.
Sliding
Door
and two Standard
CLOSED
L.H.
CLOSED
Sliding
VNE
Fitted
with
R.H.
Sliding
70 kt
110 kts::
204 km/hr
80 kts -14B
km/hr
Door and two Standard
km/hr/Bl
-127
-92
MPH)
MPH
MPH
DOO~S on L.H.
OPEN OR RE~VED
VNE
110 kt< 204 km/hr/127

or VNE-
PROHIBITED
door
operation:
fitted
with
-Opening:
-Closing:
both L.H.
70 kt
60 kts
60 kts
and R.H.
sliding
-111
-111
MPH
(130 km/hr/B1
km/hr
km/hr
-69
-69
MPH)
MPH
MPH
doors
--CLOSED
L.H.
(130
DOORS
RE~VED
Aircraft
MPH)
CLOSED
CLOSED
Sliding
PROHIBITED
-Opening:
-Closing:
SLIDING
DOOR
80TH L.H.
2.3
RE~VED
135 kt (250 km/hr/l55

or VNE-
door operation:
Aircraft
Side
R.H.
on R.H.
SLIDING
DOOR
OPEN OR RE~VED
2.2
Doors
OPEN OR RE~VED
SLIDING
DOOR
CLOSED
VNE
OPEN OR RE~VED
60 kt (111
Sliding
door operation:
-Opening,
60 kts -111
-Closing:
60 kts -111
km/hr
km/hr
km/hr/69
-69
-69
MPH)
110 kt<204 km/hr/127

or VNE-
MPH
110 kt<204 km/hr/127

or VNE*
MPH
MPH
MPH
ANY OTHER DOOR CONFIGURATION IS PROHIBITED.

* Whichever
DGAC Approved:
[]
is
lower.
350 B2
SUP
B9-17
.13
Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.3
EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
If necessary.
the forward door(s)
can be jettisoned.
Should the DOORSlight illuninate

the emergency procedures laid down in
the basic Flight Manual remain applicable.
Maximunspeed shall be reduced
to 60 knots.
4 OORMAL
PROCEDURES
The procedures prescribed in Section 4 of the Flight Manual apply equally

to the helicopter fitted
with the sliding door installation(sJ.
In flight
seat
with one or two sliding
squabs
becoming
detached
doors open. there is a risk
at airspeed
above 70 knots
consequently they are to be removed before flying

It is also recorrmended that the security
carried in the cabin be ensured.
5
of the rear
(139 krn/h-81
MPH);
in these conditions.
of docunents and other objects
PERFORMANCE
Performance data as given in Section 5.1 of the Flight Manual applies
equally to the helicopter fitted
with sliding door installation(sJ
in
closed position.
.
~
DGAC Approved:
350 82
SUP
89-17
.13
Page 3
I
FLIGHT MANUAL
8 eurocopter
FLIGHT
AS
MANUAL
350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
SANDFILTER
Optional:
IMPORTANT
OP 1536
NOTE

The effectivity of the supplement
at the latest revision is specified on the List of
Effective Pages.
This supplement
supports
the helicopters
delivered
by both AEROSPATIALE
and EUROCOPTER
FRANCE.
Revisions
to this supplement
FRANCE using the
same procedures
as AEROSPATIALE.
THIS SUPPLEMENT
MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN
EQUIPMENT MENTIONED
ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.
-~~..I!d
~~
.DGAC
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Etablissament
THE
de Marignane
DirectionTechnique Support -13725 MarignaneCedex -France
APproved:
I A I B I C I DI
350 B2
SUP.14.P1
92-44
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 35082
SUPPLEMENT
14
B
Subiect : Additional
conditions.
Either
protection
of the following
-OP 1536 sand filter,

-OP 2561 system.
Complete the title
of the air intake under severe weather

optional
installations
is used:
or
of the supplement as follows :
-OP 1536 SANDFILTER

-OP 2561 AIR INTAKE PROTECTION
SYSTEM
8
DGACAPproved:
W
350 82
SUP.
92-04
14.P1
Page 1
"'82'"
FLIGHT MANUAL
.CUSTOMIZATION
:
A/C:
350 B2
-SIN:
PAGES
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
THIS AIRCRAFT DOES NOT OFFER ANY PARTICULAR FEATURES
REQUIRINGTHE CUSTOMIZATION
OF THE FLIGHT MANUAL
ON
GREENPAGES.
LIST OF nE LATEST~
APPROI,D
REVISIONS
r-b
.DGAC
Date
Date
89-17
Approved:
[g
No
NORMAL
REVISION: 0
~
~IIED
DATE
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.14.P1
Page 3
---
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
CONDITIONALREVISIONS(RC)
.OF
This manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title

page,
contains the following pink pages except those cancelled when the
conditions are complied with.
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL
FOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNED
BELOW,THE READERWILL HAVETO CHANGE
THENUMBER
OF THE PINK
PAGEBY HAND, SO ,HAT THE INFORMATION
REMAINSIN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE
PARAGRAPH
CONCERNED.
.Section
Page
Date
Applicable
before condition
is ~et '.
.
NOTE: The date is coded and consists of the last two figures
-followed
by the number of the week in this year.
DGACApproved:
GJ
350 82
of the year
SUP
89-17
.14.P3
Page 1
,
FLIGHT MANUAL
C~POSITION
OF RUSHREVISIONS (RR)
The Manual contains
No
SECTION
lA
SUP.14.Pl
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
the
-PAGE
1
1
2
4
following
additional
CODE
DATE
No
yellow
page(s)
SECTION ~ PAGE
CODE
DATE
92-04
92-04
92-04
92-04
..,-
.
'
DGACApproved:
350 82
SUP.
92-04
14.P4
Page 1
*82*
;!
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Manual contains
No
the following
SECTION -PAGE
additional
CODE
DATE
No
yellow page(s) :
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
..
.
.DGAC
Appr-oved:
[]
350 82
SUP
89-17
.14.P4
Page 1
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVE PAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Evolution
page code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
SUP.14
P1
P5
PAGE
DA~
(1)
1
1/01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
92-44
92-44
92-44
92-44
89-17
92-44
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
R
R
R
R
LIST OF THE LATESTNORMAL

APPROVEDREVISIONS
N0
Date
N0
Da te
.DGAC
89-17
92-44
Approved:
W
SUPPLEMENT
PAGE
DATE
NORMAL REVISION: 1
DGACAPPROVED
DATE: 26 -JUIL. 1993
35082
SUP.14.P5
92-44
.I
(1,)
Page 1
I
FLIGHT MANUAL
Complete paragraph GENERAL

as follows:
This installation
which does not use any P2 bleed air,
protect the air intake against any potential
induction
heavy snow fall.
is also designed to
of snow in flight,
under
Protection of the air intake is also ensured by the optional system

defined as OP 2561 (filter
installed on the air intake, not requiring
P2 air supply). The perfonmance data are those laid down for the .Sand
Filter Not Operating" configuration.
The sand filtering
function
is not ensured by the OP 2561 system.
.
8
DGAC
Approved:
35082
OJ
SUP.14
92-04
~-
Page 1
"B2"
FLIGHT
MANUAL
B
Complete paragraph NORMAL
PROCEDURES
as follows:
Pre-fliaht
checks
Under severe weather conditions:

-Open the engine cowling-Check for snow, ice or water in the air intake,
under the filter.
and particularly
.
DGACApproved:
CO
35082
SUP.14
92-04
Page 2
*82*
.
FLIGHTMANUAL
B
Subiect : Flight
under falling
snow
Complete paragraph LIMITATIONS as follows:

The restrictions
to the flight envelope in case of falling
given in the basic Flight Manual, are cancelled.
snow,
.
..0
.
.
DGAC
Approved:
m
35082
SU P. 14!
92-46
Page 1
*82*l
"
FLIGHT MANUAL c"
l~
The sand filter
installation
is designed to protect the engine against
ingestion of sand.
R
This installation
even when it does not use any P2 bleed air, is also
R
designed to protect the air intake against any potential
induction of snow R
in flight,
in falling
snow.
R
The system mainly consists of the following:
-a filter
fitted
on the engine air intake, below the ice protection
screen,
-a P2 air pressure supply system,
-an electric
control and monitoring system.
During
engine operation.
constitute
the filter.
intake.
the ambient
The filtered
air flows
through
separator
tubes which
air
is forced
towards
the engine
air
The sand is evacuated by scavenge tubes ventilated
by P2 air.
The electrical
circuit
supplies an electric
valve via the "SANDFILT" pushbutton.
Opening and closing of the P2 air pressure circuit
is controlled
by the electric
valve. A blue SANDF. light comes on to indicate that the
electric
valve is fully open. The electrical
circuit
is protected by the
SANDFILT. fuse on the side panel.
2
LIMITATIONS
The limitations
laid down in the basic Flight Manual remain applicable
with the exception of the following
specific limitations:
R
R
-The flight
-Sand filter
R
R
envelope restrictions
operating.
.the
heating and demisting
.cDn1Jly with the following
O.A.T.
C'O
Ng. diff.
at
MAX T /0
PWR
Ng. diff.
at
MAX. CONTINUOUS
PWR
.OGAC
Approved:
I AI BI CI D I
-3.5
snow are cancelled.
systems must be switched off,

Ng limits:
LOWERTHAN
+ S.C
0
in case of falling
BETWEEN
+ 5'C
AND + 3S.C
HIGHERTHAN
+ 3S'C
-0.5
-1
-4
-4.5
350 B2
SUP.14
92-44
Page 1
",
'"
EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
All the emergency procedures specified
in the basic Flight Manual remain
applicable.
If the P2 air valve fails to open (light
remains off),
avoid flying
the
helicopter
in sand-laden atmosphere to prevent premature damage to the
engine.
Should the valve fail to close (light
remains on), flight
can be continued
without adverse consequence.
FLIGHTMANUAL
NORMALPROCEDURES
The nonnal procedures laid down in the basic Flight Manual remain
applicable
but are completed by the following procedures.
EXTERNAL
CHECKS
-Engine
air intake.
Remove ice or snow from the air intake grid.

.Open the engine cowling.
Check for snow, ice or water in the air intake,
under the filter.
R
R
R
R
and particularly
CHECKSBEFORESTARTINGTHE ENGINE
-Test
the indicator
light
located
R
on the instrument
panel.
ENGINE POWERCHECK
When checking the engine, make sure that the sand filter
pushbutton
set to "off".
When the sand filter
is fitted,
use the power assurance check chart
the next page (Figure 1).
The procedures for checks on ground and in flight,
given in Section
remain applicable.
FLYING
IN
SAND-LADEN
is
on
4,
An.10SPHERE
-Switch
off the heating and de-misting systems.
-Depress
the SANDFILTER pushbutton.
-Make sure the SANDFILTER light illuminates.
Nlli
: Operating the sand filter

approximately IS'C.
DGAC
Approved:
I A I BI CI DI
causes t4 temperature
350B2
to
rise
by
SUP.14.
92-44
Page 2
.
\
FLIGHT MANUAL
.(.~:
..'.'.'.
'.'
'.
'.
...'...'.
'
..::::::::::::::::::::: INCORRECT :::::::::::::.

30
,: 20
'...'.
'..
'
::;:-:-.;:::::.:;:;':;::;;;:::::::'.:.
:::::::::::~:
'::.:;::::::::::;::::::::::;::::::::i:...:::
...,::;;;: ::::;::::.::::::;;. :-::::.:-: ::::--:.:;:- .: :-'";::: ::-"; ::.: : ::: ;.
.."..
~
"""""'"
~ 10
."""""'"
'.
'.'
""""""
...'.'.
'...
'
"
...
...'...
...,:::.:::::::::::::::::::::::::::.::::::::::::;::::: ::::::::::::; .::::::::::::::::
l-
OJ
.: 0
~
~
-10
'.c..:::::" :::::::::::::::;::::;::::::;:: :::;

":-::;::::::::::::.:::::::::::::::::::
:::::::::
...'.. .'..'
..".
'
.-20
'"'::::::::::::~;.~.:ii:.::
-30
(FTX100)
(MXIOO)
.100
30
IoJ
.;
'"
f
"
oi 50
OJ
~
.10
IoJ
400
(tr/.,)
.~
.,
.,
.Z
.,0
"~
300a;
380
COUPLE TOROuE (%)
Figure 1 : Power Assurance Check -Sand
DGACApproved:
I A I 8 Ic I D I F I c I H I
Filter
Not Operating
35082
SUP.14
89-17
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 PERFORMANCE
5.1
ReQulatorv PerformanceData
The performance data laid down in the basic Flight Manual Section 5.1
remain applicable with the exception of the following data:
5.1.1
Sand Filter
not ODeratinQ
FLIGHT
HEATING AN DEMISTING
HEATINGAND/OR
R
R
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEMS
OFF
DEMISTING
SYSTEMS
OPERATING
R
R
Figure 2
(Fig.2) minus 60 kg
~.
O.G.E hover
Figure
(130 lb)
(Fig.3) minus 60 kg
(130 lb)
R
R
R
Rate of clim
Figure
(Fig.5)
I.G.E hover
5.1.2
Sand Filter
ODeratinQ
The performance data with the sand filter

operating are to be computed
from figures 2, 3, 5 and allow for the reductions indicated in the
table below:
FLIGHT
CONFIGURATION
OUTSIDEAIR TEMPERATURE('C)
LOWERTHAN
BETWEEN
+ 5.C AND
+ 5'C
HIGHER THAN
+ 35'C
+ 35'C
IGE hover
Figure 2
(fig.2)
minus 40kg
(90lb)
(fig.2)
minus 100kg
(220lb)
OGE hover
Figure
(fig.3)
(fig.3)
Rate of clim
Figure
(fig.5)
minus 40kg
(90lb)
minus 100kg
(220lb)
DGAC
Approved:
I A I BI C I DI
minus 70ft/mn (fig.5)
350
B2
minus 180ft/mn
SUP.14
.
92-44
Page4
C{""
',~
:.:,;
FLIGHT MANUAL
B
Paragraph 5.1.1 is to be modified as follows:
The .Sand Filter
table below:
FLIGHT
CONFIGURATION
Not Operating.
performance data are given in the
HEATING AN DEMISTING
SYSTEMSOFF
HEATING AND/OR
DEMISTING SYSTEMS
OPERATING
I.G.E.
hover
Figure 2
O.G.E. hover
Figure 3
Rate-of-climb
Figure 5
(Fig.2) minus 60 kg
(130 lb)
(Fig.3) minus 60 kg
(130 lb)
(Fig.5)
.
DGACApproved:
350 82
SUP
92-04
.14
Page4
*82*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
BLANK PAGE
.
.DGAC
Approved:
IAIBICIDIFIGIHI
350 B2
SUP.14
89-17
PageS
'"
;~J
2000:mt
~
'i
'
'I
i !I
"
~fJ {
00
6000
18000.
..E
~
.-
~ 16000
~
.~
5000
.a;
I-
5
U)
UJ
It:
~ 14000
U!
i
~
U)
~ 12000
I-
a-
;r
a:
~
'"
'"'
10000
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
4000
aU!
c
~
;?
3000
8000
2000
6000
~
4000
1000
I)
0
0
2000
'"
0
"'
0
:-
.0
-1000
-305
30~~
1500
2000
' .~5~~
' , ~O~~ ..~510~
MASSEWEIGHT
Figure
2250
(kg)
' , ~~~~ (', ~)'
2500
~
2
CONDITIONS
-Height:
5 ft
-1.5
-Sand
filter
not operating
-Heating
and demisting
systems
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I D I FIG
I HI
off
IGE HOVER PERFORMANCEI

I
35D
82
SUP.14
.
89-17
Page 6---
FLIGHT MANUAL
.20000
6000
18000
..e
'I-
5000
.CJ)
I-
+...
I-
16000
:J
CJ)
UJ
Q:
14000
.~
UJ
a.
"
4000
(t:
~
:J
:J
l-
12000
UJ
I-
(t:
-I
0.
<t
~
10000
.~
3000
C\
1'\
8000
2000
6000
4000
1000
2000
0
~
0
<5
-1000
-305
1500
3010~
2000
..35~~
'
.~010~
..~5100
2250
(kg)
5b'oo
'
.,
MASSEWEIGHT
2500
(lb
~ \
~
)"Jf L
Figure
CONDITIONS
-No
wind
OG
-Heating
and
-Sand
demisting
filter
.DGAC
systems
not
18
HOVER
PERFORMANCE
operating
Approved:
IE
E
off
35082
FIG
SUP.14
89-17
Page
FLIGHT MANUAL
33
,
..
.
.
, ,
---ii
..
g
i:
~.:'
'
i ;
-00
-30
-20
-10
~.EXT.
10
20
30
40
50
60
1500
I O.A.T. c.C'
with
internal
DGAC
Approved:
I A I B I C I D I FIG
I HI
2500
3000
so
HAOOE
COMIE I C(NIIeCTED
I[CJjT
Figure
NOTE:
weight
limitation
2250 kg (4961 lb)
2000
load:
4
CORRECTED WEIGHT TO
DETERMINE RATES OF CLIMB
(on Figure
opposite)
350
B2
SUP
.14.
89-17
Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
..,
,
,.
, .
...,..
...
, .
...,
.
,.
..,.
~-i;....tt.~..!
::
::
,;-j- :-.j-- +-+. ..f..
.I.f.
..,
f : : i
i ! ;; ;:: i
: : 1 ~ i: ~:
1-..1.''.:..,oj.
'.t. -1.'1-.r..:1..:.
-f...'i.. i
i:
:i
,.
i::!
~:: i
-1--1..
1-.i..i.j.'
--f..i..t'
-40-30-20-10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
TEMP.EXT. I O.A. T.
I'C)
::::
.-,j-- '+-'f'.f..~.
0..]..1-,
mt
~
VI~
1000
1:iX)
~
ASC. I RATE"
(F a.ve
2500
1ft/on)
Figure 5
CONDITIONS
-Max.
continuous power rating
-IAS 55 kt -102 km/hr
-Sand filter
not operating
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I B I C I D I FIG I HI
RATEOF CLIMB I
I
35082
SUP.14
89-17
Page 9
.8
eurocopter
FLIGHT
MANUAL
FLIG HT MAN UAL
.AS
350 82
SUPPLEMENT
SFIM 85 T 31 AUTOMATIC PILOT
THREE-AXIS
Per drawings:
350A 82.7025.
350A 82.7026.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The informetion contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given
In the basic flight manual and/or applicable flight manual supplaments.
The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is specified on the List of
Effective Pages.
*
ThIs supplement supports the helicopters delivered by both AEROSPATIALE
and EUROCOPTER
FRANCE.
Revisions to this supplement are made by EUROCOPTER FRANCE using the
same proceduras
as AEROSPATIALE.
THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE
'
-~===.J)/J
EUROCOPTER
~~~
Direction
FRANCE
Technique
OGAC
Approved:
I A I C I FIG
Support
I.
35082
SUP.16.P1
Etablissement
-13725
Marignane
de
Marlgnane
Codex
95-09
-Fronce
Page 1
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVEPAGES
DOTCERTIFICATION
(1) Page Revision Code
-R : Revised, to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT
PAGE
DATE (1)
SUP.16
P1
95-09
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
P5
1/01
1
2
3
4
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-09
N
R
R
R
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-41
95-41
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
SUP.16
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

APPROVED REVISIONS
No
Date
89-17
1
2
95-{)9I
95-41
No
SUPPLEMENTPAGE
NORMAL REVISION:
DGAC APPROVEDI
DATE (1)
Date
.DGAC
APproved:
W
35082
SUP.16.P5
95-41
Page 1
lI
.
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
1~
The three-axis (pitch, roll, yaw) autopilot
attitudes and heading selected by the pilot.
Additional modes can provide:
.
I
II
-airspeed
-altitude
-acquire
hold,
hold,
and hold of heading selected on the HSI.
The AP unit mainly consists

-A
-A
(AP) is intended to hold the
of :
control panel on the console.

computer underneath the cabin floor
data from the following detectors:
on copilot's
side that receives
.vertical
gyro,
.horizontal
situation indicator (HSI),
.gyro-co""ass,
.air
data sensor,
.control
pedal displacement detector,
.lateral
accelerometer.
-An artificial
load release system.
-A control for adjustment of the rudder pedals friction.
-Three control actuators (one per axis).
-Two trim actuators (on pitch and roll axes).
-Three galvanometers (pitch, roll, yaw).
-Three "disengaged channel" indicating lights (P, Rand Y).
-An AP coupler monitoring panel.
-A failure monitoring unit.
This module monitors the operation of the pitch and roll channels at
different
levels by co""aring the data delivered from the instrument
panel vertical gyro and gyro horizon:
.Attitude
sensors.
.Command inputs generating system.
.Control actuators.
In case of abnormal operation, this unit warns the pilot and cuts outI
the defective channel. It starts operating automatically as the AP
pitch and roll channels are engaged.
R,
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I c I FIG I
35082
SUP.16
95-41
Page 1
FLIGHT
MANUAL
1.1 Autooilot control oanel (figure 1)
GIS
i
~
NAV
ITEM
B/C
[8J.
F/C
Description
No.
V/L
CPL
Pitch channel engagepushbutton
Roll channel engagepushbutton
Yawchannel engagepushbutton
Altitude hold pushbutton
Airspeed hold pushbutton
-Function
Selected heading hold pushbutton
Coordinated turn modepushbutton
Failure monitoring unit and APdisengagepushbutton
Only the functions of the pushbuttons identified on the figure can be

used. Whenpressed in these pushbuttons illuminate to indicate that their
functions are effective. This causesthe green ONmarking to appear.
DGACAPproved:
IA I C I FIG I
35082
SUP.16
95-41
Page2
.
.
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
1.2
Instrument
Panel
Galvanometers
(Figure
The galvanometers
indicate
the position
with respect
to their
middle position;
the pointer
is in the middle.
In pitch
recentered
automatically.
.~
~~
~
CJ4
CJ4
CJ4
Figure
Item
No.
Description
P (pitch)
Direction
galvanometer
R (roll)
Y (yaw)
AnDer indicator
1.3
galvanometer
lights
: The yaw galvanometer

rudder pedals in the
Cyclic
Stick
Grio
of
Indication
Indicates
a nose-down order given
by the autopilot
Indicates
a roll-to-right
order
given by the autopilot
Indicates
a yaw-to-left
order given
bv the autooilot
When on, the associated
channel(s)
is (are)
not enaaaed
galvanometer
pointer
direction
is
recentered
by moving
shown by the pointer.
the
Controls
The autopilot
controls
grips
(if dual controls
are located
installed)
on pilot's
:!
and copilot's
cyclic
stick
-A
four-way
beep-trim
button.
Allows the pilot
to operate
the stick
andI
change the aircraft
attitudes.
-A trim release pushbutton.
Momentarily
releases
pitch
and roll
channel
artificial
feel loads.
-A pushbutton.
Disengages AP system.
1.4
Vertical
Gvro Valid
Data
Liaht
(If
installed)
An amber GYRO light

on the failure
monitoring
panel illuminates
indicate
that the vertical
gyro valid
data signal
is lost.
.DGAC
R
R
R
R
NOSE UP
of the series-mounted
actuators
when the actuator
is centered.
and roll,
the actuators
are
G00
ABRER
2)
Approved:
I A ICI F I
35082
to
SUP.16
95-41
Page 3
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 AUTOPILOTCONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
(Fi gure 3)
-On
the instrwnent
panel or on the console.
PITCH
TRIM
ACTUATffi
ROLL
~o
TRIM
ACTUATffi
-On
;~
TRIM
ELEASE
ITEM
No.
1
Descriotion
Pitch trim actuator
-Function
release
Roll trim actuator
Pennanent release of artificial

Pitch and Roll.
release
loads in
the console
An ON/OFFpushbutton located on the console controls the static

(115-V and 26-V, 400 Hz, a.c. power generating system).
inverter
6 AUTOPILOTMONITORING
PANEL(Figure 4)
2
~O
0
0
:g
ITEN
o.
,-. ..
No.
Descr~~10n -Funct10n
1
A.P. warning light (blinking,
red)
2
TRIM caution light (blinking,
amber)
3
Light dimmer
4
TEST function indicator light
5
TEST selector switch
6
Selected heading hold mode engagement advisory light (green)
7
Altitude hold mode engagementadvisory light (green)
8
Airspeed hold mode engagementadvisory light (green)
9
GYROwarni no 1 i oht (ambei:L
DGACApproved:
I A I C I FIG I
35082
SUP.i6.
95-09
--
Page 4
.,
-II
.FLIGHT
LIMITATIONS
Apart from the specific limitations
given below, all
down in Section 2 remain applicable:
the limitations
laid
-When the aircraft

is on the ground, the AP must be disengaged except
when checks are to be performed.
-Do not engage the AP before take-off
if trim test is not satisfactory.
-If
height is less than 400 ft (120 m), the pilot must keep his hand
on the cyclic stick.
-Minimum gross weight with AP in operation:
1300 kg.
3 EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
.
All
emergency
remain
procedures
applicable,
specified
together
with
in
the
Section
3 of
following
the
additional
basic
Flight
Manual
procedures;
3.1 ~
If jerks or sudden movements independent of air turbulence are felt
during flight with autopilot engaged, this may be caused by the
autopilot.
Consequently disengage the autopilot:
-If
the anomaly disappears after disengagement, re-engage each channel

in turn until failure is identified.
Retain channels that operate
properly.
-If
the anomaly persists the AP is not at fault.
Re-engage the
autopilot if required.
3.2
Failure
of hydraulic
system
-Ccxnply with procedure specified

-Disengage
AP
3.3
Failure
of the vertical
INDICATION
-AP light blinks for
10 sec. (Fig. 4).
-Gyro light illuminate
or gyro horizon flag
comes into view.
-P,
R, MONIT pushbuttor
lights on AP control
panel go out (Fig. 1)
-P and R lights (below,
galvanometers)
illuminate (Fig. 2,I
Detail 4).
MANUAL
in Section 3.
Qyro or gyro horizon

SYMPTOM
PILOT'S ACTION
-Automatic disengagement -Manual control by the

of pitch and roll
pilot.
channels or of failure
The yaw channel remain
monitoring unit.
operative
-The HDG, ALT and A/S
modes are inoperative.
-Continue flight.
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I c I F IG I
3S0 82
SUP.16R
95-41
Page 5
"
.I
-i
FLIGHT
MANUAL.
3.4
Failure
of the ovro-cOll1Dass
INDICAiION
SYMPTa.1

10 seconds (Fig. 4).
-Failure
flag appears
on HSI (HDG).
3.5
Sudden failure
PILDT'SAmON
-The yaw channel

disengages autcxnatically. Y and TIC pushbutton (3,7 Fig.l)
light goes out and Y
indicator light (3,Fig.
2) illuminates.
-The "selected heading"
function disengages
automatically.
HDG
pushbutton 1 ight
(Fig. 1) and HDG
indicator light (Fig.4)
QOout.
-Yaw control by the

pilot (Yaw channel and
heading hold are inoperative).
-Continue
flight.

10 seconds (Fig. 4)
SYMPTa.1
PILDT'SAmON
-Hardover to the defective axis.
-Automatic
disengagement of faulty
channel
-Manual control by the

pilot (power reduction
may be required to
comply with the
limitations).
-Continue
flight.
TRIM malfunction
INDICAiION
-TRIM light illuminates for 10 sec.
(Fig. 4) and defective trim disengages
autcxnatically.
SYMPTOM
PILDT'SAmON
-Before operation of the -Manual control by the

safety system (automatic
pilot.
disengagement), the
-Momentarily disengage
stick tends to move in
the artificial
loads
the direction of the
to trim stick.
failure
-Disengage the faulty
trim function.
-Continue flight.
The autopilot continue!
to operate without the
faulty axis being
trimmed.
-The pilot can no longer -Bring
galvanometer
operate trim.
pointer back to the
centre using the stick
release button
R
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I FIG
I
:
of the auto-oilot
INDICAiION
3.6
I'
350B2
SUP.16.
95-41
Page 6
.
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
3.7
BlockaQe of artificial
load svstem
INDICATION
SYMPTOM
-Blockage
of cyclic
PILOT'S
stic~
-Release
loads:
AmON
the stick
trim
.The blockage disappears:

disengage the
stick trim release
pushbutton and
continue
flight.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
~
.The blockage
persists:
break
mechanical shear pin

of load
c~ensator
shaft by applying
a 10 daN load approx
on cyclic stick.
3.8
A.C. Dower suDDlv failure

INDICATION
.
.DGAC

10 sec. (Fig. 4).
SYMPTOM
PILOT'S
-AP disengages automatically
AmON
-Check that ALTER

pushbutton is pressed
in.
-Continue flight
without autopilot.
3.9
Total Dower SUDDlv failure

In the event of a total power supply failure
automatically and cannot be re-engaged.
APproved:
I A I C I FIG
the autopilot
disengages
3S0 B2
SUP.16
95-41
Page 7
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL
PROCEOURES.
Apart from the specific procedures given below, the normal procedures laid
down in the basic Flight Manual remain applicable:
~
4.1
: In case the copilot's

cyclic stick has been removed check for
presence of threaded shunt plug on relevant connector (28-VDC
power supply to autopilot).
Checks before take-off
-Pushbuttons :
.TRIM RELEASE(ARTIFICIAL LOADS)
.PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR
.ROLL TRIM ACTUATOR
-Cyclic
stick
-Friction
untightened
-Rudder
pedals
-Friction
tightened
-Static
;nverter
-Pushbutton
-Horizontal
Situation
-Pilot's
and copilot's
4.1.1
I-Released
Autopilot
Indicator
gyro horizons
in
-HDG flag not visible

-Flag not visible
test
-Test selector switch set to LTS

(Detail 5 on Figure 4).
-Test
pressed
selector
switch set to O.
.Pitch,
roll
engaged.
and yaw channels
.Four-way beep trim button:

successively actuate in each
direction.
.Switch off autopilot through AP
release pushbutton on pilot's
cyclic stick.
Then repeat th;s
step through
same pushbutton
on copilot's
cyclic stick (if fitted)

after
re-engaging the three autopilot
channels.
-Lights
on control panel (Fig.
1) illuminate.
-Lights
on AP monitoring
panel (Fig. 4) illuminate
(2 1/2 second time delay).
-Test function light (4)
(Figure 4) illum;nates.
-Test function light (4)
(Figure 4) extinguishes.
-P, R, Y , MONITpushbutton
lights illuminate (Fig. 1).
-Lights
below galvanometers
extinguish (Detail 4, F;g. 2).
-Check cyclic stick and
relevant galvanometer pointer
move in the right direction.
-Lights
below galvanometers
illuminate.
-AP light (Fig.5) blinks for
10 seconds.
-Lights
on control
.
panel
(Fig. 1) extinguish.
DGAC
Approved:
IA I C I FIG I
--
35082
SUP.16
95-41
Page 8
II
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
4.1.2
Failure
..,nitoring
-Pitch
channel engaged
unit test
-Pitch
pushbutton light
illuminates
(Fig.
1).
-MaNIT pushbutton light

illuminates (Fig. 1).
-Actuate
four-way button to offset
-Cyclic
stick ..,ves in the
cyclic stick in pitch direction.
chosen direction.
-Test selector switch set to MONIT, -Cyclic
stick stops moving.
(Fig. 4).
-Galvanometer re-centers
(light on).
-AP warning light flashes
(Fig. 4).
-GYRO warning
light
illuminates
(Fig. 4).
-MaNIT pushbutton light
flashes (Fig. 1).
-Pitch pushbutton light
extinguishes (Fig. 1).
-Test
-Roll
selector switch set to 0

channel engaged.
-Roll
pushbutton light
-MONIT pushbutton light
Sameprocedure as the pitch channel.

4.1.3
Pitch
trim test
-Pitch
channel engaged.
-Test selector switch set to TRIM

(Detail on Fig. 4).
-Test selector switch set to O.

-Disengage pitch channel.
.
4.1.4
-Relevant pushbutton light

(Fig. 1) illuminates:
ON
appears.
-TRIM caution light (Fig. 4)
illuminates with 2-second
time delay, then alternate
nose-up displacement of cyclic
stick with TRIM light (Fig. 4)
blinking.
-P pushbutton light
extinguishes.
(Fig. 1)
Roll trim test

-Roll
-Test
channel engaged.
selector switch set to TRIll.
-Same as pitch trim test above

with alternate displacement
of cyclic stick to the left.
-Test selector switch set to O.

-Disengage roll channel.
~
.DGAC
: DO NOT OPERATETHE AUTOPILOT IF THE TRIM LIGHT DOES NOT

ILLUMINATE OR REMAINS ON STEADY DURING THE TEST.
APproved:
I A 1 C I FIG
35082
SUP.16
95-41
Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.2
AutODilot enoaoement before take-off

-Engage the three autopilot
-Test selector
(Fig. 4).
channels
switch set to 0
-Check that the channels are

engaged. P, R, Y , MONIT
pushbutton lights illuminate:
ON is visible (Fig. 1).
-Test light extinguishes (item
4, Fig. 4).
WARNING: DO NOT AllOW THE AIRCRAFT TO

-REMAIN
ON THE GROUNDWITH TH
AP ENGAGEDAS THE TRIM
ACTUATORSMAY UNWIND, THUS
CAUSING THE STICK TO MOVE
AGAINST THE STOP.
4.3
ODeratino the autooilot
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
in flioht
Basic modes (P, R, Y, T/C)

Pitch and roll
-Hands off the stick.
-Artificial
loads released.
-Overriding
the artificial
loads
-Through
4.3.1.2
the 4-way button.
-Autopilot
holds attitudes.
-Autopilot
operates as a damper.
-Trim actuators are inhibited.
The actuators counteract
within the limits of their
authority.
-Deviation
in the direction of
operation of the attitude
references.
Yaw
-Feet
~
off
the pedals
: Collective
pitch/yaw
coupling is efficient
when some friction
is
applied to the pedals.
It is therefore
recomnendedto apply
friction.
NOTE2 : Whenthe RH rudder

-pedal
is near the stop
(e.g. high lH cross
wind) moving the
collective
pitch lever
fully upward requires a
greater effort than the
usual value due to sprin
rod.
-Channel holds "present

heading" within the limits of
its authority.
Operating the
pedals causes the heading
reference to be altered. The
pilot must bring the aircraft
to the desired heading
(angular speed less than 1.5'/
sec.) then remove his feet
from pedals so that the yaw
channel can hold the new
heading.
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I FIG I
350B2
SUP.16.
95-41
Page 10
.-
.
~
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
4.3.1.3
Coordinated turns
(T/C)
Whenairspeed is above 50 kt (92 krn/h -57 mph), the pilot can

alter headin9 by flying the aircraft to a bank angle above 7.. The
yaw channel then coordinates the turn.
4.3.2
Additional
4.3.2.1
modes (HOG,ALT, A/S)
Selected heading (HDG)

This mode may be operated when the airspeed is above 50 kt
(92 krn/h -57 ~h).
When this mode is engaged, the autopilot captures and holds the
heading
referenceselected
is the nil).
on the The
H5I yaw
via channel
the roll provides
channelcoordination.
(the roll attitude
.
4.3.2.2
Altitude
(ALT)
This mode may be operated when the airspeed is above 60 knots

(111 krn/h -69 mph).
When this mode is engaged, the autopilot
altitude
throu9h the pitch channel.
!illi
4.3.2.3
holds the engagement
: It is recommendedto engage this mode only when verticalI

speed is lower than 100Dft/min.I
Airspeed (A/S)
This mode may be operated when the airspeed is above 50 kt
(92 krn/h -57 mph).
Whenthis mode is engaged, the autopilot
airspeed through the pitch channel.
4.4
After
1andinQ
Disengage the autopilot
.5
holds the engagement
via the cyclic
stick pushbutton.
PERFORMANCE
Not affected.
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I FIG
35082
SUP.16
95-41
Page 11
.-
FLIGHTMANUAL
1F1~~~iF MIA~llJJlAl
/A$
~~[1))
1:m2
.$l1JJf~ll.rElMrE~'ir
EMERGENCY
FLOATATION
GEAR
per drawings:
350 A 82.8041.02
350 A 82.8042.00
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The information contained herein supplementsor

supersedes the information given in the basIc FlIght
The effective
of the Supplement at the latest revIsion
~~==_n//
O16.-ospar~
~=~IVISION
.DGAC
Approved:
[]
SOCIETENATIONALEINDUSTAIELLE
HELICOPTERES -DIRECTION
SUPPORTCLIENTS -B.P.176
350n2
-13723
-MAAIGNA/
FRANCE
SUP .17 .P1

89-17
Page1
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
PAGEINTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
.
DGAC
Approved:
[I]
350
B2
SUP.17.P1 .
89-17 Page
2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.CUSTOMIZATION
AlC:
350 B2
-SIN:
PAGES
SECTION
..
DATECODE
SECTION
PAGE
DAT~ CODE
THIS AIRCRAFTDOESNOTOFFERANYPARTICULARFEATURES
ON
GREENPAGES.
LIST OF TI LATEST~
~~
REVISIaIIS
No
PAGE
Date
JIh
Date
~
REVISIOO, 0
~
APPROVED
DATE
89-17
...,""
DGACApproved:
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.17.P1
Page3
FlIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONAL
REVISIONS(RC)
This manual assigned
to the helicopter
mentioned on the
contains
the following
p1nk pages except those cancelled
conditions
are ccxnplied with.
title
page,
when the
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL
FOR ANY INFORMATION
WITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
.Section
Page
Date
Appl icable before condition
is met:
.
NOTE: The date
-followed
.DGAC
Approved:
[J
---
1s coded and consists

of the last
week in this
two figures
year.
350 B2
of the
SUP
89-17
year
.17
.P3
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Manual contains the following
No
..
SECTION -PAGE
additional
CODE
DATE
No
yellow pageCs) :
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
.
.DGAC
Approved:
[f]
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.17
.P4
Page 1
..~
flIGHT
MANU
.LIST
OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVE
PAGES
(1)
Evolut1on
page code
-R : Revised.
to be replaced
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
(1
I~~j
17. 0
P1 1
89-17
R',
-i
17.0
17. 0
17.0
17.0
17. 0
P1
P1
P3
P4
P5
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
N
N
N
N
N
2
3
1
1
1/1
801M
17. 0
89-17
17.0
89-17
17. 0
89-17
LISTa' n LATEST
~
~
REVISI~
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
(1
f'mw. REVISI~ : 0
~C ~
DATE
Date
Date
89-17
...,""~
.DGAC
Approved:
m
35082
SUP .17 .P5

89-17
Page 1
MO1M
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
The emergency floatation

if necessary.
gear allows the helicopter
The installation
is designed to allow the aircraft
or prepared hard ground with floats inflated.
The emergency floatation
.
.
to alight
on water.
to land on an airstrip
gear comprises:
-two skid assemblies

-two parallel
float assemblies. one on either side of the helicopter
-a float inflation
system including two cylinders
-an electrical
control system.
I
2
LIMITATIONS
All limitations
specified in the basic Manual remain applicable,
independently of the following:
-Floats
stowed, system not armed
.no special limitations
-Floats
stowed, system armed or floatation
.maximum I.A.S.
in powered flight:
135 kt
(250
gear inflated
km/h)
maximumI.A.S.
at less than 40 ~ torque:
100 kt (185 km/h)

-Maximum
altitude
for
float
inflation:
6600 ft
(2000
m)
-When flying over water at an altitude

below 400 ft (122 m) the
floatation
gear system must be armed.
-Minimum weight:
when the O.A. T. is lower than O'C. the minimun weight
must remain greater than 1480 kg (3263 lb), in order to canplywith
the min. rotor r.p.m. upon engine failure.
.DGAC
Approved:
m
350 82
SUP
89-17
.17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
In the event of engine failure

r.p.m. and apply the following
or other need for

procedure:
-Arm the emergency floatation
gear firing
-Fire
80
the float
kt
-148
inflation
cartridges
ditching,
check rotor
system
(RecoovnendedmaximlJn firing
speed
km/h)
-Ccxnplete the autorotation procedure as described in the basic Manual.

Alight broadside-on to the sea; avoid ramming of the nose of the floats
on touch-down.
NOTE: Inflation
-by
20
IMPORTANT
rpm
NOTE:
of emergency floatation
in
autorotation
WHEN
gear reduces the rotor
speed
descent.
THE
HELICOPTER
IS
AFLOAT,
THE
FORWARD
DOORS
MUST
BE OPENED
BY ACTUATING
THE JETTISONCONTROL.
4 NORMAL
PROCEDURES
Normal procedures specified in the basic Manual remain applicable,
independently of the following:
-External
checks:
.Float covers properly laced

.Correct
cylinder pressure
Limit
pressure values are given by the following
TEMPERATURE
C'
FAHRENHEIT
DEGREE
table:
-10
20
30
-50
68
86
40
104
50
122
PRESSIONMAXI BARS 256

MAX
PRESSURE
PSI
371
PRESSIONMINI BARS 2
HIN PRESSURE
PSI
3
OOTE: A placard
-pressure
located near the cylinders
.Float
elements locked down
-Arming
the emergency floatation
.Depress
[fJ
Approved:
the limit
gear
the FLOATARMING(ARM.FLOT.SEC)push-switch
.Check that both lights

SEC) push-switch.
DGAC
indicates
values.
illuninate
in the FLOATFIRING (PERCUTFLOT
350
B2
SUP
89-17
.17
Page
FLI GHT MANUAL
.5
PERFORMANCE
~~~ergency
floatation
data specified
performance
gear
in stowage
position
in SECTION5.1 remain applicable
which
is reduced
by 50 ft/mn
(15
the
except for
m/mn) at 55 kt
performance
climbing
lAS.
.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
350 82
SUP
89-17
--
.17
Page 3
~-
.a
FLIGHT MANUAL
~~
[F1L~~l}1]iF ~fi.\IMI1JJfi.\l
~~
~~ltlJ
1mt2
.:SrL!J(P>!F-'llE~[E~if.
ELECTRIC RESCUE HOIST

AIR EQUIPMENT OR BREEZE
per drawings,
350 A 82.8002
350 A 82-8003
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The information contained herein supplementsor

The effective
~~::==JJ/J
~~~I\lISION
.DGAC
Approved,
~
aG.-ospa:-,.-. SOCIETE NATIONALEINDUSTRIELLE

HEL.!COPTERES-OIRECTION
SUPPORTCL.IENTS -B.P.175
350 82
-13723
-HARIGNA/
FRANCE
SUP .18.P1
89-17
Page1
..
FUGHT MANUAl
[~~
The title
of the Supplement
Is replaced
by :
"BREEZE" or "AIR EQUIPEMENT"

136 kg (300 Ib) ELECTRIC HOIST
As per drawing:
35OA B2-8002
35OA 82-8003
.
I
DGACApproved:
IAI
IclDIEIFIGIHI
350B2
SUP.18.P1
96-22
.RR.
.,
Page
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
.
DGAC
Approved:
m
350
B2
SUP.18.P1 .
B9-17 Page
2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.CUSTOMIZATION
:
A/C,
350 B2
-SIN:
PAGES
SECTION
..
PAGE
DATECODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
THIS AIRCRAFTDOESNOTOFFERANYPARTICULAR
FEATURES
ON
GREEN
PAGES.
LIST Cf' 1} LATEST~

N'f'R(J./EDREVISI~
Na1MALREVISION: 0
DGACI'I'PROI,D
DATE
It)
Date
It)
Date
89-17
...,"""
.DGAC
Approved:
[IJ
350 82
SUP
89-17
.18.P1
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION

to the helicopter
mentioned
on the
contains
the following
conditions
are complied with.
title
page,
when the
CAUTION
CONCERNEDBELOW. THE READER WILL HAVE TO CHANGE THE NUMBEROF THE PINK
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
.Section
Page
Date
Applicable
before
condition
is met,
.
NOTE, The date
-followed
.DGAC
Approved:
[]

by the nunber of the
of the last
week in this
two figures
year.
350 B2
of
the
year
SUP .18.P3
89-17
Page1
.
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
RUSHREVISIONS(RR)

SUPPLEMENTS
R,R No.
SUP.16
.SUP.16
IA
PAGE
CODE
DATE
P4.1
96-22
PI.1
96-22,
SUPPLEMENTS
RR No.
PAGE
CODE
DATE
.
.
DGACAppraved:
IAI
350 82
IclDIEIFIGIHI
5UP.18.P4
96-22
---~--
Page I
"RR"
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Manual contains the following
No
SECTION -PAGE
additional
CODE
No
yellow pageCs) :
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
DATE
..
.
.DGAC
Approved:
[]
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.18.P4
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.LIST
OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVE
PAGES
(1)
Evolution page code

-R : Revised. to be replaced
SECTION
PAGE
18. 0
18.0
18. 0
18. 0
Pl
Pl
Pl
P3
18.
18.
18.
18.
18.
P4 1
P5 1/1
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
DATE (1
1
2
3
1
-01*
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
N
N
N
N
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
N
N
N
N
N
LIST OF THELATEST~
APPROVED
REVISIa-IS
~
Date
SECTION
PAGE
DATE (1
NOOMAL
REVISI~ : 0
DGAC1mIO\ID
Date
DATE
89-17
.:IN"
.DGAC
Approved:
[]
350 82
SUP
89-17
.18.P5
Page 1
-01*
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
The hoist installation

is designed to lower or haul on board people or
loads, while the aircraft
is hovering.
The aircraft
can be fitted with either of the two electric
BREEZEBL 15600 or AIR EQUIPEMENT
75370.
hoists:
The hoist Installation

comprises essentially:
-A pivoting jib (2) provided with a locking bolt (3), mounted on the
port side of the helicopter.
-An electrically
operated winch (1) fitted with:
.a 33.5-metre (110-ft)
cable in the case of the BREEZEhoist
.a 40-metre (130-ft)
cable in the case of the AIR EQUIPEMENT
hoist.
-A snap hook mounted on a pulley-block
tackle (5).
-An electrical
control system including:
.A cable release guarded switch on the pilot's
collective.
lever, which
is used to sever the cable In an emergency.
.A rocker switch (7) on the hoist operator's control grip, which is used
to raise, lower and stop the cable.
-Two cable guards (8) secured to the L.H. landing skid.
is protected by :
.a 100-Amp fuse provided in the electrical
master box
.a 50-Amp fuse (4) provided on the aft wall near the hoist operator's
grip support, Both these fuses power the hoist.
.two 2.5-Amp. fuses protecting the "emergency release" circuit
, a 2.5-Amp. fuse protecting the "up-down" circuit.
A cutter provided on the rear wall allows the hoist operator to sever the
cable, if necessary.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
~
350B2
SUP .18
89-17
Page1
-",,""
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
HOIST OPERATIONS
MUSTBE IN ACCORDANCE
WITH OPERATING
REGULATIONS
GOVERNING
THESEOPERATIONS.
The limitations
laid dowf1in the basic Flight Manual r~ain
full with the addition of the following specific points:
-Minim~
crew:
one pilot
applicable
in
and one hoist operator.
-Maxim~ load on the hoist cable:
136 kg (300 lb).
For the aircraft

equipped with the A.E Hoist, before embodiement of
modification
AMS1587, limit rigid compact loads to 80 kg (176 lb).
-Landing with a suspendedload of 136 kg (300 lb) is not pe':1nissib

le.
.
-Speed limitation
in forward flight
with hoist cable reeled in and no
load on :
.when aircraft
is fitted
with L.H. sliding door. is given in relevant
Suppl~ent.
.when L.H. door and sub-door are removed from aircraft
is
70 kt -81 MPH-130 kin/hr.
3
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES

incorporates a pyrotechnic cable cutter controlled
by a guarded pushbutton, located on the pilot's
collective
lever grip,
which permits the load to be released in an emergency.
In the event of a complete electrical
failure,
have the cable severed by
means of the mechanical cutter available to the hoist operator.
4 NORMAL
PROCEDURES
The L.H. door and sub-door must be removed if the aircraft
with the sliding door.
Make sure that both cable guards are present and firmly
The jib locking bolt and the hoist operator's
support must be installed before take-off.
control
is not fitted
secured.
grip complete with
The hoist must be controlled

by the hoist operator attached with safety
belt (5) and standing on left side of the cabin. A control grip stowed on
the aft wall and provided with an UP-DOWN

rocker switch (7) markedM/U-D
is available
to the operator.
For carrying
out a hoisting
operation:
-Stabilize
the aircraft
in hover above the hoisting site
-Ensure sufficient
power reserve is available that will permit moving off
in forward flight once the load is hoisted on board.
-Set the jib in hoisting position.
DGAC
Approved:
~
350 B2
~lJfJ .Jlfl
89-17
Page2
FLIGHT MANUAL
The hoist operator can now control the winch. To bring the load
into the cabin, unlock the jib and pivot it inwards.
The snap-hook can be used to hold the load while the hoist
unhooked.
Do not moveoff
in forward flight
until
cable is being
the load is hoisted on board.
With -Air Equipment- hoist, when rigid compact loads (over 80 kg -176 lb
post mod AMS1587) are being hoisted inconsequential oscillations
may
appear. Operate the hoist.
OOTE1 : AIR EQUIPEMENT
hoist
Overheating of the winch motor must be avoided. Consequently
never exceed 6 consecutive hoisting operations plus one
descent with maximlJn load, and maximLlncable reel-l!t
or equivalent.
OOTE2 : BREEZEhoist
After each operation of the winch (lowering
seconds. After three complete cycles (first
load, the following two lowerings with no
raisings at full
load) it is recommendedto
forty minutes.
5
or raising) wait 30
lowering with maximLln
load; plus three
stop the winch for
PERFORMANCE
With hoist
applicable.
jib folded.
the performance data laid down in Section 5.1 remain
.;;
.DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
[J
SUP
89-17
--
.18
Page 3
--l
FLIGHT MANUAL
.95
Ifl~~~'ir
/A$
MIM~lAl
~~!I))
1m2
.$llJJlFfl[EI);i][E~if.
FORWARD
TWO-PLACE
SEAT
As per drawings:
350A 82.2046.
350A 82.2047.
or
350A 82.2128.
350A 82.2129.
350A 82.2046.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The information contained herein supplements or
~~::==:...u//
~~IVISION
.DGAC
Approved:
m
OJ6.-ospa:'..a. SOCIETENATIONALEINDUSTRIELLE
HELICOPTERES-OIRECTION
SUPPORTCLIENTS -B.P.175
350B2
-1:372:3 -HARIGNA/
~lJfJ .~
89-17
FRANCE
.fJ1l
Page1
FLIGHT
MANUAL
.
PAGEINTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
.
DGAC
Approved:
[J
350
B2
SUP.21.P1 .
89-17
Page2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.CUSTOMIZATION
:
A/C:
350 B2
-SIN:
PAGES
SECTION
..
PAGE
DATE CODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
THIS AIRCRAFT DOES rlKJTOFFER ANY PARTICULAR FEATURES

REQUIRING THE CUSTOMIZATION OF THE FLIGHT MANUALON
GREEN PAGES.
LIST Cf' TfE LATESTt-mI-'AL

~
REVISI~
No
Date
89-17
No
~
REVISI~ : 0
OOACAPPROVED
DATE
Date
...I~N
.DGAC
Appr-oved:
[IJ
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.21.P1
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONAL REVISIONS CRC)

to the helicopter
mentioned on the
contains
the following
conditions
are complied with.
title
page,
when the
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL
REVISIONCRN) MODIFIESTHE PAGENUMBER
FOR ANY INFORMATION
WITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
.Section
Page
Date
Applicable
before condition
is met :
.
NOTE: The date
-followed
.DGAC
Approved:
~

of the last
week in this
two figures
year.
350 B2
of
SUP
89-17
the
year
.21.P3
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Manual contains
No
the following
SECTION -PAGE
addit1onal
CODE
DATE
No
yellow page(s) :
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
..
.
.DGAC
Approved:
[]
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.21.P4
Page 1
I
FLIGHT MANUAL
.LIST
OF APPROVED
EFFECTIVE
PAGES
(1)
Evolution
page code
-R : Revised.
to be replaced
-N : New. to be inserted
SECTION
21.
21.
0
0
PAGE
89-17
89-17
N
N
P1
3
P3 1
89-17
89-17
N
N
21.
21.
21.
21.
P4
P5
1
2
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
N
N
N
N
1
2
(1
21.
0
21.0
0
0
0
0
P1
P1
DATE
1
1/1
-01-
LIST a= n-E LATEST~MAL

APPROIID
REVISI~
~
0
Oate
Date
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
(1
f'm.tI!L fEVISI~ : 0
~
ri'ffIOVED
DATE:
89-17
L'INGE
.DGAC
Approved:
~
350 82
SUP .21.P5
89-17
Page1
-01-
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
This Supplement applies to the aircraft

equipped with the two-place seat.
When it is mounted in lieu of the copilot's
seat the aircraft
can carry
seven persons.
2
LIMITATIONS
All the limitations

specified in Section 2 remain applicable
exception of the following specific
limitations:
-The maximumnumber of persons carried
pilot),
with the
is increased to seven (including
-The total weight of the two passengers on the forward two-place seat
shall not exceed 154 Kg (339 lb).
-The optional dual controls
forward two-place seat.
3
be removed in order to install
the
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
All the emergency
applicable.
shall
procedures
specified
in the
basic
Flight
Manual remain
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
The normal procedures given in the basic Flight Manual remain applicable.
Special attention shall be paid to c.g. determination.
CAUTION: C.G. LIMITS AT EMPTYWEIGHTARE TO BE RE-DETERMINED
IN
-ACCORDANCE
WITH THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED
IN THE MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.WORKCARDNo. 25.22.20.401.
NOTE: Flying with one pilot.

then with 7 persons on board present very
-significant
differences
in c.g. limits.
It is imperative that this
be checked in every configuration.
.DGAC
Approved:
m
350 B2
~LJf3 .~Jl
89-17
Page 1
~-
FLIGHT MANUAL
lJetermination
ofC.G.
limits
Forward two-place seat
350 A 82.2128
350A82.2047
350A 82.2129
Weight
10.1 kg -22.27
Moment
17.2mkg-1490 inlb
Front passenger distance,
kg
m.kg
lb
in.lb
5
350 A 82.2046
50
85
60
102
70
119
1.70 m -66.93
80
136
lb.
11.4 kg -25.22
lb
19.4mkg-1688 inlb
in.
90 100 110 120 130 140 150

153
170
187
204
221
238
255
100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325
6693 8366 10039 11712
13386 15059 16732 18405 20079 21752
PERFORMANCE
The approved performance data given in the basic Flight
relevant Supplements remain applicable.
IJGAC
Approved,
~
35082
Manual and
.
SUP .21 .
89-17 Page2
-.eurocopter
FLIGHT
MANUAL
8
FLIG HT MAN UAL
AS
8
350
82
SUPPLEMENT
FUEL HEATING SYSTEM

Optional:
OP 1760
350 A 82.5067.00
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The informetion
contained
herein supplements
or supersedes
the information
given
in the basic flight manual and/or applicable
The effectivity
of the supplement
at the latest revision is specified
on the list of
Effective Pages.
This
supplement
supports
the
helicopters
end EUROCOPTER FRANCE.

Revisions
to this
same
procedures
THIS SUPPLEMENT
supplement
are made
es AEROSPATIALE.
MUST BE INCLUDED
delivered
by both
by EUROCOPTER
j~EROSPATIALE
FRANCE
using
the
IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE

8
-:::;~:;:=::'.gd
~~--~
DGACApproved:
IAlclDIEIFIGIHI
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Etabllssement de Marlgnane
Direction Technique Support -t3725
Marlgnane Cede" -France
350 82
SUP.23.P1
89-17
Pagel
FLIGHT MANUAL
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I DIE I FIG I HI
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.23.P1
Page2I
FLIGHT MANUAL
CUSTOMIZATION
:
~
A/C : AS 35082 -SIN
PAGES
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
THIS AIRCRAFTDOESNOTOFFERANY PARTICULARFEATURES

OF THE FLIGHT MANUALON
GREENPAGES.
8
APPROVEDREVISIONS
No
0
Date
No
Date
NORMALREVISION: 0
DGACAPPROVED
DATE: 26 0
89-17
.
L'1_au.
DGAC
Approved:
I A I C I DIE I FIG I HI
350 82
SUP
89-17
.23.P1
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION

mentioned on the title
page,
contains
the following
when the
conditions
are complied with.
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL REVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGE NUMBERFOR ANY INFORMATION
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE
PARAGRAPHCONCERNED.
Section
Page
Date
Applicable
before
condition
;s
met :
: The date
followed
;s coded and consists

of the last
by the number of the week in this
DGACApproved:
I A I C I DIE
I F I C;I H I
two figures
year.
350 B2
of the
year
SUP.23.P3
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Manual contains
No
the
SECTION -PAGE
following
additional
CODE
DATE
No
yellow
page(s)
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
8
DGACApproved:
IA 1 C 10 1 E IF 1 G I H 1
350 82
SUP
89-17
.23.P4
Page 1
..
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVEDEFFECTIVE PAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Page Revision
Code
-R : Revised,
to be replaced
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
SUP.23
PI
PI
PI
P3
P4
P5
DATE
1
2
3
1
1
1/01
1
2
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
(1)
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
DATE
(1)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
8
APPROVED REVISIONS
No
Date
89-17
No
NORMAL REVISION:
DGAC APPROVED
Date
DATE:26 0
L'1N88N'.UR
.
DGAC Approved:
350 82
SUP
89-17
.23.P5
Page1
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
GENERAL
~
,..,
The fuel warm-up installation

allows
the fuel to
temperature
between +5.( and +50.(,
thus avoiding
be kept at a
the use of anti-ice
additives.
The fuel is wanmed up by the engine oil circulating
through a heat
exchanger before
it returns
to the oil tank.
The fuel temperature
is
monitored
by a regulating
system. An indicator
light
illuminates
when
the operating
temperature
range is exceeded.
10
'
CIRCUIT
CARBURANT
FUELSYSTEM
.--HEAT
CIRCUIT HUILE ECHANGEUR TEMPERATURE

EXCHANGER OIL SYSTEM
.;
~
0
~
CIRCUIT HUILE MOTEUR

ENGINE OIL SYSTEM
OIL SYSTEM
10i1
tank
2 Thenma1 valve
3 Oil coolers
4 Thenma1 switches
5 Indicator
light
I
6 Fueltank
DGA( Approved:
I A I (I
DIE
I FIG
FUEL SYSTEM
7 Booster pumps
8 Oil/Fuel
heat exchanger
9 Thermal capsule
(fuel
temperature)
10 Heat exchanger by pass-valve
350 82
I HI
SUP.23I
89-17
Page 1
.,.
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIMITATIONS
The limitations
specified in Section 2 of the basic Flight
applicable
except for the limitations
mentioned below:
Manual remain
$
'fI1
-With one booster pump inoperative:

.limitations
are the same as for the basic aircraft.
-With two booster pumps inoperative:
maximumaltitude
with F34, F35, JET A, F42, or F44 fuel:
5000 ft
(1524 m)
.maximum altitude
with F40 or JET B fuel:
2000 ft (609 m)
-Anti-icing
additive is not required.
-The
use of emergency fuels
is limited
to temperatures of +10'C or less.
3 EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
-Illumination
of the fuel temperature amber light (FUEL T') if temperature
is less than +5'C or greater than +50'C :
In flight
avoid sudden power variations
and monitor the filter
pre-clogging
indicator light in cold weather.
4
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified
applicable.
~
~
in the basic Flight
Manual remain
PERFORMANCEDATA
The perfonmance data specified

applicable.
in the basic Flight
Manual remain
8
DGAC Approved:
I A I C I DI ElF
350 B2
I GI~J
SUP
89-17
.23I
Page 2
---I
FLIGHT MANUAL
.G
eurocopter
FLIGHT
MANUAL
AS 350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
PROTECTION
OF THE AIR INTAKE
AGAINST INDUCTION OF SNOW
Optional:
IMPORTANT
OP 2561
NOTE

The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is specified on the List of
Effective Pages.
..
This supplement
supports
the helicopters
delivered
by both AEROSPATIALE
and EUROCOPTER FRANCE.

are made
same procedures
as AEROSPATIALE.
by EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
using
THIS SUPPLEMENT
MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN
EQUIPMENT
MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.
-~::=::.w
~-=t([
.DGAC
EUROCOPTER
FRANCE
Etablissement
Direction Technique Support -1372S
Approved:
I A I 8 I CI D I
the
THE
de Marignane
Marignane Codex -France
35082
SUP .25.P1
93-09
Page 1
,;,;,
,;~ ,,
.:;;"
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES
(1)
Evolution
-R
-N
: Revised, to be replaced
: New, to be inserted
SUPPLEMENT
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
SUP.25
DOT CERTIFICATION
page code
P1
P5
PAGE
DATE
1
1/01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
93-09
.DGAC
Date
93-09
Approved:
m
No
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
DATE
(1)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

APPROVED REVISIONS
No
(1)
NORMAL REVISION:
DGAC APPROVED
Date
DATE:
26)UIL.
35082
0
1993
SUP.25.P5
93-09
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1~
This installation
is designed to protect the air
potential
induction of snow in flight,
in falling
intake against
snow.
any
The snow protection

device is fitted
on the engine air intake and below
the ice protection
screen. It is composed of vortex generator tubes
through which the ambient air flows before being forced towards the
engine air intake.
2
LIMITATIONS
The limitations
laid down in the basic Flight Manual remain applicable,
with the exception of the flight
envelope restrictions
in case of falling
snow which are cancelled.
.
3
EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
The Emergency Procedures specified
applicable.
in the basic
Flight
Manual remain
NORMALPROCEDURES
The Normal Procedures specified
in the basic Flight Manual remain
applicable,
but are completed by the following
procedures:
EXTERNALCHECKS
-Engine
air
intake:
.remove
snow or ice from the air intake grid,
.open the engine cowling,
.check
for snow, ice or water in the air intake,
the snow protection
device.
and particularly
under
ENGINE CONDITIONCHECK
.Use
the power check chart

The procedures for
remain applicable.
.DGAC
Approved:
I A I BI CI DI
of the following
page (Figure
checks on ground and in flight,
1).
given in Section
350 B2
4,
SUP.25
93-09
Page 1
c-FLIGHT MANUAL
,.::
:'::'::~.-:::,::
'::' .
30
.~W
'
.;
':
10
x
...
III
.:
~
-10
-30
-20
(FTX100)
(MX100J
100
.0
.;
.,
III
..0
...
.;
50
f
,;
..
400
; 390'
,t,./.,,)
..~
.Z
.,
0
:>
380
CWPLE
Figure
1 :
Engine
DGAC
Approved:
IA I 8 I C I DI
TORQuE'
Power Check with

Protection
Device
X )
Air
Intake
35082 SUP.25
.
93-09
Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
.5
PERFORMANCE
The Perfomance Data specified
in Section 5.1 of the basic Flight Manual are
unaffected.
with the exception of the following
specific
performance data:
FLIGHT CONFIGURATION
I.G.E.
HEATING AND
HEATINGAND/ORDEMISTING
DEMISTING SYSTEMS
SYSTEMSOPERATING
OFF
hover
Figure
O.G.E. hover
Figure
Figure
.Rate-of-climb
Figure 2 minus 60 kg
(130 lb)
Figure 3 minus 60 kg
(130 lb)
Figure 5
.
.DGAC
APproved:
I AI 8 I CI D I
35082
SUP .25
93-09
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
6000.,~
20000
~ 18000
++-++
~ 16000
H.fII-
~
~
~t
.~
5000 5
:)f-
C/)
C/)
f-
-J
a 14000
U!
Ck:
~
~
~
C/)
:..
:)
4000
,:)
(/) 12000
U!
~
...l-
!l-
II:
a:
aU!
c
f-
1'-J
10000
11.i
CI
3000
8000
2000
6000
4000
1000
0
0
2000
! -10~0 if Ii 11
1500
~010~ ..~510~
.,
~OOO '
2000
22)0 (kg)
, ~5100 ' , 5~IOO (' 1~)'
MASSEWEIGHT
-:05.
2500
I
Figure 2
CONDITIONS
-Height:
-Heating
5 ft
-1.5
and demisting
Tr~
systems off
DGAC
Approved:
~::
..n.=n
n~nrnn
r~
IGE HOVERPERFORMANCE
I
350
82
SUP
.25.l
93-09
Page
4
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
20000
6000
~ 18000
~
~
~-
~ 16000
5000
.00
+...
I-
00
.l1J
-J
<I 14000
II:
.~.
l1J
n.
.l1J
II:
~
'4000
0
~
00
I-
00
UJ 12000
a:
n.
I-
-J
<I
"0
10000
3000
"
8000
2000
6000
4000
0
0 2000
.~
-10:000
Iii
1500
3010~
..3510~
2000
0
0 ~OIOO
~510~
MASSEWEIGHT
Figure
1000
-~05
2250
0 5b'oo
(kg)
2500
0 (lob;
~
3
CONDITIONS
-No
wind
-Heating
.DGAC
and demist;ng
Approved:
I A I 8 I CI D I
systems
off
"'"~ .."."'"
"~n~""
r~
OGE HOVER PERFORMANCE
350 82
SUP
93-09
I
I
.25
Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
31
33
~
f38
~o
10<
,I
j"l
f.cz
,I r1/
f.co
.-
..I~
"'i'
fo48
~.
,I
it;
I:;
~ ;)' l/
0
62
'I
"
e.
...'",
60
:; ,
' , 1001
1/
I
I;
,'..
rJl ,",'
'I
"
l/
..J
~
~
! i
/,
;..
J;
II
.;
' .!
,.
i ;
II
...'-..
.."
,'J ,
.: .
go!;
.;
~
s
.
i
:/
-co -30 -20 -10
! ;
10 20 30 40 50 60 1500
TEIf'.EXT. I O.A.T. loCI
2000
2500
2500
HASSE
CORRIE' ~CTED ~[GlT
Figure 4
NOTE:
CORRECTED
WEIGHTTO
-DETERMINE
Weight limitation
with internal
load:
2250 kg (4961lb)
DGAC Approved:
I A I B I CI DI
RATES OF CLIMB
(On Figure opposite)
350 B2
SUP.25
93-09
.
Page 6
i;,.
! ~;"
FLIGHT
MANUAL
...,..,..,..
...f..!
.j-.j..
.T.tf..f..
" , ,,
.,
..."
, "
-..:..:
:
",','
'.'
..'
.:..
';
"
.,
:
,
,
t.t..f..l..
, ,
"',
.", .,.,
.,-.,- '. .:-
;:
.l..1.;..j...~-~..-1-.
i
,
;
,
::
"
: : ::
.,..j. .~..(..1.-l--
::::
",.
::
"
:
,."
::::
::
::::
.-I.}
..t.:
, .j-.j.
"
, -1.-1.
.,
.I
;:;:
.",
,','
,..'
".,
10 20 30
TEl'. EXT. IO.A.T.
40 50 60
...j--j-.
.1.-1.-1.-1..
"
",'
-to.t.
-40-30-20-10
.1..t..:..1..
0
500
('C)
1~
VI~
Figure
1500
2(XX)
ASC. I RllJEa:a.I/6
2500
Ift/nn)
CONDITIONS
-Max.
-IAS
.DGAC
continuous
55
kt
-102
Approved:
I A I B I CI DI
power
rating
km/hr
n.~
n~ r'TUD
RATE
OF
350 B2
CLIMB
SUP.25
93-09
Page 7
-'8
eurocopter
FLI~MANU
FLIGHT
AS
MANUAL
350
82
.SUPPLEMENT
LONG AND SHORT FOOTSTEPS
LONG D.350-591-111-a
SHORTD.350-591-113
.IMPORTANT
NOTE
The information
contained
in the basic flight manual
herein supplements
and/or supplements
The effectivity
of the supplement
Effective Pages.
at the latest
or supersedes
the information
listed in supplement
O.
revision
is specified
on the
given
List of
THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE

:~:=:::.J!l
.~::r:--=-q
--:-
EUROCOPTER
Direction
Technique
Support
Aeroport international Marsailie-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex -France
DGACApproved:
I AIc IDI FI HI
350 82
SUP.28.P1
99-21
Page 1
.FLIGHT
MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVEDEFFECTIVE PAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION
(1)
Page Revision
Code
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
.
.
.
SUP.28
SUP.28
SUP.28
P1
PS
1
1/01
1
DATE
99-21
99~21
99-21

APPROVED REVISIONS
No
Date
No
Date
SUPPLEMENT PAGE
DATE (1)
N
N
N
NORMAL REVISION 0
DGAC APPROVED
DATE: 14 JUIN 1999
~~lR;t!t
99-21
OGAC
APproved:
w
(1)
350 82
SUP
99-21
.28.P5
Page1
...
FLIGHT MANUAL
1
.
GENERAL
The long
footstep
cabin
access
and
(PIN D.350-591-111-a)
on the
inspection
of the transmission
high landing
platform.
gear
faci1ates
The short footstep (PIN D.350-591-113) on the high landing gear

faci1ates cabin afcess.
2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations
specified in the basic Flight
Supplements remain applicable.
3
.
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
The
emergency
Supplements
Manual and relevant
procedures
remain
specified
in
the
basic
Flight
and
relevant
NORMALPROCEDURES
The normal procedures given in the basic Flight

5
Manual
applicable.
Manual and relevant
PERFORMANCE
Performance data given in the basic Flight Manual and relevant Supplements
remain applicable but are completed by the following procedures:
-Rate
of climb:
reduce
by 2,5 %.
.
.N
DGACApproved:
I A I C I D I FI HI
35082
SUP.28!
99-21
L~
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
~~~
~t1Q\r;
aeroSPa!ja!e
~g~e
~,
I?IbO@
OO'V
~/!~ ~ /j\11
!A~ ~~@ @~
.~1P~@OlAlb
~!1JJIPIPl6~~~~V
FERRYFLIGHT FUEL TANK
per drawings:
3S0A 82.2005
3S0A 8202036
IMPORTANTNOTE
The infonnation contained herein supplementsor

supersedes the infonnation
given in the basic Flight
Manual and/or applicable
Flight Manual supplements.
The effective
specified on SUP.SCoPSPage 1
-~::;:=::'...n;7
~~
.DGAC
SOCIETE
NATIONALE
INDUSTRIELLE
-
DIVISION HELJCOPTERES-DIREC"nON SUPPORT CUENTS -BP 176 -13723 -MARlGNANE FRANCE
Approved:
CD
-aerospatide
350 82
SUP
89-17
.50.P1
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
8
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
BLANK
DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
SUP.so.P18
89-17
LEFT
--
Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
CUSTOMIZATION
:
A/C:
350 B2
-SIN:
LIST OF AODmONAL APPROVED

PAGES
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATECODE
THIS AIRCRAFT DOESNOTOFFERANY PARTICULARFEATURES
..
OF THE FLIGHT MANUALON
GREEN
PAGES.

APPROVEDREVISIONS
No
Date
89-17
No
NORMAL REVISION: 0
DGACAPPROVED
Date
DATE: 260
L'.DGAC
Approved:
350 B2
SUP
89-17
.50.P1
Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
OF CONDITIONAL
COMPosmON
REVISIONS (RC)

mentioned on the title
page,
contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the
conditions
are complied with.
~
IF A NORMALREVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGENUMBER
FOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNED
BELOW,THE READERWILL HAVETO CHANGE
THE NUMBER
OF THE PINK
PAGEBY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATIONREMAINSIN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE
PARAGRAPH
CONCERNED.
.Section
Page Date
Appl icable before conditian is met :
.
NOTE: The date is coded and consists of the last two figures
-followed
by the number of the week in this year.
.DGAC
Approved:
W
35082
of the year
SUP.50.P3
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
OF RUSH
COMPOSITION
REVISIONS (RR)
The Manual contains
No
the following
SECTION -PAGE
additional
CODE
No
yellow
page(s) :
SECTION-PAGE
CODE
DATE
DATE
.'.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
W
35082
SUP.50.P4
89-17
Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
.LIST
OF APPROVED
EFFEmVE PAGES
(1) Evolution page code
SEmON
PAGE
50. 0
50. 0
50.0
50. 0
50.0
50.0
50. 0
50. 0
50. 0
Pi
Pi
Pi
P3
P4
P5
DATE
1
2
3
1
1
1/1*01*
1
2
3
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17

APPROVED REVISIONS
No
Date
89-17
No
(1)
SEmON
PAGE
(1)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NORMAL REVISION:
DGAC APPROVED
Date
DATE
DATE:
26
iflfOGENl.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 82
SUP.SO.PS
89-17
Page 1
*01*
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
GENERAL
~ge
of the helicopter
can be increased by installing
a special ferry
flight
tank transversally
in the rear cabin area.
The installation
consists essentially
of :
-A 475-litre
(125-US gal.) capacity removable tank. The unusable fuel
quantity
is negligible.
-A vent line
-A fuel transfer
line, with an isolating
valve. between the ferry fuel
tank and main fuel tank.
LIMITATIONS
niIS INSTALLATIONIS TO BE USEDONLYFOR FERRYFLIGHT WITH THE SPECIAL
PERMISSIONOF THE COMPETENT
AUTHORITIES.
The limitations
In addition:
laid
-Only
personnel
authorized
to
indispensable
to
fly
in the aircraft.
the
Manual remain applicable.
accomplishment
-Smoking is prohibited.
due to the presence of fuel
cabin.
-Maximum airing of the cabin is to be ensured.
of
the
mission
are
in the tank in the
The weight of fuel that can be carried in the ferry tank will depend on the
loading of the helicoPter
and can be determined by referring
to the C.G.
chart. bearing in mind that the forward c.g. limit on take-off with a full
main tank must not be exceeded.
.
.DGAC
Approved:
W
350 B2
SUP.50
89-17
Page1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
.
If a fuel leak should occur in the cabin:

-Land as soon as possible.
4
NORMALPROCEDUBES
Checks before
fillina
the tank
-Make sure that the ferry flight

tank is securely
-Check that the ferry tank vent line is correctly
-Close
the transfer valve.
Fillina
attached.
installed.
Drocedure
-Fill
the main fuel tank
-Fill
the ferry tank to the amount previously determined..
-Check C.G. location:
.Weight and moment of empty ferry tank are given in Section 6
.Fuel is located at 91.3 in. (2.32 m) from datum line.
In-fliaht
Drocedure
-Take off and fly with the transfer

valve closed.
-When the fuel gauge reads 80 %, open the transfer valve. The fuel level
in the two tanks is then equal if the quantity in the ferry tank is
approx 79.2 US gal. (3001.).
-If
there is a difference
in fuel level,
transfer will occur and balance
will be attained within ten minutes.
-When the fuel levels are balanced the quantity corresponding to the gauge
reading is :
Gauge
Reading
90
80
70
60
50
Litres
805
705
605
505
405
4030
305
20
205
105
~ USGal 212 186 159 133 107 80 54 27

M
EIMP
Gal 176 154 132 110 88 66 45 23
When the gauge reads 20 % the ferry tank is ~ty
and the quantity
remaining in the main tank is 27 US gal./23 Imp. gal./105 litres.
DGAC
APproved:
35082
-=
of fuel
l
Page
2
SUP.50.
FLIGHT MANUAL
...
When the
effective
transfer
valve is open itis
by making sure that
the fuel
important
to ensure that
gauge indicator
pointer
transfer
is
is moving
CAUTION: IF FUEL TRANSFERIS NOTOPERATIVE. LANDBEFORETHE FUEL GAUGE

READINGFALLS TO 60 %. FAILURE TO LANDABOVE60 % MAY RESULT~
CENTREOF GRAVITYMOVINGOUTSIDEALLOWABLE
LIMm.
5
PERFORMANCE
The approved performance data contained in Section 4 of the Flight
are not affected by the ferry flight
tank installation.
Manual
...
...
...DGAC
Approved:
w
350 B2
SUP
B9-17
.50
Page 3
=-~~:-
FLIGHT
MANUAI
~~I_'eurocopter
.I
FLIG HT MAN UAL
AS
350
.SPECIAL
82
SUPPLEMENT
ABSEILING INSTALLATION
Per drawing:
IMPORTANT
The information
contained
in the basic flight manual
THIS
SUPPLEMENT
EQUIPMENT
-:~;::::;::
<::~r::.-
JJI!
~
DGACApproved:
!nI]
I
MUST
MENTIONED
NOTE
herein supplements
and/or applicable
The effectivity
of the supplement
Effective Pages.
355P84.0080
at the latest
BE INCLUDED
ABOVE
EU
Aeroport
AO
or supersedes
the information
revision
IN THE
IS INSTALLED
CO
international
PTE
FLIGHT
on the
MANUAL
List of
WHEN
THE
ON THE AIRCRAFT.
Direction
Marseille-Provence
is specified
given
Technique
13725
350 B2
Marignane
Support
Cedex
SUP
99-37
-France
.56.P1
Page 1
.
FLIGHT
LIST
PAGES
DOT CERTIFICATION--(1)
Page Revision
-R
: Revised,
-N
: New, to
SUPPLEMENT
.
.
.
OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE
MANUAL
SUP.56
SUP.56
SUP.56
P1
P5
PAGE
DATE
1
1/01
1
99-37
99-37
99-37
ate
(1)
SUPPLEMENT
PAGE
DATE
(1)
N
N
N
LISTOF THE LATESTNORMAL

APPROVEDREVISIONS
D
N
D t
ae
NORMALREVISION: 0
DGACAPPROVED
DATE: 13 SEP.1999
""
,;;:;CE~..
ur
-",..;
99-37
DGAC
Approved:
[IJ
Code
to be replaced
be inserted
35082
SUP.56.P5
99-37
Page 1
.
.
.
FLIGHT MANUAL
GENERAL
This installation
allows trained
personnel to perform abseiling.
It consists
of two rings fixed to the cabin floor
in front
of the
passenger'S
for the lower rail
of each
sliding
door. seats and of a protection
'
LIMITATIONS
THE USE OF THIS TYPE OF INSTALLATION IS SUBJECTEDTO THE APPROVALOF
THE COMPETENTOPERATIONALAUTHORITIES.
The limitations
specified
in the basic Flight
Manual and relevant
Supplements
remain applicable;
however, they are completed or
modified
by the following
limitations:
-Abseiling
is limited
to hover flight.
After
completion
of the abseiling
operation,
transition
or landing
is prohibited
with the ropes unwound.
-The
load on the abseiling
A plate affixed
close to
forward
flight
installation
is limited
to 120 kg per ring.
each ring indicates
the maximum load.
EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
The Emergency Procedures
specified
to
in the basic
Flight
Manual and relevant
NORMALPROCEDURES
The normal Procedures
specified
in the basic Flight
Manual and relevant
Supplements
remain applicable;
however, they are completed by the
following:
-Before
takeoff,
determine
the weight and CG conditions
which will
prevail
during
the mission,
knowing that the load on the asbeil
ropes is located
at :
.2.24
m from the longitudinal
datum,
.1.09
m from the aircraft
centerline.
REGULATORYPERFORMANCE
DATA
The Regulatory
Performance
Data
specified
relevant
Supplements
remain
applicable.
in
the
basic
Flight
Manual
and
DGACApproved:
CAn]
350 B2
SUP
99-37
.56
Page 1I
..
, ,,~, ;-;#
~
FMS
D350-6
Page 1 of 4
~
DART AEROSPACE LTO
2071 Malaview Avenue

Sidney, ac. VaL 5N7
Canada
Tel: 604 656 2262
Fax: 604 656 2993
FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
Spacepoa
SIDE CARGO COMPARTMENT EXTENDERS
EUROCOPTER AS350/355 MODELS
This supplement must be attached to the approved flight manual when the listed equipment is
installed. The information contained herein supplements the information in the basic Helicopter
Flight Manual. For limitations. procedures and performance data not contained in this document,
.consult
the Helicopter Flight Manual.
.~
CAA APPROVED
Amendment A
Date: 95.09.25
COQYn9I" 1995 by CART AERaSP~CE
LTUI
r ~ ,;, ...FMS
D3S0Page 2 of 4
.LOG
OF AMENDMENTS
Rev.
No.
A
Pages
Revised
NEW
ISSUE
Revised By
and Date
B. Williams
95.09.25
d By
e
Inserted By
0;;2
.
.
CAA APPROVED
Date
Inserted
--~
::r~ , ;# -FMS
D350-60Q
Page 3 of 4
.SECTION
1 -GENERAL
NO CHANGE
SECTION
2 .LIMITATIONS
VFR FLIGHT ONLY

Flight under IFR is prohibited with the pods installed.
.INTERNAL
Maximum
GARGO LOADING
Load in the LH (Port) Hold:
3641b
(165 kg)
DECAL: (located inside door)
Maximum
Load in the RH (Stbd) Hold:
320 Ib (145 kg)
DECAL: (located inside door)
CAA PPROVED
Amendment:
95.09.25
r~';,~
FMS D350-600U
Page 4 of
.SECTION
3 .EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
NO CHANGE
SECTION
4 -NORMAL
PROCEDURES
DAILY INSPECTION (Preflight)

Check physical integrity and security of the Spacepod'"
SECTION
5 -REGULATORY
body and door.
PERFORMANCE
DATA
CLIMB
Climb perfon-nance will be reduced by up to 100 fpm when pods installed.
",,';I
't;JJ
9;]
CAA APPROVED
Amendment
95.09.25
FMS 0350-607
Page 1 of 4
DART AERO ACCESSORIES
INC
PO Box 23003
Victoria International Airport
Sidney, BC, Val 5N7, Canada
Tel: 6046562262
Fax: 604 656 2993
FLIGHT
MANUAL
EUROCOPTER
SUPPLEMENT
AS 350 MODELS
STA No. SH94-14
This supplement must be attached to the approved flight manual when the listed equipment is
installed. The information contained herein supplements the information in the basic Helicopter
Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance data not contained in this document,
consult the Helicopter Flight Manual.
COMPLIANCE
WITH SECTION 1, OPERATING
DOT APPROVED:
L.B. Samail
Regional Airworthiness
Pacific Region
LIMITATIONS
IS MANDATORY.
Engineer
Amendment:A ~
Date: May20th, 1994 Y\
Copynghl
1994 by DART AERO ACCESSORIES
INC
L.B.
FMS 0350-607
Page 2 of 4
LOG OF AMENDMENTS
Rev.
No.
A
Pages
Revised
None
Revised By
and Date
J.Bradley
May 16, 199
DOT APPROVED
Approved
By
and Date
Samail
May 20th, 1994
Inserted
By
Date
Inserted
1
SECTION
NORMAL
FMS 0350-607
Page 3 of 4
- LIMITATIONS
Vne
MAXIMUM
Vne
-124
KIAS
Autorotation Vne
MAXIMUM
AUTORATION
Vne
-100
KIAS
COMPATABILITY
He/i-Uti/ity-
Basketn.. is compatible with:

Approved Bearpaws
DART He/i-Access Stepsn..
Approved Mirror Assembly
DART Vertical Reference Widow
PLACARD:
(located on lid)
NOTE: THE BASKETS ARE LOCATED CENTRALLY AT:

LONGITUDINAL STATION:
LH LATERAL BL:
RH LATERAL BL:
BASKET EMPTY WEIGHT:
2 -
135
-48
+48
65
in
in
in
Ib
/
/
/
/
+3422 mm
-1222 mm
+1222 mm
29.5 kg
PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT
Ensure lid is closed and securely latched.
DAILY INSPECTION
Check physical integrity and security of the Heli-Utility-Basket'"
DOT APPROVED
Amendment:
A%
May 20, 1994
FMS 0350-607
Page 4 of 4
SECTION
3 -EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
NO CHANGE
SECTION
4 -
DATA
CRUISE
Vh reduced by up to 15 KIAS
CLIMB
Rate of climb may be reduced by up to 200 FPM
AUTO RATION
Rate of descent may be increased by up to 100 FPM
HOVER
No Change
DOT APPROVED
PERFORMANCE
Amendment:A of
May 20, 1994
..~.
'Ilnittd
,S'tatt5 of Imrrica
Bcperrmcnrof~raMporrerion-:.fcdcrul lnierionldmini.5rrarion
~upplementel~!!pe ():ertificete
3k~~~
I'~.d.a.tde.
-c
""~
J~'2k
Dart Aero AccessoriesInc.
P.O. Box 23003 CDO
Vicwria InternationalAirport
Sidney,British Columbia
Canada V8L SN7
~ -de-r
~'"
ro'te- j:.II.,..,.;,,?,/"~
SR00213NY
d-de-'/';",,a.(.;..-n.J,,d~k."",,
~.a4-l'uufA..,...Q7I/~./4--de-.a.v-.,y,.d';'~/H~,;,..."...",tJ-
,;:,!/f",..: 27
~1h..Federal Aviation
.~~..""'.
11 ./t.iZl .~,." /, -, ~
"t.~--(~"'~w",'-"
--::' ,...I! .A/
1:""':;,,""""
H9EU (AS-3S0Series),H11EU (AS3SSSeries)
..,/Ide-
EurocopterFrance
.-II:..kl:
AS-3S0B,AS-3S0B1,AS3S0B2,AS3S0BA,AS-3S0C,AS-3S0D,
AS-3S0Dl, AS3SSE,AS3SSF,AS3SSFI. AS3SSF2
("If.
,./"/(:I' ./"
/
.:r:~""'i'/""'7'
~:Yiu./ ~,y". ~":/"':
~. ..llationof Utility Basketin accordancewith Dart Aero Accessories,Inc., DrawingNo. D3S0-607,Rev. B, datedFebruary22
1994,
";;;",/,,1,;.,... " ",/ ~;"../'4;."... :

1. Dart Aero Accessories,Inc. MaintenanceManual SupplementMMS-D3S0-607,RevisionA, datedFebnlary22, 1994is
requiredwith this STC.
2. Dart Aero Accessories,Inc. Flight ManualSupplementFMS D350-607,AmendmentA, datedMay 20, 1994(AS-3S0 Series
Only) is requiredwith this STC.
.
.,/l,;,....."./-;1";..01.",
",/ /,,{...Ju/:/i""/"';Y"'/"I",,';;,;c/.
~ d...k.:J,/?".
'" ,u:f.-:"",af
.lu4j ,uk..t;',.,.,..,k,( ,... 4' t".,.",;,,-n~;'.,. ~Ie, .4,,-/h
.~~"",.
("'}'".,./"", ,('/4"":,,,;,/..,./
I'
/
Y"I,
,I ':1':1'"""/,;,,
':-I~,k'I ,;,""'~"u
,#,.,
..."141/ "...,;.,,,:",#..1 u,.,/d~1'-
;;.e-...1.!'a/~.ty.d..,.f/t/-",:",;,
May 18, 1994

August 8, 1994
c:,',
J'U~-"""'"
/ .
9'nu""...d""/:
.O-I);:Ydf';~?;:~::~::b'"
Irwin N. Brumer(Slgnatu,.)
Mgr. New York Aircraft
CertificationOffice-
'.
I""/"",, -I de
!:1~
,$(QttSof gJmia
:Bqlartrnrncof '"I:ransportation-;fclml g\1iation9dministration
~upplrntrntel "'QC~pt:
~crtifi(ett:
(~ontinuationcShf:f:t)
JI/~-m~
SROO213NY
Date of Issuance: August 8, 1994
Limitations and Conditions(continued):
3. Dart Aero Accessories, Inc. Flight Manual Supplement FMS D355-607, Amendment A, dated May 20, 1994 (AS-355 Series
Only) is required with this STC.
4
approval should not be incorporated in any aircraft of these specific models on which other approved modifications are
in.. ..."rated, unless it is determined that the interrelationship between this change and any of those previously incorporated
approved modifications will not introduce any adverse effect upon the airworthiness of the aircraft.
-END-
Any altiration of thi! clTtificati i! puni!habli by afine of not ixciiding 11,000, or impri!onmint not ixciiding~ 3 ,liar!, . or both.
FAA FORM 8"OoZ.\ (100&0)
This ,.,tificGII nk!' h, trGnsftn'ld in GC,.,dGn&,with FAR 2/.47.
PAGE2 OF 2PAGES
.~p
Itmt;i";iNT
W~RTApprnuQ
Numbr: SH94-14
This
approval
is issued
to:
Issue
Da-'"t Aero Accessories

Inc.
P.O. Box 23003 COO
Victoria
International
Airport
Sidney,
British
Columbia
Canada
vaL
Responsible
Region
Aircraft/Engine
Type
Canadian
Approval
Description
Type
Date:
May 20,
1994
Date:
May 20,
1994
Pacific
or Model:
Eurocopter
or Equivalent:
Design
~.stal.lation/O~erating
, iulred
Equipment
Data,
Limitations:
Issue
5N7
of Type
a,':
Approval
No.:
H-83
Change:
Draw'.:ng
(AS-350
Utility
The Utility
accordance
France
Series)
Basket
Basket
Installation
with
ror
sealed
No.
0350-607,
AS-350B/Bl/B2/BA/C/D/D1
AS-355E/F/F1/F2
& H-87
(AS-355
Series)
Installation
Dart
Revision
is
to be carried
Aero Accessories
B,
dated
February
out L'l
Inc.
22,
1994*.
R~red
1)
Dart
Suppl~'lt
1994.
E~~,"-,
Aero
Accessories
Inc .Maincenance
Manual
MMS-0350-607,
Revision
A, dated
February
22,
2)
AS-350
Series
~y:
ror Approved
copy of Dart Aero
Accessories
L'lc.
Flight
~~
Suppl~'lt
FMS 0350-607,
Revision
A, dated
May 20, 1994*.
3)
AS-3SS Series
~y:
ror Approved
copy of Dart Aero
Accessories
L'lc.
Flight
Manual Suppl~~t
FMS 0355-607,
Revision
A, dated
May 20, 1994*.
(*
or
later
approved
revisions)
Conditions:
This approval is only applicable to the type I model
of aeronautical product specified therein. Prior to incorporating this
modification,
it shall be established
that the interrelationship
between this change and any other modification(s) incorporated
will not adversely affect the airwo
On
e m difie
roduct.
Regi
For Minister
2e035'
"oe.,
"-
eer
of Transport
Cana d...
a
)ent by: eur.ter
06/19/.1.~:
/3
9058713599;
52AM;Je1ERA-#,178;a:.'
eurocoptercanada FLIGHT
AS 350/
MANUAL A$350 C, D. D1. B. 61, ~2, 83, BA .

AS355 E, F. F1, F2
AS 355 HELICOPTERS
WITH LH AND / OR RH CARGO PODS C.SQUIRREL CHEEKS") INSTALLED
This supplement shall be attached to the applicable approved EUROCOPTEA

AS 350 and AS 355 Flight Manuals, when the "SQUIRREL CHEEKS" are installed on the
aircraft in accordance with DOT STC No. ..~.~~7-;-).5. .S.~~7;-.6.o.
Section 2.3,4, and 5 of this document comprise the approved Flight Manual Supplement.
Compliance with Section 2. Certification limitations. is mandatory. Section 1 and 6 (if
applicable) of this document do not require D.O. T. approval bU1contain information which
may be of use to the pilot and therefore are included as "Manufacturer's Data"o
Department of Transport (Canada) Approved
Regional Airworthiness
Ontario Region
FMS-ECL-9
Engineer
3ent
by:
euro~ppter
9058713599;
eu rocopter
canada
GENERAL
06/19/a1O:52AM;JetFux
#178;.e
2/3
FLIGHT MANUAL AS350 C, D, D1, B, 81, 82, B.3, BA .

AS355 E, F, F1, F2
(unapproved)
The optional Cargo Pods rSQUIRREL

RH cargo compartments.
".
CHEEKS)" are an enlargement of the LH and I or
The volume of the normal baggage compartment with no cargo pods installed is 7.1 cubic
fee1 on the right side with the battery in the basic helicopter configuration, and 8.3 cubic
fee1 on the left side.
With installation of the Cargo Pods ('SQUIRREL CHEEKS") on each side, the baggage
compartmen1 volume is almost doubled (right side 14.1 cubic feet, left side 15.3 cubic feet).
With the Cargo Pods C'SQUIRREl CHEEKS") installed, the RH cargo compartment can
carry up to 175 kg (386 Ib), and the LH compartment can carry up to 195 kg (430 Ib). They
are constructed with ~ reinforced a.luminium floor with no lip at the door for easier loa.ding.
The Cargo pod floor and top can be stood upon by maintenance personnel.
The Cargo Pods have large doors that are hinged to open in the forward direction, with gas
struts 10 hold the door in the open position.
The doors i~corp9rate high quality door latches which are easy to operate.
Additional RH Cargo Pod volume and weight capacity can be achieved with the additional
installation of Optional Equipment ECL-6, Battery Re/oca1ion.
FMS-ECL-9
08/19/00
tent
by
10:53AMj]etF8X
#178;Page
313
eurocopter
eu roc8:,ter
FLIGHT
MANUAL
AS350
canada
C, D, D1, B, 81,
AS355
82,83,
8A.
E, F, F1, F2
LIMITATIONS
No change
3.
EMERGENCY
AND MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES
No change
4,
NORMAL PROCEDURES
No change
5,
PERFORMANCEDATA
The following performance data is equally applicable wi1h LH, RH or both Cargo Pods
ins1alled:
AS 350 C, D, 01,8,61,82,83,
a.
For hover IGE and OGE, use 1he standard performance charts in Section 5 of 'the
Flight Manual but reduce the resulting helicopter weight by 30 kg.
NOTE:
b.
BA
The HOGE chart in Section 5 may be extrapolated to 30 kg above

maximum weight for this calcula1ion, but the the maximum weight of the
.-helicop1er does not change.
..
For Climb, use the standard performance chart in Section 5 of the Flight Manual, but
reduce the resul1ing rate of climb by the following amount:
0
for AS 350 C, D. 01,
B, 8A:
for AS 350 81, B2, and B3:
200 ft/min.
250 ft/min
AS 355 E, F. F1. F2
a.
Fot hover IGE and aGE, use the standard performance charts in Section 5 of the
Flight Manual but reduce the resulting helicopter weight by 60 kg.
NOTE:
The HOGE chart in Section 5 may be extrapolated to 60 kg above

maximum weight for this calculation, but the the maximum weight of the
helicopter
b.
does not change.
For Climb, use the standard perform:i\nce ch:i\rt in Section 5 of the Flight Manual, but
reduce the resulting rate of climb by the following amount:
0
for AS 355
AEOE, F, F1 and F2:
DEI
NOTE:
150ft/min
110ttlmin
At altitudes over 10,000 ft, the AEO climb performance

penalty given above is estimated only.
DOT Approved:
Page
FMS-ECL-9
Rev. 2
--..
.
~
.-eurocopter
COMPlfMENTARY'.FLIC
MANUA
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
.AS
MANUAL
350
REGISTRATION
82
No
SERIAL No
~~a
"""."",,,
'c'
,
IMPOR!~NTN~T~
The practical value of this manual depends entirely upon its being up-dated correctly
by the operator.
The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the List of Effective
Pages.
-~:;:=::.
~::r~~
rJd
EU
RO
CO
PTE
Direction
Technique
Support
Aeroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cede. -France
350 82
O.O.P1
99-38
Page 1
'COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
..
CUSTOMIZATION
AIC : AS 350 B2 -SIN:

LIST OF ADDITIONAL PAGES
~
IF A NORMALREVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGENUMBERFOR ANY INFORMATION
CONCERNED
BELOW, THE READERWILL HAVE TO CHANGETHE NUMBEROF THE PINK
PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATIONREMAINS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE
PARAGRAPH
CONCERNED.
SECTION
.THIS
PAGE
DATE CODE
SECTION
PAGE
DATE CODE
AIRCRAFT DOESNOT OFFER ANY PARTICULAR FEATURES

REQUIRING THE CUSTOMIZATIONOF THE FLIGHT MANUALON
GREENPAGES.
.
.R
350 B2
O.O.P1
l ~
99-38
page
3
" ~ II
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.PART
WEIGHT
AND
..
BALANCE
SYSTEMSAND
DESCRIPTION
..
SERVICING
..
OPERATIONAL
INFORMATION
..
~DDITIONAL
.PERFORM~NCE"
350B2
O.O.P2
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION

mentioned on the
contains the following
conditions
are complied with.
title
page,
when the
CAUTION
CONCERNED
BELOW, THE READERWILL HAVE TO CHANGETHE NUMBEROF THE PINK
WITH THE
PARAGRAPH
CONCERNED.
N'
RCA
SECTION -PAGE
7.7
DATE
APPLICABLE BEFORECONDITION IS MET:
99-38
MOD.072453
99-38
RC B
7..8
99-38
MOD. 072272
RC C
7.11
99-38
MOD. 071827
RCD
7.11
99-38
MOD.072488
RC E
8.4
99-38
MOD. 072573 and MOD. 072582
RC F
8.4
99-38
MOD. TU 232
RC G
8.4
4
8
99-38
99-38
"
.
~
MOD. 072720
.
\J
.
8
NOTE: The date is coded and consists

followed
by the
number of the
of the last two figures

week in this
of the year
year.
350 B2
O.O.P3
99-38
Page 1
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
.0.0.P4
N RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
7A
8.4
4 "RR"
8 "RR"
02-14
02-14
78
9.2
9.2
7 "RR"
8 "RR"
02-20
02-20
1 "RR"
02-20
N RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
.
.350B2
O.O.P4
02-20
Page 1
"AR"
.
COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL
.COMPOSITION
OF
RUSH REVISIONS (RR)
.6C
No.RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
SA
8.4
7 RR'
00-12
66
8.4
11 'RR'
00-14
0.0.P4
1 'RR'
00-41
8.4
7 RR'
00-41
No.RR
SECTION
PAGE
DATE
CODE
i.
.35062
O.O.P4
00-41
Page 1
'RR'
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVEPAGES
(1) PageRevisionCode
-N
: New, to
SECTION
PAGE
0.0
0.0
O. 0
O.
0
O. 0
Pi
P1
P2
P3
P4
O. 0
6. 0
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
6. 1
7.0
7. 0
7. 0
7. 0
7. 0
7. 1
P5
P6
7. 2
7.
be inserted
P6
1
3
1
1
1
1/03
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
1
2
3
4
1
DATE (1)
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
89-17
99-48
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
92-12
92-12
99-38
SECTION
7.
i 7.
i 7.
I' 7.
7.
PAGE
DATE (1)
3
3
3
4
4
2
3
4
1
2
89-17
89-17
99-38
89-17
99-38
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 5
7. 6
7. 6
7. 7
7. 7
7. 7
7. 8
7. 8
7. 8
7. 8
7. 9
7.10
7.10
I 7.11
; 7.11
! 7.11
8. 0
8. 1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
89-17
92-12
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
P6
8. 1
8. 2
35082
89-17
0.0. P5
,,: ..
..99-48
Page 1
"'1"1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
SECTION
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
8.
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
38M
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
PAGE
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
DATE (1)
99-38
99-38
99-38
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
SECTION
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
8. 4
9. 0
9. 1
9. 1
9. 1
9. 2
9. 2
9. 3
9. 4
9. 4
9. 4
9. 5
9. 6
9. 7
9. 7
9. 8
9. 8
9. 8
9. 9
9.10
9.10
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.11
P6
PAGE
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
l'
1
2
1
2
3
4
DATE (1)
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-48 R
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-48 R
99-48 R
89-17
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
89-17
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
350 82
O.O.PS
99-48
Page 2
4It
..COMPLEMENTARY
SECTION
PAGE
~.11
9.12
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.27
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
10.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
DATE (1)
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P6
99-38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
92-12
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
99-38
Date
No
Date
89-17
99-48
92-12
93-05
PAGE
DATE (1)
NORMAL
No
SECTION
MANUAL
92-12
93-05
99-48 N
99-48 N
99-48 N
99-48 N
99-48 N
99-48 N
99-48 N

REVISIONS
.4
FLIGHT
REVISION:
93-15
99-38
350 82
O.O.P5
99-48
Page 3
--
.;
.'
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
,
SECTION6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

.CONTENTS
Pages
6.1
...5
WEIGHING AND DETERMINATIONOF CG

1 GENERAL
2 WEIGHT
ANDBALANCE
3 WEIGHING
4 LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION
LATERAL
CGLOCATION
10
6 WEIGHT AND MOMENTOF EQUIPMENTITEMS
13
...
...N
350B2
6.0.P6
99-38
"'--
,;;"
Page 1
~ ~~ ~,
:;:==;=;;=
.
.
'c
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
Example: Analysis for a passenger transport
LOMPlEMENTARYFUGHT
MANUAL
mission
Before takeoff
1) Determine the maximumpermissible takeoff weight.

2) Note the equipped empty weight and the moment.
3) Refer to tables given below to determine loading conditions;
totalize weights and moments.
4) Calculate the c.g. location.
5) Check that c.g. falls within permissible limits.
~:
kg
EEW
Crew
Passengers
Side cargo hold

Fuel
C.g.
i.e.
4.1.2.2
In flight
1200
160
140
4272
248
356
400
1390
1950
6426
50
--
TOTAL
:
longitudinal
m.kg
160
.11: = 3.295 m
1950
c.g. is within
the permissible limits.
or on landing
Sameprocedure as above. taking into account the weight and moment

of the fuel remaining.
Example: -Initial
c.g. : 3.295 m
-C.g.
after consumption of 350 kg of fuel.
EEW
Crew
Passengers
Side cargo hold
Fuel
kg
m.kg
1200
160
140
50
50
4272
248
356
160
173
-TOTAL
longitudinal
i.e.
16DO
c.g.
c.g.
52D9
becomes: ~
= 3.255 m
1600
is within permissible limits.
.R
350 B2
6. 1
99-38
Page 3
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
4.2 Loadina Data

4.2.1
Crewand Passengers
0
0
.;
~
.;
.,
0
>"
METRIC UNITS
WEIGHT
MOMENT: m.kg
kg
LA)
(8)
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
30D
320
93
124
155
186
219
248
279
310
341
152
203
254
305
356
406
457
508
559
610
660
711
762
812
IMPERIAL
UNITS
WEIGHT
lb
100
150
200
250
300
.350
400
450
500
550
600
650
MOMENT: in. lb
(A)
(8)
6102
9153
12204
15255
18306
21357
24400
27459
30510
9999
12999
19998
24997
29997
34996
39996
44995
49995
54994
59994
64993
700
69993
35082
6.1
99-38
.
.
R
Page4
,.
4.2.2
COMPLEMENTARY
f'L1GHTMANUAL
Freight and baggage transport
.I
.1
~
c:
0;
0
0
:r;
,:
~
METRICUNITS
WEIGHT
ko
10
20
50
.70
80
100
120
150
200
250
300
310
MOMENT:m.kg
(C)
(A)
(8)
15.5
31.0
77.5
108.5
124.0
155.0
186.0
232.5
22.5
45.0
112.5
157.5
180.0
225.0
270.0
337.5
450.0
562.5
675.0
697.5
27.6
55.2
138.1
193.4
221.0
276.3
331.5
414.4
552.6
690.7
828.9
856.5
(D)
(E)
32
64
160
224
256
320
384
46
92
230
322
368
IMPERIALUNITS
WEIGHT
.1:0
'..
100
150
176
200
220
250
264
300
330
400
500
600
.682
MOMENT: in.1b
:::1
6102
9153
10740
12204
13424
15255
16109
18306
20137
4:::
8858
13287
15590
17716
19488
22145
23385
26574
29231
35432
44290
53148
60412
:::9
10878
16317
19036
21756
23931
27195
28718
32634
35897
43512
r!
:::9
12598
18897
22172
25196
27716
31495
33259
:~~5
18110
27165
31874
54390
65268
74188
35082
6. 1
99-38
---
Page 5
~-
;:
.COMPLEMENTARY
4.2.3
FLIGHT MANUAL
Fuel
~fEEj
~-,
--~-ffHJ
~
~
.I
I
1-
3,475 m ( 136.81 in)
: Fuel specific gravity:
./
0.79
METRIC UNITS
litre
10
20
40
60
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
540
Ka
8
16
32
47
63
79
119
158
198
237
277
316
427
m.ka
28
56
111
163
219
275
414
549
688
824
963
1098
1484
.
IMPERIAL UNITS
UKgal.
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
119
lb
40
79
158
238
317
396
475
554
633
712
792
871
940
in.
Ib
5472
10808
21616
32561
43369
54177
64985
75793
86601
97409
108353
119161
128601
IMPERIAL UNITS
USgal.
lb
in. lb
USaal.
lb
in.lb
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
33
66
99
132
198
264
330
4515
9029
13544
18059
27088
36118
45147
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
462
527
593
659
725
791
857
63206
72099
81128
90158
99187
108217
117246
60
396
54177
143
940
128601
35082
6. 1
99-38
;~':",
Page6
4.3
.
CG Charts
The
know
the
following
the
charts
aircraft
limits,
it
(metric
should
be
These charts
are designed
CG move along
a vertical
Example
Examole
1 :
2 :
The weight
be modified
fitted.
units
and
centre-of-gravity.
Imperial
When
confirmed
so that
line.
the
by
calculations.
the
variations
units)
point
in
Total
During
centre
weight
1800
the flight,
of gravity
kg for a centre
of
after
consumption
will
be 3.28
(Refer
Total
During
centre
weight
4000
the flight
of gravity
lb for a centre
after
consumption
will
be 130 in.
and CG limits
are given
in the
by the Supplements
corresponding
are
used
obtained
is
the
weight
fuel
to
easily
close
gravity
of 3.30 m.
of 200 kg of fuel,
to chart).
to
make
the
of
gravity
of 131 in.
of 600 lb of fuel,
the
(Refer
to chart).
LIMITATIONS
SECTION and may
to the oPtional
items
.
.R
35082
),
;.1:
6. 1
99-38
P:dg~
~
::: """.'
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
ABAQUE
DE CENTRAGE
LOADING
CHART
PILOTE
PILOT
. 55
PASSAGERAR.
REARPASSENGER
54
BANQ.BIPLACE
TWO-PLACE
SEAT
FRET CABINE
CABINFREIGHT
25g
w
CARGO
170
SOUTES
SIDEH
20;:!a;
0
~ARGOSWING
38
RESERV.CONV.
FERRY_~UEL
T1NK
32
',f;"
SaUTE AR.
REAR HOLD
.
60
1000
1100
1200
130
0> 140
~ 1500
0
iii 1600
$:
, 1700
w
~ 1800
~
~ 1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
~
2400
OD
0;
2509..
58
CENTRE
DE GRAVITE
-CENTER
OF GRAVITY
(m)
350 B2
99-38
,- ...,,;,
""I
,..co".'"!
.'.
C'o"""'"
6. 1
Page 8!
.
.
COMPLEMENTA~Y_FtICHT
ABAOUE
DE CENTRAGE
LOADING
MANUP
CHART
PILOTE
PILOT
PASSAGER
AR.
REARPASSENGER
BANQ.BIPLACE
TWO-PLACESEAT
FRET CABINE
CABIN FREIGHT
88.5 ~
CARGOSL
SOUTES
SIDEHO
CARGO SWING
RESERV.CONV.
FERRYFUEL TANK
SaUTE
REAR HOLD
AR.
2000
250
3000
I-
:I:
(!)
W 3500
:s:
w
cn
~ 4000
.4500
500
OJ
0
0;
t-
0;
"'
55
CENTRE
DE GRAVITE
-CENTER
OF
GRAVITY
35082
6. 1
89-17
---
(in)
Page 9
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
LATERALC.G.
The tables
below give the lateral
c.g. positions
for different
their moments with respect to the Y plane (positive
dimensions
right,
negative
dimensions on the left)"
5.1
weights
on the
and
Crew and Dassenaers
; ~E~I:I~===r
-~:(==11==:=3
=:
:>
:>
,-
METRIC UNITS
WEIGHT
~
MOMENT:
m.k
A+
A-
8+
50
60
70
80
90
100
+
+
+
+
+
+
18
22
25
29
32
36
-18
-22
-25
-29
-32
-36
+
+
+
+
+
+
110
+ 40
-40
120
+ 43
-43
10
12
14
17
19
21
8-
C+
C-
0+
0-
-10
-12
-14
-17
-19
-21
+
+
+
+
+
+
31
37
43
50
56
62
-31
-37
-"43
-50
-56
-62
+
+
+
+
+
+
27
32
37
43
48
54
-27
-32
-37
-43
-48
-54
+ 23
--23
+ 68
-68
+ 59
-59
+ 25
-25
+ 75
-75
+ 64
-64
IMPERIAL
UNITS.
WEIGHT
lb
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
A+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
1417
1700
1984
2267
2551
2834
3117
3401
3684
A -B
-1417
-1700
-1984
-2267
-2551
-2834
-3117
-3401
-3684
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
815
978
1141
1304
1467
1630
1793
1956
2119
MOMENT: in.lb
B -C
+
-815
-978
-1141
-1304
-1467
-1630
-1793
-1956
-2119
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R~
C -0
2445 -2445
2934 -2934
3423 -3423
3912 -3912
4401 -4401
4890 -4890
5379 -5379
5868 -5868
6357 -6357
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2106
2528
2949
3370
3791
4213
4634
5055
5476
350 82
-2101
-2521
-294!
-337(
-379
-421
-463
-5055
-54~
6. 1
99-38
-"'
0-
Page 10
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
~,
5.2
Air
anDulance,
!!oist
and lateral
baaaaaeholds
+
-I
g'"
~
0
.;on
,,;
.METRIC
UNITS
WEIGHT
Kg
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
136
MOMENT: m.kg
A+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
18
22
25
29
32
36
40
43
47
49
A-18
-22
-25
-29
-32
-36
-40
-43
-47
-49
B+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
10
12
14
17
19
21
23
25
27
28
C+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
31
37
43
50
56
62
68
75
81
84
E-21
-25
-29
-33
-37
-41
-46
-50
-54
-56
F-77
-93
-108
-124
-139
-154
-170
-185
-201
-210
G+
+
+
+
+
+
+
28
33
39
44
50
56
G-28
-33
-39
-44
-50
-56
-61
-67
IMPERIAL UNITS
WEIGHT
lb
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
MOMENTSen in.lb
A+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A-
1417 -1417
1700 -1700
1984 -1984
2267 -2267
2551 -2551
2834 -2834
3117 -3117
3401 -3401
3684 -3684
3968 -3968
4252 -4252
B+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
815
978
1141
1304
1467
1630
1793
1956
2119
2282
2445
C+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2445
2934
3423
3912
4401
4890
5379
5868
6357
6846
7335
E-1634
-1961
-2287
-2614
-2941
-3268
-3595
-3921
-4248
-4575
-4902
F-6079
-7294
-8510
-9726
-10942
-12157
-13373
-14589
-15805
-17020
-18236
G+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2189
2627
3065
3502
3940
4378
4816
35082
G-2189
-2627
-3065
-3502
-3940
-4378
-4816
-5254
-5691
~. 1
"
99-38
I,
Page 11
~j ~~
l, ._-
.;
~-
.,
c,.
5.3
Determination
of lateral
coo. location
The computation method is the same as that used for determining the
longitudinal
c.g. location (para. 4.1).
Add weights and moments to the aircraft
to preceding page.
Lateral c.g. location
permissible limits.
Exanq,le durina
empty wei~ht and momentreferring
values during the mission shall fall
hoistina
; ;~:'::
E'qoipped Empty Weight
.;;c-'i:j.~,J,;:i,ili
Pilot operator
:,~;:~;J ' "';:'5[; "'H'oist
;jft..;;"..,'"
."',.." ",~'"",.
,"", ',.
',to
Hoisted load
Fuel during hoisting
lateral
c.g.
location
This value falls
within
within
1200
80
80
m Ka
+ 14
+ 29
-43
136
200
-210
1696
-210
~
= -0,124
1696
(ne
g0ative
moment:
hO1St
operator
located left to
aircraft
plane)
the permissible limits.
.
.
6. 1
89-17
';f:,
symmetry
350 82
"'-0
the
ooeration
Ka
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANUAL
~:
"
Page 12
.
C~PlEMENTARYFlIGHT
MANUAL
6 WEIGHTANDMOMENT
OF EQUIPMENT
ITEMS
.
The following
approximate
list
weight
covers
the
and moment
optional
of the
equipment
items.
It
removable
components.
DESCRIPTION
m.ka
MOMENT
in.lb
2.1
4.6
3.2
275
1.1
2.4
1.7
149
Door + subdoor
14.0
30.9
27.2
2360
front
10.6
23.4
17.1
1484
7.3
16.1
11.5
998
2 Two-place seats, rear
21.1
46.5
54.6
4739
1 Three-place seat, rear

(complete with armrests)
26.2
57.8
67.6
5867
2.3
5.1
2.6
225
Battery
17.3
38.1
69.0
5990
Skis SEFAcomplete with struts
30.4
67.0
105.6
9165
Skis SEFAwithout struts
23.6
52.0
82.4
7152
Skis "SURFAIR"
26.8
59.2
113.4
9871
67.6
148.8
227.5
19708
13.3
29.3
43.4
3771
44.8
98.9
35.0
77.2
82.3
7143
Single stretcher installation

(not including stretcher)
0.7
1.5
1.1
95
Double stretcher installation

(not including stretcher)
2.3
5.1
3.9
340
Aircraft
tool kit
Cabin fire
extinguisher
Axe
low front
seat
seat
Dual control
Emergencyfloatation
gear
Sling (cargo swing)

.Wheels
for soft
ground
Ferry tank
Stretcher
R
R
.
15.1
33.3
26.7
350B2
2318
6. 1
99-38
---
the
WEIGHT
lb
ko
.High
gives
-.,-
::.
Page 13
'c-
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
lb
BREEZE electric
hoist 136 kg
(300 lb) (arm, winch, grip,
pulley-block,
belt,
shears)
26.0
57.4
68.4
5947
AIR EQUIPEMENTelectric
hoist
136 kg (300 lb) (arm, winch,
grip,
pulley-block,
belt,
shears)
33.4
73.7
87.9
7637
LOCATORsearch
10.1
22.3
9.3
809
42.9
94.5
145.6
12618
55.5
122.2
187.1
16189
Low landing
Hi~h
.
landlng
light
gear
gear
,,Footstep
WANDELAND GOLTERMANN
hailers
m.k
2.9
6.4
5.5
478
16.6
36.6
63.9
5548
35082
6. 1
99-38
"" c:~-:; "

.
MOMENT
in.lb
R
R
R
R
R
R
.
.
Page 14
" "
-COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 7
SYSTEMSAND DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
7.0
LEADING PARTICULARS
7.1
COCKPIT
7.2
WARNING-CAUTION-ADVISORY
PANEL
7.3
POWERPLANT
7.4
FUEL SYSTEM
7. 5
ROTORAND TRANSMISSIONSYSTEMS
7.6
FLIGHT CONTROLS
7.7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
7,8
ELECTRICAL POWERSYSTEMS
7.9
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
7.10 HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEMS

7.11
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8'
N
35082
7.0.P6
99-38
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLJG_HTMANUAL
SECTION 7.0
LEADING PARTICULARS
1
MAIN AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

12.94m (42.45rt)
':; --==:::::::::~~;~~==::~~:===
1
'0
,.,
..
~.,.,
,.,
.10.93m
(35.86rt)
~~i:~il~~~~~~~~
I'~E
~
..M
== ~
.:
~
~
It!
.
.
'"C!
t-
on
~
on
>
~
0
.t
Overall dimensions of helicopter

-Overall
length, rotor turning
-Main rotor diameter
-Height to top of fin, low L/G *
-Length, blades folded
-Width, blades folded
-Height to rotor head, low L/G *
-Ground clearance below cabin, low L/G *
-Width of fuselage
-Length of fuselage
* Plus 0.20 m (0.65 ft)
when aircraft
12.94 m
10.69
3.02
10.93
2.53
3.14
0.39
1.87
10.93
42.45 ft
35.07
9.91
35.86
8.30
10.30
1.27
6.14
35.86
equipped with high L/G
35082
7.0
89-17
""-"""-cC
~~ge 1
~ "
;;
:~
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
ACCESS DOORSAND COMPARTMENTS

DIMENSIONS
O.82m
1.20m
O.8Sm
2.7811
E
0
0:
~
'" N
..: ~
..
:"""c!i~::-",
."}"'.;cc~'..:c
,'.~
~~:
~
'
'iC.
E -
...
O.93m
O.32m
O.42m
1.37ft
~
~
~
q
~
>'
~
1.12m
3.67ft
.. N
O.60m
1.96ft
BaQQaQe
compartmentareas
-Max.
length
-Max.
width
-Max.
height
-Available
floor
area
-Available
volume
2.42 m
7.94 ft
1.65 m
5.41 ft
1.30 m
4.26 ft
2.60 m2 27.98 sq.ft
-Rear
0.43 m2 4.62 sq.ft

0.35 m2 3.76 sq.ft
0.55 m2 5.92 sq.ft
3.00 m3 105.94 cu.ft
Cabin doors
-Forward
doors
Width
.Height
.Area
-LH hold
-RH hold
-Rear
hold
BaQQaQecompartment
1.12
1.10
1.29
m
3.67 ft
m
3.60 ft
m2 13.89 sq.ft
-LH hold
-RH hold
-Rear
hold
volumes
0.235 m3 8.29 cu.ft

0.200 m3 7.06 cu.ft
0.565 m3 19.94 cu.ft
subdoors
.Width
.Height
.Area
0.60 m
1.10 m
0.69 m2
1.97 ft
3.60 ft
7.43 sq.ft
350 B2
7.0
99-38
{"'"
0,",
Page 2
"
COMPLEMENT~RY
FLIGHT MANUAL
ENGINE DATA
The aircraft
is equipped with an ARRIEL 1D1 modular-design
free-turbine
turboshaft
engine, mounted aft of the MGB in a separate fireproof
bay.
3.1 ~
-Direction
-Main
rotation
(viewed
looking
forward)
Clockwise
dimensions
Overall
.Overall
Overall
-Approximate
3.2
of
length
height
width
weight
1.200
0.465
0.612
m
m
m
of complete
47.24
1B.31
24.09
engine:
in
in
in
269 lb (122 kg)
Desiqn Characteristics
.The
engine comprises:
-a single-stage
axial compressor
-a centrifugal
compressor
-an
annular combustion chamber with centrifugal
fuel injection
and
ignition
-a two-stage
axial turbine
driving
the compressors
-a single-stage
free power turbine
-a hydraulic
governor using fuel as the motive fluid,
comprising:
.a free turbine
governor maintaining
constant Nf by modifying
the
Ng setpoint
of the gas generator
governor,
.a gas generator
governor controlling
the fuel flowrate.
TRANSMISSIONSYSTEMDATA
The main transmission
are the following:
-engine-to-MGB
coupling
shaft
-main
gearbox (MGB)
-two-piece
-tall
.c;,~"
gearbox
tail (TGB).
drive shaft
.~
.In
with
hydraulic
",ij , ,.,
the main and tail
pump drive
"'"
0,
rotors
pulley
.\i;;!!
," c.
""".~";,;c';-'
,
,.
!~;:!';"'.;;;";'o;i1
power-on fl~gh~'Fhe
rotor turn~ a~ a practically
constant speed 01
;:;:':
394 rpm. At thlS speed the transmlsslon
components rotate
at :
'"Co,'-42452
-6125
-2086
.R
system components driving
rpm for the free power turbine

rpm for the engine-to-MGB coupling
drive shaft
rpm for the tail
rotor.
shaft
and the tail
rotor
350B2
7.0
99-38
Page 3
;~,
"
I
j
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
c{
1.
Fuel Quantity
Litre
Total
Usable after
of low-level
illuminatior
flight
Unusable
USGal. UK Gal.
540
143
119
60
15.8
13.1
1.25
0.33
kg
lb
Remarks
427
940
Specific
gravity:
0.79
47.4 104
0.28
2.20
LS&.= 0.79
CONVERSION
TABLE
GAUGE
READING
-CAPACITY
/WEIGHT
Graduation
10
9
.8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Litres
USGal.
UKGal.
540
486
432
378
324
270
216
162
108
54
0-3
143
129
114
100
86
74
57
43
29
14
0-0.8
119
107
95
83
71
59
48
36
24
12
0-0.6
.
kg
427
384
342
299
256
213
171
128
85
43
0-2.3
lb
940
846
752
658
564
470
376
282
188
94
0-5
HYDRAULICAND LU8RICATION SYSTEMCAPACITIES
The hydraulic and lubrication

following table:
system capacities
Lit res
are given in the

US Gal.
UKGal.
MGBlubrication
system
6.5
1.7
1.4
TGBlubrication
system
0.33
0.08
0.07
6.2
1.64
1.36
0.79
0.66
Engine lubrication
Hydraulic system
system
350 B2
7.0
99-38
Page 4
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.5
FUELTANKCAPACITY
Fuel Quantity
Litres
Total
.
.
Usable after
illumination
level light
US Gal.
540
143
UKGal.
119
kg
lb
427
940
RemarksI
Specific
gravity:
0.79
of low-
60
Unusable
15.8
1.25
0.33
13.1
0.28
47.4
104
2.20
s~.=
0.79
CONVERSION TABLE
GAUGE READING -CAPACITY /WEIGHT
Graduation
Litres
US Gal.
UK Gal.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
540
486
432
378
324
270
216
162
108
54
0-3
143
129
114
100
86
74
57
43
29
14
0-0.8
119
107
95
83
71
59
48
36
24
12
0-0.6
kg
lb
427
384
342
299
256
213
171
128
85
43
0-2.3
940
846
752
658
564
470
376
282
188
94
0-5
HYDRAULICAND LUBRICATIONSYSTEMCAPACITIES
The hydraulic
and lubrication
system capacities
are given in the
following table:
Litres
M.G.B. lubrication
T.G.B. lubrication
E!)!Jine lubrication
~raulic
svstem
svstem
system
system
6.5
0.33
6.2
3
US Gal.
1.7
0.08
1.64
0.79
UK Gal.
1.4
0.07
1.36
0.66
I
.350
B2
-~~
L
Page
5
7.0
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.SEmON
7.1
~
This Section
is customized
.
.
N
.350
82
7 .1
92-12
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARYFLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
7.2
WARNING-CA~~~SORY PANEL
This Section is customized
.
.
.350
82
7 .2
92-12
Page 1I
COMPLEMENTARYELIGHTMANUAL
SECTION7.3
.POWERPLANT
DESCRIPTION
1.1
Installation
The engine is mounted at the top of the body structure in a fireproof
bay. It is installed aft of the main gearbox, to which it is connected
by a shaft mounted between two flexible couplings.
1.2
Brief DescriPtion of the Enaine

The engine is a free power turbine design.
The gas generator supplies power in the form of kinetic energy to a
"free" turbine, which converts it into the mechanical energy required
to fly the helicopter.
The engine consists
-Axial
of five separate interchangeable modules:
Compressor Module
.Mounted
at the forward end of the engine, comprising a single-stage
axial compressor.
-Gas Generator Module

Centrally located, comprises:
a centrifugal compressor
.a
combustion
.generator
-Free
chamber
turbine drying the compressors.
Turbine Module
At the aft
-Reduction
.Reduces
end, consisting
of a turbine wheel and shaft.
Gear Module
the free turbine speed from 41586 rpm to fOOOr~}
-Output
Shaft Module:
"'.
Transmits engine power to the main gearbox and accessory drive

couplings.
350 82
7 .3
99-38
Page 1
c,
,~
"'
:,-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
OIL
SYSTEM
The engine includes a self-contained

oil cooling system and oil tank.
The lubrication
system basically
-Oil
tank
-Oil
cooler
-Pressurizing
pump
-Three scavenge pumps
-Oil
filter
assembly (filter,
lubrication
system with an external
comprises the following:
bypass valve. clogging indicator).
Oil system monitoring is ensured by oil temperature and pressure

indicators.
In addition, the Warning-Caution-Advisory Panel includes
lights that illuminate to indicate:
-minimum oil pressure
-metal particles
on the magnetic chip detectors.
KEY TO FIGU!tE
OIL
Itew
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pressurizing pump
Pressure relief valve
Clogging indicator
Bypass valve
Oil filter
Pressure tap
Oil pressure indicator
8
9
Minimum oil
pressure
Scavenge
pumps
SYSTEM
Itew
DESCRIPTION
10
Non-return valve
11 Chip detection light
12 Oil cooler
13
Oil tank
14 Oil temperature indicator
15 .Torquemeter oil jet
16
Torquemeter transmitter
1 ight
17
Torquemeter
350
B2
89-17
.
7.3
.
Page 2
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1
.
.
L ..!.! -!-6
-r-;
0
q
13
Retour
11
-Oil
-Oil
-Oil
Couplemetre
17
0.-
12
Aspiration
Pression
:1 -,
10
suction
line
pressure
line
return
line
-Torquemeter
oil line
35082
,1.3
',c
89-17
jage 3
4:,si
.
,,""
s;
;'kc"""""
.~
:"
':'~,~
,?;;;;;
-,'
"C-'
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANUAL.
ANQ INDICATOR
BLEED VALVE
FLAG
liNg
g
.;
ACTUAL Ng
>
s
:;~:.;:
~~ ,~; i:" -~
;;#i~~ThiS instrument'displays several indications:
-~:
The pointer
shows the difference
between the actual Ng value and the
"Ng at MAXT/O PWR", computed as a function
of altitude
and outside air
temperature.
The pointer
on graduation
"0" indicates
the computed "Ng at MAX T/O PWR".
-Gas
Qenerator
A flag
valve
shown as a digital
Ng is
equal to
value
position
on the instrument
.Black
the actual
speed
The actual Ng is
(in percentage).
-Bleed
that
indicates
flag
Green and yellow
the position
of the
bleed valve:
: 'Valve closed
hatched
flag:
Valve open
A test push-button
is used to check the instrument operation.
In "test"
mode, the "Ng at MAXT/O PWR", computed as a function
of external
factors,
is displayed
as a digital
value in the window, and the ~Ng pointer
moves
and stops at zero.
:"
., .;~
350 B2
7 .3
99-38
.,;
~. ~-
Page 4
COMPLEMENTA~Y~LIGHT
~r:lUAL
SECTION7.4
.FUEL
SYSTEM
1
FUELTANK
Fuel is contained in a spin-molded polyamide fuel cell located in the body
structure beneath the transmission deck. It is equipped with a gravity
refuelling
spout on the LH side of the aircraft.
as well as a vent line and
a water bleed valve.
ENGINEFUELSUPPLYSYSTEM
Fuel is supplied from the fuel cell to the engine through the following
components in turn:
.-two
booster pumpsat the bottom of the fuel tank
-a
fuel
-a
filter
filter
bypass valve.
FUELSYSTEM
CONTROLS
ANDMONITORING
The following
-a
-a
fuel
cockpit provisions are available
flow control
to the pilot:
to meter the fuel on engine starting
fuel shutoff lever that actuates the shutoff

supply system
-a
fuel contents gauge
-a
fuel pressure indicator
-a
"FUEL" light
-a."F.
fllter
that illuminates
to indicate
FIlT" light that illuminates

exceeds 200 mb.
valve in the engine fuel
a low fuel level
when th~LP,re~su:e dror a,c.r,~ssthe tue) :~~~

~
.,:~~,
'.' cf*~..
(_!.j~'"7;~~~
,~
-a
"FUEL P.".light
200 rob at elther
in the tank
that
illuminates
wh~n t~e
pump or both pumps.'
,"
,:"-'
fuel
pr~ssure
is l~wer
..,i..
~ ~~ ~
35082
7(~
thaQ!~~
7.4
89-17
Page 1
'~;
::~"
~,
..
"
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
~c
\,
FUEL PUMP
4.
FUELPUMP
1
13
15
191
I ENGINE I
L_-J
j.
g
M
~
.,;
.,
FUELP
FUEL
F.FILT
22
23
>'
s
21
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
1D
11
12
13
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Booster pumppush-buttons
14
Fuel contents indicator
15
Fuel pressure transmitter
16
Fuel pressure indicator
17
Fuel shutoff lever
18
Fuel flow control lever
19
Fuel shutoff valve
20
Fuel flow control valve
21
Engine
Differential
pressure switch 22
Filter bypass valve
23
Fuel filter
Fuel tank vent
DESCRIPTION
Refuelling spont
Fuel contents gauge
Fuel low level contactor
Fuel tank water bleed valve
Booster pump
Pumppressure switches
Check valve
Booster pumpfailure warning
light
Low fuel level warning light
Fuel filter
clogging early
warning light
R8I
35082
L
Page
2
7.4
99-38
~1'"
"""
it;,
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION7.5
ROTOR~~~MISSIONS
1
1.1
ROTORS
Main r-otor
The main r-otor- head and shaft tr-ansmlt M.G.8. r-otatlon and flight
controls motion to the main r-otor blades. As viewed fr-om the top, the
main r-otor tur-ns clockwise.
The STARFLEXtype seml-r-igld main r-otor- head is made fr-om new mater-ials
(resin glass fibre,
laminated thrust bearings, self-lubricating
bear-ings) allowing all conventional bearings and lubrication
systems to
be eliminated.
The three main r-otor blades of the glass-r-esin laminate flexible
construction
are attached to the rotor hub through flanges (1) and
star (2). Pitch var-iation is achieved thr-ough distortion
of elastomer
Items (3).
The vibration
dampening device (4) mounted in centre of the r-otor head
consists of a weight oscillating
between three springs fitted
120' apart.
i
I.
.350
82
7.5
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2
Tail Rotor
~~ade
blades rotate
aircraft.
8
tail rotor is see-saw mounted on the T.G.B. The tail
anti-clockwise
as viewed from the right side of the
c"
rotor
TRANSMISSIONS
The transmission
system consists
of :
-engine-to-main
gearbox coupling system
-main gearboxO(M.G.B.)
-tail
rotor drive shaft
-tail
gearbox (T.G.B.).
2.1
Engine-to-M.G.B.
COupling
It transmits engine power to the M.G.B. through a shaft and f"exible

coupling turning inside a flared coupling tube. The shaft drives the
M.G.B. input coupling by means of a pulley used to drive a hydraulic
pump.
2.2
Main Gearbox (M.G.B.)

The main gearbox is designed to transmit
and to reduce the rotation speed.
The M.G.B. consists
of three
interchangeable
-an epicyclic
reduction gear module (1)
providing a 4.33:1 reduction ratio;
-a
engine power to the main rotor

modules:
with five
planet gears (2)
bevel reduction gear module with a ring gear (3) and pinion (4)
providing a further 3.59:1 reduction ratio;
this module is housed in
two casings:
.main casing (5) supporting a power takeoff coup1ins (6)
.lower
casing (7) with M.G.B. mounting provisions ;
-a
lubrication
module (B) attached to the lower casing.
350
B2
7.5.
89-17
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.~
5
.7
0
0
.;;:; .
.;"'
I
The gears and bearings are lubricated
by a pressurized
oil system. The
bottom (7) of the MGB casing is used as an oil tank and houses the
pu~.
The pump draws the oil through a strainer
and forces it to the oil
coolers.
After cooling,
the oil flows through the main filter
to the oil
jets.
A by-pass valve mounted on the main filter
allows the oil to flow
to the main gearbox when the filtering
elements are clogged.
lubrication
of the MGB is monitored
through:
-a
pressure
switch causing the "MGB. p" light
to illuminate
on the
warning-caution-advisory
panel when the pressure drops below 1 bar
(14.50 psi)
-a
thermal switch causing the "MGB. T" light
to illuminate
on the
warning-caution-advisory
panel when the temperature
reaches 115'C
-as
optional
equipment an MGB. oil pressure and temperature
indicator
can be fitted
in complement to the lubrication
monitoring
system.
-a magnetic plug that causes the "MGB CHIP "light
to illuminate
when
metal particles
are present.
.R
350 B2
99-38
1 .5
.'
f'age 3
;:J~":::
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
...
(0
ci
.,
>
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DESCRIPTION
Epicyc1ica1 reduction gear

Planet gear
Sun gear
Low pressure switch
Oil filter
and bypass
Power input module
Rotor brake assembly
Bevel pinion
ITEM
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DESCRIPTION
Oil level sight

Oil temperature switch
Magnetic plug
Oil pump
Oil cooler
Oil filler
cap
350 B2
7.5
99-38
-~.",
.
.
Page 4
COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT
2.3
Tail
Rotor
Drive
System
The tail
rotor
drive
system transmits
power takeoff
to the tail
rotor.
It
consists
of two items:
rotation
-a
-a
output
bearing
forward
short
shaft
long
shaft
supported
Thes.
MAN~
at the engine
by five
ball
connected
to
each
other
from
the
engine
rear
assemblies.
by means
of flexible
couplings.
.6~~
c;
'/.o~
~
C;
.;
~
>
~
2.4
Tail
rotor
Rotor
2
3
4
Tail
gearbox
Tail
rotor
drive
Engine
6
7
8
Main rotor
head
Main gearbox
Oil
pump
Tail
Gearbox
The TGB is
(TGB)
a right-angle
drive
that
steps
the
rotational
speed
from
6125
down to 2D86 rpm.

It
2.5
is
Rotor
splash-lubricated
and
is
provided
with
an oil
level
sight.
LH lever
on
the
when
the
Brake
The rotor
brake
cockpit
control
is mechanically
Quadrant.
When the lever

is
is AFT, the rotor
.is
shaft
brake
FORWARD, the rotor

brake
is applied.
On brake
application,
the
thus
keeping
the friction
brings
the device
back to
moved
forward.
controlled
brake
by the
is
released;
lever
lever
causes a diaphragm
spring
to compress,
linings
under constant
load.
A return
spring
the "brake
released"
position
when the lever
35D B2
99-38
-~,5~:
78"
Page
+ff6
/- I ..
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION7.S
~-;;~
The flight
the pitch
ROLS
controls are used to fly the helicopter

angle of main and tail rotor blades.
through variation
of
The basic aircraft

is fitted
with controls at pilot's
station
(R.H. seat). As an optional it~.
the aircraft
can be provided with dual
controls
if flown with a copilot.
These controls can quickly be removed
for transportation
of long loads inside the cabin.
The flight
-a
-a
-a
controls
consist
of three channels:
lateral and fore-and-aft

cyclic
collective
pitch channel
yaw channel.
The main rotor

rotor controls
pitch
channel
controls are of the rigid tYpe (control rod) and the tail
are mixed (bal T tYpe control cabTes and rods).
Three mobile cylinder servo-controls

whose piston rod is integral with
the M.G.8. directly operate the swashplate (two in lateral,
one in
fore-and-aft).
These servo-controls
allow the aircraft
to be flown
manually in the event of a hydraulic supply failure.
A ta i 1 rotor servo-contro 1 mounted on the ta i 1 boom actuates a rod

which controls the tail rotor spider bellcrank.
In the event of a
hydraulic syst~ failure,
a load-compensating servo in the tail rotor
linkage limits the yaw pedal operating load. The hydraulic acc\.lnulator
that supplies the compensation system may be depressurized by means of
a HYD. TESTpushbutton.
The mixing unit allows operation of the cyclic
controls separately and without interaction.
When the aircraft
is fitted
completed by the following:
with the optional
and collective
autopilot
pitch
each channel is
-for the pitch and roll channels:

.an electric
actuator
.a trim actuator
-for
.an
.a
.an
.an
.a
the yaw chamel :

electric
actuator
collective
pitch -yaw coupling syst~
elastic rod
adjustable friction
lock on the pedals
pedal mov~ent detector.
.35082
7.6
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
16
~
'17
.,.
..
I
I tan
DESCRIPTION
I tan
Yawcontrol pedals
10
DESCRIPTION
28
3
Roll channel trim actuator

Cyclic stick
11
Yaw servo-unit
128 Yaw channel actuator
Load-compensating
servo
4- Yawmovanentdetector
1a- Pitch channel actuator
14-
Collective
lever
Roll channel actuator
S- Pitch channel trim actuator 1S- Pedal friction

7
8
9
Ballflex
control
Main servo-units
Mixing unit
-Optional
lock
1S- Collective pitch-yaw

17- Elastic rod
coupling
autopilot
Flight
Control Linkage
.350B2
7.6.
89-17
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGijT MANUAL
SECTION 7.7
.HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
1
GENERAL
The hydraulic
hydraulically
system reduces the pilot's

workload by providing
assisted
servo-controls
to actuate
the flight
controls.
The total
system fluid
volume is 3 lit res (0.79
up to the maximum level mark on the reservoir.
SYSTEMDESCRIPTION (Figure
The hydraulic
US gal.
or 0.66
UK gal.)
1)
system basically
includes
the following:
-A
-A
gear pump (20) driven by the main gearbox.

regulator
unit mounted on the RH side of the MGB, containing:
.a pressure regulating
valve (19)
.a pressure switch (17)
.a filter
(18)
.a solenoid valve (16).
-A hydraulic
reservoir
(21) supplying
the pump.
-Three
single-cylinder
main servo-controls
(1) (2) (3) driving
the nonrotating
star.
Each servo-control
is equipped with a safety system
comprising:
.a hydraulic
accumulator
(4)
a non-return
valve (5)
.a solenoid valve (6).
In the event of a hydraulic
pressure failure,
this system provides
hydraulic
assistance
for sufficient
time to enter a flight
configuration
with acceptable
control
operating
loads.
-A
.system.
single-cylinder
yaw servo-control
(10) driving
the tail
rotor control
rod. In the event of a hydraulic
pressure failure,
a load compensating
is provided t? actuate
the c?ntrol
,~od with .acceptable
yaw ped~1 ;,;1~;;
operatlng
loads;
thlS system c~rlses:
::
~!:~;;"""'Z"
a
.,
hydraul
ic
accumu1ator
(4)
,:~
'"",,'.
a non-return valve (5),

.a pressure-drop
solenoid
valve
.a servo compensator (9)
.pressure
relief
valve (7).
The rated
system operating
"
pressure
(8) on the accumulator
is
40 bar.
.R
35082
7.7
99-38
--I
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
".
I
,.
3 SYSTEM
CONTROLS
ANDMONITORING
(Figure 1)
The pilot
low-pressure
by an aural
is informed of hydraulic
system fault
conditions
by a red "HYD"
warning light
(15)on ~he Warning-Caution-Advisory
Panel, and
alarm (14).
both of WhlCh are actuated by the pressure switch
(17) on the regulator
unit.
A switch (11) on the collective

pitch lever (12) can be used to cut off all
hydraulic power by opening the three solenoid valves on the main rotor
servo-controls to depressurize the system.
A push-button (13) on the control
console is used:
-to test the hydraulic accumulators by opening the regulator

valve (16)
-to depressurize the load compensating servo (9).
The hydraulic system filter.
a clogging indicator (20).
located on the regulator unit,
unit solenoid
is fitted
with
R
R~
350 82
7 .7
99-38
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 SYSTEM
CONTROLS
ANDMONITORING
(Figure 1)
Do not take into
account the blocked filter
()
warning light
check.
CAUTION:
THIS PAGE MUST ONLY BE REMOVEDFROMTHE MANUALAFTER

INCORPORATIONOF MOD. 072453.
"
0
350B2
7 .7
99-38
Page 2
*RC*
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.1
,S
5 7
8 9
1
" c
.4
~
lii~
\..."
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
servo-con ro
Pitch servo-control
Roll servo-control
Hydraulic accumulator
Non-return valve
Solenoid valve
Pressure- drop solenoid
valve
Load compensation servo
Yaw servo-control
Hydraulic pressure cutoff
switch
0 ectlve pl c
13 Accumulator test push-button
14" Horn
15
Low pressure warning light
16 Solenoid valve
17 Low pressure switch
18
Filter
19 Pressure regulator
20
Hydraulic pump
21
Hydraulic fluid reservoir
Figure 1
...CAUTION:
.INCORPORATION
THIS PAGEMUSTONLYBE REMOVED

FROM
THE MANUAL
AFTER
OFMOD.072453.
;",'
350B2
7 .7
99-38
Page 3
*RC*
COMPLEMENTARY FlJGHT
MANUAL
11
.2
.3
~
;;
g
>
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
.Figure
DESCRIPTION
Roll
servo-control
Pitch
servo-control
Roll
servo-control
Hydraulic
accumulator
Non-return
valve
Solenoid
valve
Pressure
relief
valve
Pressuredrop solenoid
valve
Load compensation
servo
Yaw servo-control
Hydraulic
pressure
cutoff
switch
ITE~
DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Collective
pitch
lever
Accumulator
test
push-button
Horn
Low pressure
warning
light
Solenoid
valve
Low pressure
switch
Filter
Pressure
regulator
Clogging
indicator
Hydraulic
pump
Hydraulic
fluid
reservoir
R
R
R
1
35082
7.7
99-38
Page 3
~"" ~
,; :;;
c,
:0"
:;:
=0=: ;:;
SECTION 7.8
1 --;~~
1
SYSTEM
GENERAL
DC power is provided
by a starter-generator
mounted storage
battery.
A second
identical
storage
battery
and by a 16 anp-hr
may be installed
An external
power receptacle
on the R.H.
to supply the aircraft
electrical
system
side
fran
as optional
of the aircraft
a 28 VDC ground
equipment.
may be used
power unit.
The generator
and the battery
are coupled to the distribution
bus by means
of line contactors.
which can only close if the ground power unit
is
disconnected.
EXTERNAL POWERCIRCUIT
The ground power ~it
is coupled to
of its contactor
when the following
the primary
distribution
conditions
are met:
-electric
power is available
to the external
-the
NMASTER SWN pushbutton
is released
-the
.EXT PWR 8ATTN pushbutton
is depressed.
The -GENN and 8ATTN lights
buffer-
are
receptacle
illuminated.
The battery
and the generator
are
ground power unit
is disconnected.
power
bus by means
isolated
from
the system
until
the
BATTERY CIRCUIT
The battery
is coupled to the primary
contactor
when the following
conditions
distribution
are met:
-electric
power is not available
to the external
-the
-MASTER SWN pushbutton
is released
-the
-EXT PWR BATTN pushbutton
is engaged.
bus by means of
power
its
receptacle
The battery
may be isolated
from the aircraft
power system either
manually
(by means of the -MASTER SW- or -EXT PWR 8ATTN switches)
or automatica lly
(by connecting
a ground power un1t).
.350
B2
7.8
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
~
~
,JiJ'"
~~-
II~~.~
1
-15
E~Jl31
I
~~
z~
BS ~~
~~
1I-U
W'"
>(:3
UZ~"O:
;3~
~~ ';::::~ J ~~
I 1~8 ~~I ,~~~

I
I~~
~ou.~~AH
350
82
7.8.
89-17
Page 2
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
.
MANUAL
4 GENERATOR
CIRCUIT
.
The generator
is coupled
to
contactor
when the following
the primary
conditions
distribution
are met:
bus
by means
of
its
-electric
power is not available to the external power receptacle
-the "MASTERSW", "CRANK"and "START"pushbuttons are released
-the "GEN" pushbutton is engaged
-the generator voltage exceeds the battery voltage by at least 0.5 V.
The generator may be isolated
from the aircraft
power system:
-manually by disengaging the "GEN" pushbutton or by pressing the

"MASTER
SW", "CRANK"and starter pushbuttons.
-automatically
if a reverse current is detected from the battery to the
generator, if a ground power unit is connected, or if the generator
voltage exceeds 31.5 V.
A push-button is provided to attempt resetting of the generator.
Whenthe generator is isolated, the "GEN" light
Warning-Caution-Advisory Panel.
illuminates
on the
5, ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
CONTROL
ANDMONITORING
5.1
5.1.1
Console Pushbuttons
-"MASTER SW"
-"CRANK"
-"GEN"
-"RESET"
5.1.2
Fuel Flow Control Lever Pushbutton

-"START"
5.2
Indicator
Liqhts
The following
lights
-Red
light:
warning
ar~ ~ncluded in the W~rning-Caution-Advisory
-Amber caution lights:

5.3
Controls
"
"BAn
T"
,~,
I;
~I:
"'~'
"BAT"
"GEN"
!,
...,
'
Panel:
"," ,
;1'1'
Panel Indicators
-Anlnete
-Voltmeter
350 B2
7 .8
92-12
Page 3
-0'
--
t'1
;'
""
~
~
SECTION7.8
2--:~~~
~YSTEM
1
GENERAL
The AC power system is an optional
is equipped with an automatic pilot
Two different
types of installation
required.
AC power is
inverter
is
include
installation
required when the aircraft
or with certain
gyroscopic instruments.
are available,
depending on the power
supplied by a static
inverter
from the DC power system. The
located beneath the cabin floor.
Performance specifications
the following:
250-VA A.C power system

-Input
voltage
-Output
voltages
-Frequency
-Power output:
115 VAC
26 VAC
.la-VA
A.C.
28 VDC
115 and 26 VAC
400 Hz
150 VA ) limited
150 VA)
to 250 VA
power system
-Input
voltage
-Output
voltage
-Frequency
-Power
output
28 VDC
26 VAC
400 Hz
10 VA
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
The static
inverter
is supplied from bus bar PP9, through a fuse located on
the RH side fuse panel C16-amp. fuse for the 250-VApower system, 2.5-amp.
fuse for the 10-VA power system).
The system is switched
the control
panel.
AC power distribution
side fuse panel.
An amber caution light
A.C. power system.
on by means of
circuits
the "INVERT" push-button
are protected
on the instrument
by fuses
panel
located
indicates
located
on
on the LH
a failure
350 82
of the
7 .8
99-38
.
R
R
Page 4
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MA~1UAL
.
.
0
r-;-;l
L:...:J
2 DESCRIPTION-OPERAIION
Do not into account the amber warning light
indicating
an ac generation failure.
.
on the instrument
panel
CAUTION: THIS PAGEMUSTONLYBE REMOVED

FROM
THE MANUALAFTER
INCORPORATION
OF MOD.072272.
350 B2
~
i!5
7 .8
99-38
Page 4
*RC*
'
COlf'LEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
7.9
PITO;=~~STEM
It consists of ;
-A total pressure circuit
-A static pressure c1rcuit
-Three flight
instrunents
.an a1rspeed Indicator
.a vertIcal speed Ind1cator
.an altimeter.
The statIc pressure port is provided underneath the cabin. slightly

left
of the aircraft
centreline.
The static
pressure circuit
to the
supplies
the
three instrunents.
The tota 1 pressure port is mountedon the nose slightly to the left of the
aircraft centreline. It may include an optional heating resistor operated
by
-PI TOT- pushbutton on the
control console. A l1ght illuninates
on
thethe
Warning-Caut10n-Advisory
panel;
.
-when the pushbutton is released

-in the event of failure
of the heat1ng resistor
-1n the event of power supply failure.
The total pressure circuit
supplies the airspeed indicator.
A bleed valve provided on each pressure circuit
allows condensation water
to be drained off.
12
34.5
67
h '\
-)000
)00
0
0
=
..
.,
0
,;
%
.Item
10
DESCRIPTION
.PITOT. pushbutton
2
3
4
5
6
Wind1ng
Airspeed Indicator
Rate-of-cllmb
IndIcator
Altimeter
.PITOT- lIght
Item
7
8
9
10
DESCRIPTION
Warning-caution-advisory panel
Stat1c pressure port
Water bleed valves
PITOT head (with optional
heater)
AUTO-PILOTAIR DATACIRCUIT
When the aircraft
is fitted
with the auto-pilot.
an air
data unit
supplied
wIth static and total pressure ccmplementsthe copilot's system.
.350
82
7.9
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 7.10
A~~~ING
1
CABIN VENTILATION
Two separate
circuits
provide
ventilation
to
the cabin.
-Front
vent1lat1on
The air taken from the front
cabin area flows through two ducts and is
d1stributed
to the crew.
A pull-knob
on the instrl.lnent
panel controls
opening and adjustment
of the ventilation
circuit.
-Overhead
vent1lat1on
The air taken from the upper cabin area through
a ran air scoop is then
circulated
to the air outlets
via the structure
posts.
Air is d1ffused
by opening and orientation
of each air outlet.
.6
2
ItBn
1
2
3
OESCRIPTION
FRONT aerator
FRONT air outlets
Control
pull-knob
.350
ItBn
4
5
6
OESCRIPTION
Overhead a1r outlets
Ventilation
duct
Ran a1r scoop
B2
7.10
B9-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
tJ
2 HEATING. ANDDEMISTINGSYSTEM
These systans provide cabin heating
i;.c""
I
and windscreen demisting by mixing of
'
hot P2 air taken from the engine with air taken from under the floor.
The air mixture is circulated
through two separate circuits
to the heating
diffusers
provided under the front seats and to the danisting air
diffusers.
Two manually operated valves mounted on the P2 lines are used
to control air distribution.
~--.
.,-.
I tan
1
2
3
DESCRIPTION
Danisting air diffusers
Danisting control valve
P2 air ducts
Itan
4
5
DESCRIPTION
Heating control valve
Heating diffusers
.
.Optional
350
82
7.10.
89-17
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
B.1
CABIN
LIGHTING
No take in account:
"The rear dome light is supplied from the battery direct busbar and
controlled
by a switch on the overhead panel (emergency lighting)."
8'
'

FROMTHE MANUAL
AFTER
INCORPORATION
OF MOD.071827.
"C'c
350B2
7. 11
99-38
Page 1
*RC*
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 7.11
.LIGHTING
1
CABIN LIGHTING
The cabin lighting

panel,
one
at
front
consists of two dome lights

available
to
the
crew
and
provided on the overhead

the
other
at
rear
for
the
passengers.
Each dome light comprises two swivel diffuser

controlled by rotating the diffuser.
Each front diffuser
unit
units.
Lamplighting
is
inc1udes a dimmer mounted on the overhead panel.
The cockpit dome light is directly supplied from the battery through two
circuits
and protected by a fuse. The cabin dome light is supplied
one circuit and protected by a fuse on the RH side fuse panel.
.through
The rear dome light is supplied from the battery direct busbar and
controlled by a switch on the overhead panel (emergency lighting).
2,
INSTRUMENTPANEL AND CONSOLELIGHTING
The instruments are lighted

-Lighting
.The
.The
.The
-Lighting
.The
.The
.The
R
R
by two separate circuits:
circuit 1 provides lighting to :

instrument panel indicators from a light
stand-by compass
thermometer
circuit 2 provides lighting to :
push-buttons
potentiometers
radio control units
generator
The instruments are lighted from a light generator made up of a halogen

lamp and a loom of optical fibers each' component of which is connected
to a light diffuser arranged close to the instrument to be lighted."
The INST. LTS 1 and INST. LTS 2 push-buttons contro1. the lighting syste.
,,".
The "CONSOLE"
and "~IL. .INST: t'~El" potenti{)me~~'rs cpntro~~,e
brightness of the llghtlng Cl rcu~ts.,
~
1 ,,~~
:;~
~~!~:~t
co
:,"'
_:':::"
R
R
R
3S0B2
7 .11
99-38
Page 1
'
..
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUA
.8
5 LANDINGLIGHT
The 450 W searchlight
.The
is located beneath the forward cabin on the RH side.
'
TAXI LIGHT
150 W searchlight
CAUTION:
is located beneath the forward cabin on the LH side.
THIS PAGE MUST ONLY BE REMOVEDFROMTHE MANUALAFTER
INCORPORATION
OF MOD.072488.
350 B2
7 .11
99-38
Page 3
*RC*
..'
ii
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
if
:',
PP6
2~ Y
30a
1a
4Y
PP5
~ a'y
~~
'y3
-.Do--
-.Do--
--::::::
===
11
::::::::::::-
12
10
13
.;
g
ci
ITEM DESCRIPTION
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INST. LTS 1 fuse

INST. LTS 2 fuse
INST. LTS 1 push-button
INST. LTS 2 push-button
Light dinming unit
CONSOLEpotentiometer
PIL. INST. PANEL
potentiometer
Instrument
panel
8
9
10
11
12
13
DESCRIPTION
.
Console lighting
Push-button
lighting
Radio control
unit lighting
Light generator
Thennometer lighting
Stand-by compass lighting
and console
lighting
circuits
35082
7. 11
99-38
c"
!
R
R
R
R
R
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
POSITION LIGHTS
The aircraft
-one
-one
-one
is fitted
with
three
position
lights:
red light
on port end of the horizontal
stabilizer
green light
on starboard
end of the horizontal
stabilizer
white light at rear end of the fuselage.
The circuit
is protected
by two "POS. LT." fuses.
The installation
is controlled
by the "POS. LT."
the control
console.
push-button
ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT
The anti-collision
light
fitted
at the top of the vertical
the aircraft's
presence at a great distance.
R
R
on
The circuit
is protected
The anti-collision
light
the control console.
by the "A/COLL LT" fuse.

is controlled
by the push-button
fin
indicates
R
R
on
S LANDING LIGHT
This light
makes approach and landing by night easier.
The 4S0-W landing light
is mounted on the RH side, below the cabin
R
R
It is controlled
by a LAND LIGHT push-button
on the control
console and is
protected
by two fuses (LAND. LT. CONT. and LAND LIGHT) provided on the
RH side panel.
R
R
R
TAXI L~GHT
This
light
improves
the safety
of the helicopter
when flying
near the
ground.
The lSO-W taxi
.
light
is mounted on the- LH side,
The light
is controlled
console
and is protected
below the cabin.
by a TAXI LIGHT push-button

by the TAXI LIGHT fuse.
provided
on the
3S0 82
R
control
R
R
7.11
99-38
"
.:1
!~~ ~,;
; : i ;,
c' ---"
--
I,
COMPLEMENTARY
FUC;HT MANUAL'
SECTION
8
SERVICING
.,c,
'!!
R
CONTENTS
Pages
8.1
GROUNOHANDLING
1
EQUIPMENTREQUIRED
HANDLING
8.2 SERVICING
INSTRUCTIONS
1
FUELS
FUEL ADDITIVES
LUBRICANTS
HYDRAULICFLUIDS
REFUELLING
4
"!!ii
it
,
8.3
'
TEST SHEETS
1
GENERAL
TEST SHEETS
'.
R
1
~
~ -2
8.4 DAILYOPERATING
CHECKS
1
OPERATIONOF THE BAsIC AIRCRAFT-
OPERATIONOF OPTIONAL INSTALLATIONS-
OPERATIONIN COLDWEATHER
t'
;0 -.;0 ~ --1
t, f .I,'
~
~ --~
'"
--~
I
12
N
3S0B2
8.0.P6
99-38
Page 1
---I
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION8.1
G;;;;~ING
1
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED
-For moving the aircraft
by hand:
.single
or twin handling wheels
.jacking
lever.
-For towing the aircraft
with a tractor:
the above-mentioned equipment. plus:
.a towing cable.
HANDLING
-Moving
the helicopter
by hand
On prepared ground
.Position
the ground hand1ing wheels on the mounting studs according to
aircraft
balance.
.Install
ground handling wheels (wheels outside skids. see Detail 8).
.Check that wheels are correctly
locked (see Detail A).
Lift the aircraft
onto its wheels using a jacking lever.
Lock in this position with retaining pins.
~~
.Use twin ground handling wheels.
Install
as described above.
-Towing
.
.
I
the helicopter
with a tractor
Prepare the aircraft

as above and attach the towing cable.
Elastic cords are wrapped round the undercarriage front arch.
NOTE: Handles secured to the tail
the aircraft
when towed.
boom should always be used to guide
35082
8.1
89-17
Page 1
;'".
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
..
.
A
350
82
8.1.
89-17
Page2
--COMPLEMENTARY
I':LIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 8.2
.SERVICING
INSTRUCTIONS
1~
1.1
Conrnercial
DesiQnation
The authorized
The commercial
of Fuels
fuels are given in the LIMITATIONS SECTION.

designations
are given in the TURBOMECAEngine Maintenance
Manual.
1.2
R
R
R
Capacity
Litres
U.S.
Imp.
Gal.
Kg
lb
540
143
119
427
940
.Gal.
TOTAL FUEL
TANK CAPACITY
REMARKS
Specific
weight
= 0.79
NON-CONSUMABLE
FUEL
CONSUMABLE
FUEL
REMAINING WHEN
LIGHT COMESON
.
.obtained
1.25
0.33
0.28
2.20
13.1
47.4
104
.
..
60
15.8
FUEL ADDITIVES
The anti-ice
Specification
MIL-I-27686
MIL-I-85470.
The additive
additive
when used shall meet the requirements
of French
AIR 3652 or the equivalent
non-French specifications:
-D.Eng.
RD.2451 -PHILIPS
PFA 55 MB NATO code S748
.R
is to be mixed with
the fuel
in the following
-Minimum
.0.035
.0.06
concentration,
by volume :
% in a tank already filled
% in fuel to be used for refuelling.
-Maximum
concentration,
by volume:
proportions:
0.15 %.
If there exists
any doubt as to the
contents
of a fuel tank, the fuel is
replaced by fuel containing
a known
afore-mentioned
limits
unless it is
using a differential
refractometer.
concentration
of additive
in the
to be drained from the tank and
proportion
of additive
within
the
possible to measure the concentration
Instructions
concentration
permitting
the correct
are given by the vendor.
of additive
to be
350 B2
.8.2
c'
99-38
~age 1
~
,
---;f""';::'
--"',,,
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
*:
~.
.i
3 LUBRICANTS
3.1
EnQine Lubrication
3.1.1
Svstem
Engine Oils/Commercial Designations

-Authorized
-Commercial
3.1.2
lubricants:
designations:
refer to LIMITATIONS SECTION.

refer to TURBOMECA
documentation.
Capacity
Engine oil tank and system capacity:
or 1.36 Imp gal)II
3.2
R
R
6.2 litres
(1.64 US gal
Transmission Components:
"",;,:
\ ,
"
",-:;1[',.,3.2.1 Lubricants/CommercialDesignations
l~~JIIJfi~.~i
i_~~ authori~ed lubricants are given in the LIMITATIONS

SECTION.
3.2.2
Main gearbox (system included)

Tail gearbox (system included)
4.1
: 6.5 litres (1.7 US gal or

1.4 Imp gal)
: 0.33 litre (0.08 US gal or
0.07 Imp gal).
HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
H drau1ic Fluids Commercial Desi nations

-The hydraulic
fluids
are given in the LIMITATIONSSECTION.
4.2 ~
Total capacity of system; 3 1itres or 0.8 US gal or D.65 Imp gal.
Operating pressure;
40 bar (580 psi).
The warning light situated on warnin.g-caution-advisory panel illuminates
when pressure is lower than 30 bar (435 psi).
350 B2
8.2
99-38
.'.
,~,;;1'rf
Capacity
.
.
Page 2
.
.~
REFUELLING
~
(;
~
>
s
-Place
-Connect
the
helicopter
on a level
surface.
the bower earthling
cable
to the
(1) on the helicopter.

-Check,
on the fuel
gauge,
-Observe
.Ensure
Place
.Strictly
.Prohibit
the
quantity
electro-static
of
fuel
the following
safety
precautions:
that
the aircraft
electrical
power
a fire
extinguisher
near the work
prohibit
smoking
in the security
the use of any means of lighting
balance
remaining
supply
is
in
the
switched
area.
area.
not confonning
connector
tanks.
off.
to
the
rules
of safety.
.Ensure,
during
refuelling
(or
defuelling
unit)
is connected
defuelling)
, that
the bower (or the
to the aircraft
by the electro-static
balance
.Strictly
fuel
-Fill
inside
the
flowmeter.
-Position
-Disconnect
connectors.
prohibit
draining
a hangar
or shop.
tanks,
monitoring
and lock
the filler
the bower earthling
balance
connector
(1).
-Check
that
the difference
to the quantity
of fuel
.R
of
the
quantity
tanks,
of
whether
fuel
partial
delivered
plug
(2),
using
the key.
connector
from the aircraft
in the
delivered
aircraft
fuel
and detennine
or total,
on the
electro-static
gauge readings
corresponds
the corresponding
weight.
350 82
8.2
99-38
bower
Page
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
Refuellino
WARNING:
with rotors turnino

REFUELLING WITH ROTORSTURNING SHALL BE PERFORMED
ONLY AFTE~
PRIOR AGREEMENT
IS GIVEN BY THE COMPETENT
AUTHORITY IN COMPLIANCE
.
WITH OPERATIONALREGULATIONS.
-Strictly
comply with the instructions
defined below.
-Head aircraft
into forward wind sector + 45. if wind above 10 kt.
-Lock
the collective
pitch lever in full-low
pitch position.
-Check main rotor is at nominal speed with fuel flow control
in flight
detent.
-Limit
refuelling
at 95% in order to prevent any fuel spillage.
-The
pilot
must have someone well in sight to signal the mechanic to stop
refuelling.
-After
refuelling
give the filler
plug key to the pilot.
[8
R
R
R
350 B2
8.2
99-38
:i
..,'.
.
.
Page 4
.
.
Refuelling
~
with
rotors
turning
: REFUELLING WITH ROTORS TURNING SHALL BE PERFORMEDONLY AFTER

PRIOR AGREEMENTIS GIVEN BY THE COMPETENTAUTHORITY IN COMPLIANCE
WITH OPERATIONAL REGULATIONS.
-Strictly
canply with the instructions
defined below.
-Head aircraft
into forward wind sector + 45' if wind above 10 kt.
-Lock the collective
pitch lever in full-low
pitch position.
-Check main rotor is at nominal speed with fuel flow control in flight
detent.
-Limit
refuelling
at 95'1. in order to prevent any fuel spillage.
-The pilot must have someone well in sight to signal the mechanic to stop
refuelling.
-After
refuelling
give the filler
plug key to the pilot.
5
DAILY CHECKS
The daily checks must be conducted by qualified personnel. in accordance

with standard aircraft
practices and the appropriate manufacturer's
recommendations.
Information
Master Servicing
Recommendations, is detailed
concerning
the
daily
check,
prescribed
in the
In order to perform the checks, have the required
doclRnents available.
.
.350
B2
8,2
89-17
Page 5l-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION8.3
.TEST
SHEETS
1
GENERAL
The test sheets are intended to sum up the checks to be carried
out in
flight
or on the ground, with rotors turning
either
after
replacement of
major components, or after an extensive
operation,
or further
to periodic
inspections.
The test
be filled
CAUTION:
.!';;
sheets are in the form of reproducible

in by the crew.
sheets
which can directly
SINCE THESE CHECKSDO NOT FORM PART OF NORMALHELICOPTER

OPERATION, THEY SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
UNDERTHE OPERATOR'SRESPONSIBILITY.
,.
.R
350 B2
8.3
99-38
Page 1
c-"",;
i_c,
"'1";'J
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANUAL
LIST OF TEST SHEETS
--
N 0
FLIGIrr REPORT
N 1
CHECKS AFlER ENGINEOR MODULE REPLACEMENr
N 2
CHECKS AFlER MRH FREQUENCYADPATEROR MAIN ROTOR

BLADE REPLACEMENr
N 3
CHECKS AFTER MGB REPLACEMENr
N 4
CHECKS AFTER TRH OR TAIL ROTOR BLADE REPLACEMENT
N 4 A
CHECKS AFlER TAIL RarOR DRIVE SHAFT REPLACEMENT
N 5
CHECKS AFTER OPERATIONSON FLYING CONTROLS
N 6
CHECKS AFrER GENERATOROR ELECTRICAL MASTER BOX

REPLACEMENT
N 7
SYSTEM CHECKS
OPERATIONS
ONENGINE
ORMODULE
-TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ACCORDING TO THE COMPONENr
REPLACED.
.Engine
Engine
TEST
Removal! replacer
II
"
nsta atloln ment
Hydro-
Module Replacement
mechanical
governor
repacement.
I
No 1-5
No.. 2 3
No 4
Hover
Flight ..
Starting
Ground Run
Bleed
Valve.
..
Acceleration
condition
Engine
Power
Check
NgatMax.
T/O
PWR
or
Static
droop
..
check
coast.down
Engine
35082
8.3
99-38
-~-~-
Page
...C().4PLEMENTAR,Y:_~IGHT
MANUA
I
SHEET No. HEUCOPfER
.0
AS 350
FLIGHTREPORT
,
DATE:
CREW
Start:
Durati on
AREA:
QFE:
QMU:
QAN:
Numberof landings:
WEATHER'
.Direction:
.Force
EQUIPPED EMPTY WEIGHT

Crew
Ballast
WEIGHT WITHOUT FUEL
:
:
:
:
.~~O~~-~I~~-:::::::::::::::
CGLOCAnON
:
MAJOR WORK CARRIED OUT

BEFORE FLIGHT
.UNITS
REMARKS MADE BY
CREW AFTER FLIGHT
USED
(cr~ outas applicable)
WEIGHT
kg
FUEL
-Ib
kg -Ib
-I
SPECIAL INSI'ALLA110NS
ALTITUDE
.%
m.
ft
AIRSPEED
km/h
-kt
.MPH
WRrIER'SVlSA
.R
350 82
.99-38
8.3
"';page 3
..
~, -.
~---
-COMPLEMENTARY
SHEET No"
HELICOPTER
CHECKS AFIER
ENGINE
.
.
OR MODULE
REPLACEMENT
AS 350
TEST PHASES AND

REQillREMENTS
FLIGHTMANUA"L
Enginestarting-Groundrun
RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINDED OR
LIMITATIONS
RESULTS
OBTAINED
ENGINESTARnNG
Comply with the Nonna!
Procedures of the Flight
Manual, SECTION 4.1.
Hpl
I OAT I
4"'"
:- B;'ttery vOlta;
-Bo'()ster(s) pump ON
::'
'1
Voltage = 25 V Approx.
.Pressure greater than 0.4 bar
U:
Pressure:
I
I
I
I
Starter ON
.Battery
U:
Check:
Max. t4 :
t4 :
voltage ~ 18 V
.M:840C
(5 sec. max. above 7750 C)
Other versions:
7950 C
8650 C (less than 5 sec.)
The GEN. light goes out
before Ng is 50 %.
The ENG.P.light goes out
before Ng is 70 %.
Record parameters at flight
idle rating:
I Correct I
I Incorrect I
I Correct I
I Incorrect I
ANg*
.g
N
14
~rquemeterponteringreen
.J"
Focipress.
Oil~s.
Oiltemp.
Nf**
NR
'B2version
..Except
Synchronization of NR/Nf
pointers::!: 3 rpm
BA-BB velSions
I Correct I
I Incorrect I
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 4
~
r..:
..C(O!PI.EMENTA~Y
.SHEEr
No.
HELICOPTER
AS
350
TEST PHASES AND

REQUIREMENTS
_fI.IGH"J:C;MANUAI.
CHECKS AFI'ER ENGINE OR MODULE
REPLACEMENT
Engine starting -Ground run

RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINDED OR
LIMITA nONS
RESULTS OBTAINED
ENGINE AND FUEL
SYSTEMCHECK
Switch off boosterpump(s).
No Ng ort4 hunting.
Switch on :
-350 BA-BB : boosterpump, Correctoperationof the
-Other versions: booster
pumps
pumpsone after the other,
I C4IITeI:tI
I Incorrect I
I Corrt I
I Incorrect I
I Corrt I
I Incorrt I
separately.
Check injection safety
No engineflame-out.
system:
Pr~ the starterpushbuttonat
Ng equalto or more than70 %
CHECKAFI'ER
GOVERNOR
..
REPLACEMENT
Usethe fuel flow control lever

to adjusttheNg value.
Ng = 70 %
Immediatelypushthe lever into
the"flight" detent.
As soonasthe Ng value
-During theseoperations,no
exceeds
%, use
lever
compressor
surging.noise
againto 90
reduce
thethe
engine
shouldbeheard.
I Correct I
acceleration.
Repeatthis operationonce
more.
ENGINE SHUT-DOWN
I Incorrect I
,~
.
..
,c~
.,:
Checkthe enginegenerator
coast;downtime, after
30 seconds'stabilization
at Ng between67 and 72 %
Coast-down
time from
Ng = 30 % : equalto or more
than 30sec.
I c..rrect I
!Incorrect I
Apply rotorbrake from

NR = 170rpm
Rotor stoppingtime : equalto

or lessthan25s.
I Correct I
I IncOlCrect
I
.R
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 5
!!' -
~-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANU~L
..:~
;':.
HELICOPTER
SHEET
No.
AS
CHECKS AFTER ENGINE OR MODULE

REPLACEMENT.
350
TEST PHASFS AND

REQUIREMENTS
Hover flight -Acceleration

RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINDED OR
RFSULTS OBTAINED
LIMITA TIONS
HOVER IGE (6 ft)
All air bleedsshutoff:
Recordparameters
.Refer to Limitations, in
Flight Manual,
Hp I
I OAT I
SECTION
2.1.
bNg*
Ng
t4
Fuelpress.
Oil press.
Oiltemp.
Nf**
NR
.B2 V..s;on
** ExceptBA-BB versions
Fuel
contents
ENGINE ACCELERATION
Aircraft on the ground.
Increasepitch from full low
pitch to hover IGE flight pitch -No enginesurge
within 2 to 3 sec.
.Min. transientNR : more
than360 rpm
-t4less thanmax .t4
I Correct I
I IncorrectI
I Correct I
I IncorrectI
I Correct I
!lncorrect I
350 82
~99-38 Page
6
8.3
"
.
.
..COMPLEMENTARY
S~
No.
FLIGHT/MANI
HELICOPTER
AS 350
TEST PHASES AND

REQUIREMENTS
CHECKS AFTER ENGINE OR MODULE
REPLACEMENT
Level Dight. Engine condition

RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINDED OR
RESULTS OBTAINED
LIMIT AnONS
LEVEL FLIGHT AT MAX.
CONTINUOUS POWER
Altitude equal to or less than
3000 ft
All air bleedsshutoff.
Engine
complycondition
with the Right
check:
Manual
SECTION4.2.
Recordparameters:
.Refer toLimitations,in Right

Manual, SECTION2.1.
Hp II
OAT c:=J
ANg*
Ng
t4
Fuel press.
REMINDER:
Oil press.
Oil temp.
NR = 393rpm :!:1
Nf**
NR
.B2 V.,.;on
Enginecondition: refer to
Manual, SECTION4.2.
.Flight
..Except
BA-BB velSions
!AS:
I Correct I
[~~!J
"
BLEED VALVE
OPERATION CHECK
.,.
"
See TURBOMECA
MaintenanceManual
!AS :55kt
Actuatethe collective pitch
lever to obtainclosing then
opening of thebleed valve
Referto Flight Manual,

SECTION4.1.
I Corrt I
IlIM:orrectI
.R
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 7
-_.~
~'"
-'-c.
..
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
'.
HELICOPTER
CHECKS
AFTER
SHEET No.
1
AS
TEST
PHASES
350
Level
AND
RESULTS
REQUIREMENTS
TO
IN
LEVEL
FLIGHT
AT
valve
All
to
air
the
be
condition
BE
RESULTS
OBTAINED
nONS
MAX.
and
high
discharge
closed.
bleeds
Record
Engine
at usual
altitude
for
MODULE
POWER
be perfonned
operational
enough
OR
ALTmmE
CONTINUOUS
To
flight.
OBTAINDED
OR
LIMITA
CHECK
ENGINE
REPLACEMENT
shut
off.
parameters:
RefertoLimitations,
in
Flight
Hp
OAT
Manual,
SECTION
2.1.
ANg*
Ng
t4
"
'
Fuelpress.
on
press.
on
temp.
Nf**
NR
ENGINE
.B2 Yozsion
..'ExceptBA-BBversions
GOVERNOR
AtIAS=65kt:
-Recuce
fo
the
full
fine
pitch
from
MCP
pitch.
.No
engine
.ENG.P
flame-out.
light
does
not
NR
max.
Correct
Incorrt
COITed
Incorrect
illuminate.
.Comply
with
limitation.
-In
2 to
3 sec.,
increase
pitch.
fromre-synchronization
(NR
= 395
rpm
No
.Min.
approx.)
to
Max.Continuous
Power.
engine
NR
surge
more
than
360
rpm
.t4lessthant4max.
350
?
,
,
82
8.3
99-38
c;:.".;
?~~,
c
;,. ..-;
Page
.
8
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SHEEr
No.
HELICOPTER
AS
CHECKSAFI'ER ENGINEOR MODULE

REPLACEMENT
350
Level ffigilt -Engine condition
TESTPHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDED OR
LIMITATIONS
RFSULTS OBTAINED
MAX. ENGINE POWER
CHECK
c.:;
At IAS = 55 kt, increasepitch

to ~h the Ng of the takeoff
power.
~;~
.exceeding
.All
: In orderto avoid
thetorque
limitation, it may be
necessaryto climb.
air bleedsshut-off.
Recordparameters:
..~,
It must bepossibleto getthe Ng Hp I

value atmax. takeoffpower.
Refer to Limitations,
in Flight Manual,
SECrION 2.1.
I OAT I
Ng
14
"Ii
.
.
350B2
8.3
99-38
Page 8M
HELICOPIER
SHEEr
No.
AS
350
~T
PHASES AND
REQUIREMENTS
COMPLEMENIARY_~X~HJc~~
CHECKS AFfER MRH, FREQUENCY

ADAPTER OR MAIN ROTOR BLADE
REPLACEMENT
Ground run .Blade track -Unbalance

RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINDED OR
LIMIT AnONS
RESULTS OBTAINED
Aircraft on theground.
Full low pitch.
BLADE TRACK
Recordbladetrack.
Deviationlower than6 mm.
UNBALANCE
~:
The unbalanceis to
becheckedonly
afterobtaininga
correctbladetrack.
Recordunbalance
(Accelerometeron baseof
MGB flared housing).
'r_~
..",
.'
Unbalanceequalto or
lessthan:
aircraft with low UG : 0.2 ips
aircraft with high UG : 0.3 ips
Finalresultobtained:
ips
I
Time
I
Numberof balancingplates:
"'",,; '!
,~ii~!~S :!:!i;t
..:,
R
B
.R
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 9
~~,.
'7'"
.COMPLEMENTARY:LIGHT
HELICOP1ER
SHEEr
CHECKS
No.
AFfER
MRH,
AS
350
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
IGE
All air bleeds
Record
FREQUENCY
ADAPTEROR MAIN ROTOR BLADE
REPLACEMENT
Hover
HOVER
MANUAL
Flight
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDEDOR
LIMITATIONS
IGE
RESULTSOBTAINED
(6 ft)
shut off.
Manual,
SECfION
2.1.
parameters:
Refer to Limitations
in Hight
Hp
I OAT
ANg*
Ng
t4
J"
Nt"*
NR
.B2 V.,.;on
..Except BA-BB versions
Fuel
conlmts
Check and, if necessary,
Deviation
less than 6 mm.
adjustbladetrack.
Check and, if necessary,
adjust unbalance.
Unbalance equal to or less

than 0.2 ips.
Unbalance
ips
Time
350 82
8.3
99-38
--
Page 10
i.
I...
.C<*PLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANuAL
,.
-c
HELICOPTER
SHEEr
2
No.
CHECKS AFTER MRH, FREQUENCY
ADAPTER
ORMAIN ROTORBLADE
AS
350
REPLACEMENT
Level flight at Max. Continuous Power and

VNE (low altitude)
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDEDOR
RESULTSOBTAINED
LIMITATIONS
Level flight atMax.
ContinuousPower.
AItitude equalto or less than
3000ft.
AIl air bleedsshutoff.
Recordparameters:
.Manual,
Referto Limitations in Flight

SECnON 2.1.
Hp c::=J
OAT c:=J
ilNg*
REMINDER:
Ng
NR: 393rpm.:!; I
14
.J""
Nf**
~
.82 Vcrsioll
..Except BA-BB
vasions
Fu
con
Checkperformancedata:
lAS : Referto Flight Manual
lAS: I
SECnON5.2 (BA, BB,

Bl, L1) or SECfION
10 (B2)
.
Recordthe blade track andthe
value given by the aircraftnose
accelerometer:
a) lnstabiliredlevel flight at
Max. ContinuousPower
.Blade track deviationequalto

orlessthan 6 mm
.yz (a/cnose): equalto or
lessthan0.2ips
yziIilevel flight:
ips
I
.R
T1Ule
I
35082
8.3
99-38
..-
Page 11
"
.CI*:lEJIEJITA"
HELICOPTER
SHEET
No.
FLIGHT
MAN~A
-
CHECKSAFTER MRH, FREQUENCY

ADAPTEROR MAIN ROTORBLADE
REPLACEMENT
AS
350
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
Levelnight at Max. ContinuousPowerand

VNE (lowaltitude)
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDEDOR
RESULTSOBTAINED
LIMITATIONS
b)In 450turn,atthespeed
corresponding
to levelflight
atMax.Continuous
Power
.Blade trackdeviation:equal
to orlessthan12mm
i
.yz;(a/cnose):equaltoor
yz;in45tum:
lessthan0.35ips
ips
I
c)Fromlevelflight atMax.
Continuous
Power,
accelerate,
atconstant
power,upto VNE
Time
.No signifcant
variationofthe
vibratory
level.
d)Record3 .0.Pvibration
level. .3.0. Ppeaklevel: equalto or
I CorrectI
Usinganaccelerometer
lessthan0.2g (or 0.62ips
placedonhe flooralongthe forNR394rpm).
aircraftZ datumline,atthe
frontofthepilot'sseat,
~:
lftheresultisincorrect,
recordthevibratorylevelin
ie. if thelevelishigher
levelflight atMax.
than0.2g; theadjustContinuous Power.
I IncorrectI
ment of the cabin

anti-vibrators is to be
checked.
35082
-.99-38
-~~,:;
.
,;'-"of
8.3
Page 12
,~
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
)~. .f"
HEUCOPTER
SHEET
2
No.
AS
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
.CHECK
350

REPLACEMENT
VNE (low altitude)
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDED OR
LIMITATIONS
RESULTS OBTAINED
OF MAX. NR
Altitude greaterthan5000 ft
In autorotation,with collective
REMINDER:
pitch lever againstlow pitch
stopand IAS = 65 kt :
3..iQ..R2..:
Progressivelyincreasetheload WarningMax. NR : 410 rpm
factor, if necessary(pull-upor
turnto the]eft), in order tobring Max. NR : 430 rpm
therotor speed,transiently,to
theauralwarningthreshold(B2)
or to 4]0 rpm (BA, BB, B1,L]). .No significantvariationof the
.vibratory
levelduring or after
themanoeuvre(unbalance)
I Corra:t I
[lJM:orra:tI
[Corra:t
I IncorrectI
.
...R
35082
~.3
.99-38
Page 13
11
C"
::
.,
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
HELICOPTER
SHEET
No.
AS
350
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS

REPLACEMENT
Levelflight at Max. ContinuousPowerand
VNE (hi altitude)
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDEDOR
RESULTSOBTAINED
LIMITATIONS
HIGH ALTITUDE
Recommended
accordingto
thetypeofoperation.
!:evelflightatMax.Continuous
POwer.
7; "
A'ltirudeabout10000ft (or
max. altitudecompatiblewith
the operationalconstraints).
All air bleedsshutoff.

Recordparameters:
RefertoLimitationsin Flight
Manual,SECTION
2.1.
Hp r--1
OAT I
4Ng.
Ng
REMINDER:
NR : 393rpm:Z.1
14
,t
Np.
NR
.B2Venion
..Ex~t
BA-BB v...x.ns
Fuel
contents
Checkperformance
data:
IAS : Referto FlightManual, !AS: I

SECTION
5.2 (BA, BB,
BI, L1) or SECTION
10 (B2)
35082
8.3
99-38
rj(~~-;'C
,ft,
Page 14
-I,,~-
.COMPLEMENTARX
FlIGijTMANUAL
HELICOPTER
.SHEEr
No.
2
AS
350
TEST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
CHECKSAFI'ER MRH, FREQUENCY

REPLACEMENT
VNE (high altitude)
RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINDEDOR
LIMITATIONS
RESULTSOBTAINED
Recordthe blade track and

thevalue given by the
a/cnoseaccelerometer
a)In stabilizedlevel flight at

Max. ContinuousPower
.Blade track deviationequal

to or lessthan 12mm
.rz (a/c nose)equalto or less
than0.35 ips
rz in level flight:
[=::::J C=:J
b)In 300turn, at thespeed
correspondingto level flight
atMax. ContinuousPower
.No significantvariation of
thevibratorylevel.
c)From level flight atMax.

.No significantvariation of
ContinuousPower,accelerate, thevibratorylevel.
at constantpower,up to
I CoiT~t I
I htc:OFr~tI
I CoIT~t I
Ilncorr~t I
VNE.
.,j;.,
io,
:; ;!::
,-,.~f;
.N
35082
8.3
99-38
Page IS
"
..,"-""""""
J."
.,
MANUAL
~1
SHEET
No.
3
AS
'lmT
CHECKS
AFTER
MGB
REPLACEMENT
.
HELICOP1ER
PHASES
350
Groundnm-HoverOight
AND
RESULTS
REQUIREMENTS
TO
BE
OBTAINED
OR
~ULTS
OBTAINED
LIMITATIONS
Stan
engine
the Normal
Flight
as prescribed
Procedures
Manual,
Engage
in
of the
SEC110N
"HORN"
4. I.
pushbutton
MGB.P
warning
for NR
less
than
200
less
than
110 rpm
Aural
for
and 360
5 to
flightIGE
10 minutes'
(6 ft) ata
approaching
goes
out
NR
(warm)
(cold)
Correct
!Incorrect!
Correct
(Incorrect
continuous
between
250
rpm.
RefertoLimitationsinFlight
Manual,
SEC110N
Hp
I)
OAT
2.1.
the maximum
takeoff
weight.
Refoc
to Flight
SEC110N
hover
weight
rpm
warning
sound
Perform
light
f.Ng*
Manual,
Ng
5.1.
t4
J"
MGBoiI
temp.**
MGBoiI
.press.**
NR
* B2
**
Vmion
Optional
Fuel
-contents
Warning
lights:
MGB.P
Correct
I Incorrect
MGB.T
must
Engine
Rotor
and rotor
brake
from
remain
off.
shut-down
170 rpm
t equal
to or less
than
25 ~.
t:
350 B2
8.3
99-38
;0. ,
--.
Page
.
16
."COMPLEMENTARY
",
:t
I.
~~LIC;HT
MANUA
HELICOPTER
.SHEEr
TRH OR TAll.. ROTOR
BLADEREPLACEMENT
AS
350
TEST PHASFS AND
REQUIREMENTS
CHECKS AFTER
No.
Ground
run.TRHunbalance
RFSUL TS TO BE
OBTAINED
OR
RESULTSOBTAINED
LIMIT A nONS
CHECKOF1RH
UNBALANCE
Aircraft on the ground.
Full low pitch.

Increase NR up to 270 rpm.
Record unbalance value.
.If unbalance is greater than

1 ips, do not increase NR
beyond 270rpm.
ips
I
I
Time
I I
I I
I
I
.
Make required corrections.
Chordwise balancing:
Recordings
Sector A
Sector B
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Spanwisebalancing:
Recordings
.Blade
.Blade
When unbalance at NR =
270 rpm is less than I ips,
increase rotor speed up to
flight idle.
The correction to beapplied
sha1lbe a compromise between
the values found at the two
rotor speeds to obtain an
unbalance of less than 0.35 ips.
."N
ips
I
35082
8.3
99-38
"
Page 17
.."
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SHEEr No.
4 A
HELICOP1ER
AS
350
TESTPHASES
AND
.I
REQUIREMENTS
CHECKS
AFTER
TAn..ROTOR
DRIVE
SHAFT
REPLACEMENT
Tailrotordriveshaftbalancing
RESULTS
TOBE
OBTAINED
LIMITA
OR
RESULTS
OBTAINED
nONS
Aircraftontheground.
Fulllowpitch.
Record
theunbalance
Unbalance
lessthan0.8ips.
Unbalance:
value
.I
ips
II I.
Time
35082
8.3
99-38
'",
.
.
Page 18
..~
COMPLEME~T
HELICOP1ER
SHEET
No.
AS 350
TEST PHASES AND

REQUIREMENTS
CHECKS AFrER OPERAnONS

FLYING CONTROLS
ON
Hydraulicdlecks
RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINED OR
LIMIT AnONS
RESULTS OBTAINED
Stanengineasprescribedin
the Normal Proceduresof the HYD warning light goesout
Flight Manual, SECTION4.1. for NR :
lessthan200rpm (warm)
lessthan110rpm (cold)
Aircraft on theground.
Full low pitch,collective lever
I Correct I
IlIKorrect I
HYD warning light comeson.

The aural warningsounds.
I Correct I
I IncOl'rectI
Move thecyclic stick in the

longitudinal, thenin thelateral
axis by:t 10% of the total
stroke (;t 25rom).
The loads mustnot appear

before 3 or4 motions are
made.
I Correct I
IlIKorrect I
Set TEST HYD backto

Normal.
.The aural warningstops.

HYD warning light goesout.
I Correct I
IlIKorrect I
I Correct I
IlIKorrect I
I Correct I
IlIKorrect I
locked.
Test accumulatorsof main
servo-units:
Pressthe TEST HYD
pushbutton
Shut off hydraulicpressureon HYD warning light comeson.

collectivelever.
The aural warningsounds.
The
loads
appearimmediately
atthe
controls.
.
350BI-LlB2:
The loads at thepedalsremain
weak (accumulator)
Closethehydrauliccircuit.
The auralwarningkeeps
soundingaslong asHYD
warning light stayson
(2 to 3 sec.).
..N
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 19.
~" "
I:,,_'"~"'~
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
HELICOPTER
SHEET
5
No.
AS
TFST PHASESAND
REQUIREMENTS
ADJUSTMENTOFTHE
LOWprrCH STOP
350
CHECKSAFfER OPERAnONS ON
FLYING CONTROLS
Checkof the lowpitch stopadjustment

RESULTSTO BE
OBTAINED OR
LIMITA nONS
RESULTSOBTAINED
LIMrrAllONS:
Max.NR : 430rpm.
Altitudelowerthan5000ft
Performautorotation
with
collective lever againstlow
pitchstop.
IAS : 65kt
OOIE: Selecttheweightandaltitudevalueswhichallowan NRbetween
395and415rpm
to beobtained
atfull lowpitch.
Do notpullbackthefuelflow controllever.
Recordthe following
Hp
parameters:
OAT
NR in compliance
with the
valuescomputed
bymeansof
Figure 1 + 0 rpm
+ 10
Fuelcontents
Computed
weight
NR obtained
DesignNR
.
.
I
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 20
.-'
-COMPLEMENTARY
SHEET No.
5'
HELICOP1ER
AS
350
-'
FLIGHT
MANUAL
CHECKSAFfER OPERAll0NS ON
FLYINGCONTROLS
Check
ofthelowpitdlstopadjustment
30
20
1.
(trim in)
(rpm)
00
80
60
.340
320
50
40
30
20
10 ~
0
}.<
0
-10 0
(D
-20
0
0
,.,
-30
ci
~
s
-40
FIGURE 1
.N
35082
8.3
99-38
Page 21
--w",,-
I
~
i
'....COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANUAL
0-
ct
SHEET
No.
FLYING
CONTROLS
.
HELICOP1ER
AS
CHECKS
350
TEST PHASES AND

REQUIREMENTS
AFTER
OPERA nONS
ON
Level night at Max. Continuous Power
RESULTS TO BE
OBTAINED OR
LIMITAnONS
RESULTS
OBTAINED
Level flight at Max. Continuous

Power
Altitude equal to or less than
3000 ft
Record parameters:
Manual,
SECllON
2.1.
Referto Limitations in Flight
Hp c=:J
OAT ~
~Ng*
Ng
.~
REMINDER:
t4
NR: 393rpm:t I
Nf**
NR
.B2
Version
..ExceptBA-BB
v-ions
Fuel
contents
Check perfonnance data:
IAS : Refer to Flight Manual

SECTION 5.2 (BA. BB.
BI, LI) or SEcrION
10 (B2).
IAS
Vibratory level
I Correct I
IlDCOI'rect
I
350 82
8.3
99-38
.
.
Page 22
.
.
..COMP~EMENTARY
P
r
I c,
f.
_FLIGHT
MAN
HELICOP1ER
SHEEr
6
No.
AS
CHECKAFTERGENERA
TOROR
ELECTRICALMASTERBOX REPLACEMENT
350
TEST PHASES AND
RESULTS TO BE
REQUIREMENTS
OBTAINED
OR
RESULTS
OBTAINED
LIMITATIONS
ENGINE AT FLIGHf IDLE
RATING
BATT switch OFF.
Check GEN. voltage
U = 28.5 V approx.
CUT
Operate
OUT
thepushbutton
EMERG.
All
350power
BA -BB
supplies
:
are cut off,
I CAlrrect I
I IncorrKt I
I ~t
I Incorrect I
I ~t
I Incorrect I
I CAlrrect I
I Incorrect I
except:
Ng, t4, NR, forward dome
light
,
350BI-Ll:
All power supplies are cut off,
except:
Ng, NR, forward dome light
~:
All power supplies are cut off,
except:
NR, forward domelight
..
I
.N
35082
8.3
,
99-38
.!
Page 23
"
COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANU~L
.
.
HELICOP1ER
SHEET
No.
SYSTEMCHECKS
AS 350
THE PERFORMANCEDATA OF mE SYSTEMSTO BE CHECKED

UPONCOMPLImON OF A MAJOR INSPEcrlON ARE INDICATED
IN mE STANDARDPRACTICESMANUAL (MTC)
Ch Sect Subj Task
-Radio-communication
20
07
07
501
-Radio-navigation
20 07
07
502
20
07
07
503
20 07
07
504
.-Navigation
-Autopilot andassociatedcouplings
I
35082
8.3
99-38
-~
c"
,--ii,
f
"
.
.
Page 24
COMPLEMENTARYF~rGHT
MANUAL
SECTION
8.4
.DAILY
OPERATINGCHECKS
The daily checks must be conducted in accordance with standard aircraft
practices
and the appropriate
manufacturer's
recommendations,
by Qualified
maintenance personnel or by a specially
trained
pilot.
Any alteration
or
detailed
inspection
to determine serviceability
as a result of these checks
must be done under the supervision
of a properly
endorsed Aircraft
Maintenance Engineer and duly entered in the Aircraft
Log Book.
R
R
NOTE:
R
R
Some certification
from the operators.
may require
specific
Qualifications
DAILY OPERATINGCHECKSAPPLICABLE TO THE BASIC AIRCRAFT

Daily
-check
-check
-check
1:1
authorities
helicopter
operation
requires
three
checks:
before the first

flight
of the day,
in conjunction
with flight,
after the last flight
of the day.
Checks Before
The First
FliGht
of the Day (BFF)
~:
IF THE AIRCRAFT HAS BEEN GROUNDED
FOR MORETHAN ONE WEEK, BEFORE
OPERATINGTHE FLYING CONTROLS,WIPE THE SERVO-CONTROLPISTON RODS WITH
A RAG IMPREGNATEDWITH SERVICE FLUID.
-Check that the area is clean and clear.
-Remove the blade socks, if applicable.
-Perform
the following
checks.
.4
.'
1
~
~
.N
I \.
3_1d.. /'
350 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 1
II
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.
STATION 1
-Transparent
-P~tot
-Sldesllp
panels
Cleanliness
~ea~s ~nd static

lndlcator
vents
...Blan~i~g
Condltlon
cover,
drain
removed
STATION 2
-Engine
air intake
-Tail
pipe cover
-MGB
.Transmission
deck and engine..
-Fuel
tank
-Filler
cap
-LH baggage compartment door
-Lower
cowlings
-Af~
baggage compartment
-Maln
rotor blades
Blanking cover
Removed
Oil level
Condition,
Purge
Closed
Loads tied
Closed
No foreign
No dents
removed
cleanliness
down,
matter,
door locked
closed
STATION 3
-Tail
-TGB
-Tail

rotor
guard
(if
fitted)
Security
Oil level
...Condition,
security
STATION 4
-Tail
-Tail
rotor blades
Condition
Security
of skin
STATION 5
-RH baggage compartment
.Battery
.Loads
."
Open
Connection
Tied down,
Close and Jock compartment
...Closed
-Ground
power receptacle
door
-Engine
compartment:
Transmission
deck and engine..
.Engine
oil tank
.Close
the engine cowling.
R
Condition,
Oil level
Correctly
cleanliness
locked
STATION 6
-Collective
pitch control
and yaw pedals
",.",."."
-Gas generator
control
-Rotor
brake control
-Fuel
shut-off
control
-Fire
extinguisher
Free travel
Free movement
Free movement
Forward position,
In place
snap wire
350 82
fitted
8.4
99-3B
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
Fl,JGHT MANUAL
1.2
1.2.1
Check after
the
Last FliQht
of the Dav (ALF)
General
This check maintains

the
out a visual
or tactile
assembly so as to detect
but does not require
the
Pay particular
attention
aircraft
flightworthy.
It consists
in carrying
examination
of the condition
of a component, an
defects which could affect
correct
operation.
use of any special techniques
or tooling.
to
the elements
marked with
an asterisk
"*".
NOTE A : Magnetic plugs which do not have an electric

indicating
system
may be checked for metal chips during the ALF check before
R
the 30-flying
hour limit.
NOTE 8 : This check for defects
can be performed
before the 30-flying
hour limit.
1.2.2
during
the ALF check

R
: This check for defects

can be performed during the ALF check
before the 30-flying
hour or 150 operating
cycle limit.
ALF check
IMPORTANT: FOR THE ARRIELIDI

ENGINES NOT MODIFIED TU 202.
WHENSHUTTING DOWNTHE ENGINE AFTER THE LAST FLIGHT OF THE
DAY, CONFIRMTHAT THEREIS NO ABNORMALNOISE D~RING THE
AUTOROTATIONOF THE GAS GENERATOR.THIS CHECKCAN BE
PERFORMED
ON COMPLETIONOF A CRANKINGOPERATIONOF NO MORE
THAN 5 SECONDS, IMMEDIATELYAFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN.
R
R
R
R
R
R
STATION1
R
R
-All
transparent
panels
Cleanliness
(clean if
-Door
jambs, canopy arch members. No faults
nor cracks
-Cabin
access door
Security
and correctly
-Pitot
heads and static
vents ...Fit
blanking covers
required)
locked
.N
350 82
8.4
99-38
e:age 3
(
?'
~ :
-
"~
.
i
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANU~L
~o
,{
,:
*'
STATION
2
-lH
baggage compartment
door
Condition,
objects
-LH
landing
gear
.'...'..'
.Shock absorber
.Wear resistance
plate
-MGB cowlings
-MGB oil
-Transmission
deck
-MGB suspension bars
-Servo-controls,
hydraulic
system
-DUNLOP servo-controls
-Hydraulic
filter
-Hydraulic
reservoir
-Coo1in~
fan
-Fuel
fl1ter
-Universal
joint
assembly
'..
security,
tied
down,
open,
close
Condition,
absence of leaks
Condition
Open: condition
of locking
Check level
Cleanliness
Security
lock
Ifj
R
R
systems
Security,
no leaks, lines
Security,
no leaks, no cracks on
R
the body leading to seepage
R
Clogging indicator
(if fitted)
not R
visible
R
Check fluid
level,
security,
tightness
Motor.security,
con~ition
of blades .
Securlty
; check palnt marks;
clogging
indicator
not visible
Security,
pins in place and locked
8.4
99-38
';$
",,'
all
Condition
350 B2
"
and
.
.
Page 4
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
.EJ
.1.2
Check after
the Last Flight
of the Day (ALF)
.
G)
,,[,
.loss
~
tit
STATION 1
Added the following

-Sliding
window
checks:
Free from faults,
of slide.
cracks, unbonding,

FROMTHE MANUAL
AFTER
INCORPORATION
OF MOD. 072573 and 072582.
350B2
8.4
99-38
Page 3
*RC*
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
.
.
.
[~~~
STATION
2
-Bidirectional
cross beam
.
Checkfor cracks on laminate
bearing upper face, on MGBpick-up
side.
Refer to NQIU.
to",
I'
"'"
CAUTION:THIS PAGE
MUSTONLYBE REMOVED
FROM
THEMANUAL
AFTER
INCORPORATION
OFMODIFICATION
072720.
350 B2
tit
~
8.4
99-38
Page 4
*RC*
-.
COMPLEMENTARYFLIGHTMANUAL
.I
RR7A I
STATION 2
.
.
.
After the check "universal joint assembly", add the following check:
-Firewall
Condition
35082
8.4
02-14
Page 4
*RR*
I
.C~PLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANU
-MAIN
ROTOR SHAFT
* Swashplate bearing:
check to
be performed within 5 min
after rotor stops "..""'."
.Scissors,
swivel
swashplates, rods,
bearings
.Swashplatelpitch
change rod
end-fitting
interface
* Pitch change rods

PIN 350A37.1508.00 to .05
,...".,."
* Star
* Star recesses
* Spherical thrust bearings
and frequency adapters
* 2-layer
frequency adapter.
.Self-lubricating
bearings
.Bushes in the ends of the
STARFLEX
hub anms
-Flared
Condition,
security;
pointer
play
housing
-Shock mount
magnetic
plug...
no friction
No traces of contact, paint scaling

on swashplate attachment yokes
Rod upper and lower end-fitting
paint
marks must be visible and aligned
* Rotor shaft PIN 350A37.1076.00

to .06 inclusive. All visible
section of the shaft,
particularly
under the hub ...Condition
of paint,
crazing, blistering,
tool marks.
-MAIN ROTORHUB
No abnonnal heating felt when touched

with hand, no grease runs, no change
in colour nor scaling of paint.
Security,
no craks,
corrosion nor
general condition
No delamination (splinters)
No cracks
No elastomer faults, unbonding,
scratches, blisters,
extrusion,
cracks
...Check for clearance between the
adapter and the metal shim.
Refer to NOTEB
No debris-nor-play.
Refer to ~
No space between the adhesive
bead and the bush.
Refer
to NOTE B.
No metal chips.
Refer
to ~~
Security
350 B2
8.4
9~
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANU~L
.
* MAIN ROTORBLADES
Attachment,
-Engine
air intake .."'.."
.Manufacturer's
air intake
-Engine
cowling
-Engine
mount
-Engine
.Engine
and accessories
.Systems
,
.Controls
condition
of
polyurethane
protection
coating and of
the zone of tabs (visually
inspect for
debonding, blisters,
scratches,
cracks
dents and distortion).
On the stainless
steel leading edge
strip,
inspect for holes (erosion),
splaying
and dents.
Security,
..Condition
of seal
Open:
condition
of locking systems
Condition,
security
General condition,
No leakage
cleanliness
Interference
.Transmission
-Freewheel
deck drain
-Gas generator
ARRIEL 1 D1 engine
modified TU202
-Tail
-Aft
general
not
pipe
baggage compartment
door.
Not plugged
Operate from the tail
rotor:
the free turbine
should be driven
when the tail
rotor turns clockwise.
When the tail
rotor turns counterclockwise,
the freewheel should desynchronize
(less important load).
Refer to NOTE B
When the ~less
than lS0.C,
turning
the compressor by hand,
confirm that the gas generator
rotates
freely
and that there is no
abnormal noise.
Security,
Security,
closing
...
R
R
R
R
R
.
R
R
R
R
R
STATION3
-Horizontal
stabilizer,
tail
bumper
-TGB
-Tail
rotor guard (if
fin,
fitted)
".
Security,
Oil level,
S~curity,
condition
no leaks
condition
STATION 4
=~~
.Bellcrank
.Sealant
hinge
pin
bead
.Magnetic
-Horizontal
tail
Security
by applying
drive shaft
No Play
plug
stabilizer,
bumper
a load
Condition
No metal
chips.
Refer to ~
fin,
Security,
condition
350 B2
8.4
99-38
;-:;;'
~
on the
Page 6
MANUAL
* TAIL
ROTOR BLADES...
Attachment,
* Tail
rotor
blade
.Laminated
.Blade
-THR
.Pitch
~
.Paint
spar
horn
condition
line
or
emergence
No play
security
control
on
and
in the
forI
debonding,
blisters,
scratches,
cracks,
dents
and distortion).
On the stainless
steel
leading
edge
strip,
inspect
for holes
(erosion).
splaying
and dents.
Check for
abnonnal
spar noise
when
Condition,
change
of
coating
inspect
the rotor
is
bent inwards
and
outwards
to fonn an arc.
Refer
to NOTE B
No bonding-separation,
deep crack
"'.'.".'.'.'.""
pitch
change
spacer/baffle
.Pitch
change
rod
bearing
,."..."."".",
.;
'"
half-bearing
control
No
misalignment.
swivel
"'.
Check,
(Refer
to~)
:
.the
absence
of play
(J) by twisting
the blades
back and forth.
low
amplitude
movements
(A) (Refer
to
Figure
3).
.the
condition
of the ball
joint.
by visual
inspection.
That
no Teflon
material
has
squeezed
out.
That
the ball
shows no signs
of burnishing
or scoring.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
~
>
~
*
BALANCE ARM HINGE:
.Type
2 :
.Type
3 :
rubber
-rail
boom
flapping
bearing
Figure
(Flapping
hinge
bearing)
according
type:
.Type
1 : cups on either
of the pin
""".""".,.",
general
polyurethane
protection
trailing
edge
(visually
to
bearings
outside
side
Visual
'"
cone
play
No cracks,
fairing
,..",.".""
and
no metallic
particles
No play
extrusion.
bronze
chips
Security
350
B2
8.4
02-03
Page
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
STATION5
-Battery
-RH bagg~ge compartment door
-RH landlng
gear
.Shock
absorber
.Wear resistance
plate
-MGB cowling
-Transmission
deck
-MGB
.Magnetic
plug
-MGB suspension
bar
-Servo-controls,
hydraulic
system
-DUNLOP servo-controls.
Security
Secu~i~y,
condition,
locking
Condltlon
Condition,
no leaks
Condition
Open: condition
of locking
systems
Cleanliness
Leaktightness
No metal chips.
Refer to ~
Security
Security,
No cracks
seepage.
Oil level,
Security,
...Security,
Condition,
no leaks,
lines
on the body leading
to
-.t
R
R
-Engine
oil tank, system
security,
tightness
-Engine
oil cooler
no leaks
-Universal
joint
assembly..
pin fitted
-Engine
mount
security
-Engine
.Engine
and accessories...
...General
condition,
cleanliness
.Systems
No leaks
.Controls
Interference
.Transmission
deck drain
Not plugged
* MAGNETIC PLUG
-ARRIEL
without
-Aft
engine magnetic plugs

electrical
indication
reduction
gear magnetic
-Forward
reduction
plug (optional)
-Engine
..No
metal
reduction
plug.
chips on forward and aft

gear magnetic plugs.
Refer
to ~
Refer
to ~
R
R
R
gear magnetic
and MGBcowlings..
Closing,
locking
STATION6
-Sea~
-Cabln
Security,
pin ~n place
General cleanllness
N8
350 B2
8.4
99-38
-~---
Page 8
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
.I
RR7A I
STATION 5
After the check "universal joint assembly", add the following check:
-Firewall
.
.
""",
"
".'
Condition
35082
8.4
02-14
Page
*RR*
"""'."..""-".~"
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
STATION
5
, '
* MAGNETICPLUG:
-ARRIEL engine magnetic plugs without electrical
Replace the existing
"Aft
reduction
indication
text:
gear magnetic plug
REFERTO NOTEA"
gear magnetic plug
Check every 8 flying

and daily"
as follows:
"Aft reduction
hours
<)
.
~
CAUTION: THIS
PAGEMUST
ONLY
BETU
REMOVED
INCORPORATION
OF
MOD.
232. FROMTHE MANUALAFTER.
(:)
350 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 8
*RC*
---
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUA}."
[=~J
.,Q
STATION
5
-Bidirectional
cross beam
Check for cracks on laminate bearing

upper face on MGBpick-up side.
Refer to OOI.LC..
()
i
i

FROMTHE MANUALAFTER
INCORPORATION
OF MODIFICATION072720.
~
~
~
350 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 8
*RC*
.
.
.COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
DAILY OPERATINGCHECKSFOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

For each optional
equipment
check must include:
-a
-a
on the
helicopter,
the daily
check before the first

flight
of the day.
check after
the last flight
of the day.
R
These checks consist

in performing a visual
examination
equipment item in order to check its aeneral condition
aircraft,
in particular
for:
-windshield
-ferry
-blade
-sand
2.1
of each optional
and security
on the
wipers,
-fire
extinguisher,
-ski
installation,
-air
ambulance installation
-flares,
-cargo
swing,
(stretcher).
tank,
protection
filter.
The optional
below.
against
equipment
sand,
items
which require
AIR EOUIPEMENTor BREEZE electric

The hoist
-Check
item installed
hoist
must be checked by the hoist

that
the hoisting
blocks
to be performed
during
checks are listed
installation
operator.
and snap hooks function
-Perform
a hoist functional
check:
0.6 m (2 ft)
and then rewind it :
contact
functions
correctly.
-Check
specific
correctly.
unwind the cable over approximately

check that the "Up" end of travel
the ALF check before
the 30-hour
operating
limit.
.N
350B2
8.4
99-38
-:
-.-J
p.age
9
c
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
AIR EQUIPEMENTHOIST fitted

with
system:
Complete
the check with
-Switch
on the electric
-Unwind
the cable
-Wind
an end-of-travel
microswitch
monitoring
the following:
hoist.
by approximately
one to two metres.
the cable:
As the cable winds up, check that:

-the
GREEN light
is LIT,
-the
RED light
is EXTINGUISHED.
-On completion
of the hoisting
the hoist operator's
grip.
.During
-the
-the
maintain
the "Up" order
using
the "Up" order, check that:

GREEN light
is EXTINGUISHED,
RED light
is EXTINGUISHED.
-Maintain
the
push-button:
.During
-the
-the
operation,
"Up" order
on the hoist
operator's
grip
and press
the test
the "UP" order, check that:

GREEN light
is EXTINGUISHED,
RED light ILLUMINATES.
-Check to be Derformedevery 2Shoistina

.Free
rotation
of the hook.
.Condition
of the cable.
.Operation
of the cable extraction
-Operations
operations :
mechanism.
to be Derformed every 50 hoistina operations :
.Grease
the hoist brake assembly.
.Clean
then grease the cable winding
screw.
N8
350 82
8.4
99-38
",,",
~,
Page 10
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
2.2
Emeraency floatation
aear installation
Check before the first
flioht
-Place the emergency floatation

safety pin in place.
-Check that the circuit-breakers
engaged.
Check after
the last
gear in low position,
pins locked,
in the aft baggage compartment are
flioht
If the aircraft
has flown at low altitude over the sea, wash the
inflation
cylinders and the cradle assemblies.
2.3
Floatation
oear installation
Check before
-Visually
and free
-Check
the first
flioht
check the protective

from tears.
that
covering and that the floats
are clean
the pressure in each compartment is 0.300 to 0.450 bar.
Check after
the last
flioht
-After
alighting
in salty water, wash with soft water.
-After
landing on a muddy field,
wash with soft water.
I
!
Parkina
Park in the shade, if possible,

2.4
Crop sprayino
the floats
against the heat.
installation
This optional equipment requires the presence of qualified

perform the daily operating checks.
2.5
Enaine fire
-Check that
2.6
extinauishino
2.7
staff
to
system
the pressure of the cylinders
is correct.
Carao swina
-After
the last flight,
at the lock input.
and protect
lightly
grease (G354) the end of the load hook
SSg Wire antenna installation
-Check
the condition
and attachment of the wire antenna.
350 B2
8.4
02-03
Page 11-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
.3.1
OPERATION IN COLD WEATHER
General
This SECTIONgroups all the operating procedures to be followed when

the aircraft
is used in particular
climatic conditions,
such as cold
weather and snow. Aircraft
servicing does not require any special tools
or systematic replacement.
3.2
General RecOlmlendations
For rational operation of the aircraft
recommendedto carry out the following
in cold weather and snow, it is

basic operations:
-Remove ice or snow deposits from the whole of the aircraft,

particularly
at hinges and movementtransmitting
items (main rotor,
rotor mast, tail drive and tail rotor, flight controls, engine
controls).
-When the aircraft
recommended
that:
.either
regular
has been subjected to very low temperatures,
it is
8
ground
runs
be carried
out
every
two
hours
for
temperatures of about -20.C and every hour for lower temperatures.

.or preheating of the engine, transmission assemblies and cabin be
effected before take-off (although the helicopter is capable of
carrying out engine start up and rotor spinning at temperatures down
to -40.C).
During the preheating operation, carefully wipe out the deicing water
to avoid all water accretion on the aircraft
and water re-icing as soon
as preheating is over, particularly
on the AIR INTAKESand components
located above the air intakes.
PRACTICAL ADVISES
-For the preheating and deicing operations, use appropriate heaters in

good condition only. Do not refuel the aircraft
while the heaters are
functioning.
.
-During the preheating operation, do not leave the aircraft
unwatched.
Keep an extinguisher available at hand.
-Avoid directing hot air towards the following parts of the aircraft;
tanks and fuel, oil and hydraulic fluid lines.
3.3
Lubricants
to be used for Transmission AsseniJlies
Below -2S .C, do not use AIR 3525 (0155) oil for transmission
assemblies without initial
preheating.
The other oils authorized in Section LIMITATIONSof the basic Flight
may be used down to -40 .C without preheating.
Manual
MQIE : It should be remembered that when changing the oil,

the system is
first
to be flushed
in accordance with the recommendations
in the
maintenance publications.
N8
350 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 12
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
3.4
Use of Batteries
for Startinq
During long periods of inoperation it is recommendedthat the battery

be stored in a warm area.
If a ground power unit is not available, start-up may be carried out
using the aircraft battery or two aircraft batteries connected in
parallel.
The starting envelope is related to the temperature and is indicated
in the supplement instruction for operation in cold weather.
3.5
Preparation for Fliqht

Independently of the inspections prescribed in sections 8.4.1
8.4.2, perform the following operations and inspections:
and
Main rotQr blades

Removethe blade socks, then remove snow if need be and, if necessary
remove ice from blades using hot air flow at a temperature not exceeding
80.C.
Main rotor hub and mast

Removeice from the swashplates, the scissors,
rotor head spring antivibrator.
the servo controls
and the
Power plant
-Remove the air intake cover and the exhaust nozzle blank after removing
snow from the aircraft surface.
-Remove snow and ice accretion in the vicinity
of the air intake, on
either side of the screen and inside the engine air intake duct (remove
the air intake screen if necessary).
-It
is imperative that the air intake be clean

Manually and visually check for snow and ice in$ide the air intake
duct up to the first stage of the compressor:
In case of icing:
.remove ice using a wooden or plastic scraper,
.carefully
wipe the surface using a cloth soaked with isopropyl
alcohol.
.inspect drains, unblancked scuppers; check for snow and ice on
vent and static ports
.N
350 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 13
i-
c-"'
_oJ: _.COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
~
Tail
rotor
-Remove the blade sockets,

(blades,
-Manually
pitch
rods...).
rotate
the
then remove ice from the TRH assembly

.
tail
rotor
so
at least, then check:

.the swashplate rotation (rotor
.the TRH rotation,
.the freewheel operation.
that
the
main
rotor
performs
turn
brake not blocked),
Structure
-Remove the cabin cover once the inspection is completed.
-Make sure that the windshield wiper has not remained stuck on the
canopy.
Fliaht
-Before
controls
-Enaine
controls
operating the controls,
of the cabin.
-Operate
the controls
.
progressively,
controls, fuel flow control

complete travel.
It.js
tail
it is recommendedto heat-up the inside

then operate
and collective
the rotor
pitch control
recommended~ot to oerform extensive travel

rotor controls.
brake
over their
of the cyclic
and
Fuel system bleedina

Do not bleed the fuel system under a temperature equal to or lower than
-10 'C where valve seals prove inefficient.
..
3S0 B2
8.4
99-38
Page 14
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.6
Check after
Last Flight
of the Day
The operations
described
in SECTIONS8.4.1 and 8.4.2 are to be completed
by the following
actions
-Inspection
of the engine magnetic plugs should be perfonned within
30
min after the rotor has stopped rotating,
in order to avoid seal
damaging.
-Care
must be taken not to leave doors open.
-Install
the air intake cover and exhaust nozzle blank.
-When the aircraft
is parked in an unsheltered
area it is recommended to
apply anti-icing
materials
and to carry out the aircraft
parking and
mooring.
!:1lli : ANTI-ICING MATERIALS

-Anti-icing
fluid
-isopropyl
alcohol
as per AIR 3660 or deicing
as per AIR 3565 (MIL-A-6091).
-Anti-icing
sealing
compound B.437.
-Anti-icing
comPound E.57.
-Anti-rain
material
S.P.R. G7.
-Anti-icing
material
to be applied on blades: Kilfrost
ABC or
Kilfrost
DF.
CAUTION:
-REFER TO GENERALINSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF

ANTI-ICING MATERIALS.
-ANTI-ICING
MATERIALS
CAN DAMAGE THE HELICOPTER
COMPONENTS..
-USE RECOMMENDED
AND APPROVEDANTI-ICING
ONLY.
MATERIALS
.
.N
350 B2
8.4
99-38
P~ge 15
:...
";
>'l
---"'
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 9I
.OPERATIONAL
DATA
CONTENTS
9.1
RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR CARGOSLING OPERATIONS
9.2
EMERGENCYLOCATORTRANSMITTERS
9.3
SCHERMULYFLARES
9.4
AIR AMBULANCEINSTALLATION
.9.S
.
.
SWIVELLING LANDING LIGHT

9.6
RETRACTABLESWIVELLING LANDING LIGHT
9.7
SEARCHLIGHT
9.8
FUELTRON FUEL FLOWMETER
9.9
SKI INSTALLATION
9.10
FREONAIR CONDITIONER
9.11
FAURE HERMANFUEL FLOWMETER
9.12
WANDELAND GOLTERMANN
HAILERS
9.27 MINI-HUMS SYSTEM
350 B2
9.0.P6
02-03
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLI GHT MANUAL
SECTION 9.1
RECOMMENDATIONS;~
~
SLINGOPERATIONS
1
PERSONNEL TRAINING
Cargo sling
considerable
operations
experience
may only be conducted

with their
aircraft.
No pilot
may make solo cargo-carrying
accomplished
such operations
in the
informed
:
position
on the ground considering
the
direction
in which to move away;
hook-up
signals operation;
to be used or radio
instructions;
-protective
-the
n~ber
-the
manner
who already
flights
without
first
company of an instructor.
Mechanics on ground duty must be fully

new operation,
in particular
as regards
-their
-the
-the
-hand
by pilots
having
by the pilot
proposed
equi~ent
: helmets.
9loves.
glasses
of round trips
between replenisi"lnents
of retrieving
slings
and nets.
(if
;
have
before
fl ight
each
path
applicable)
2 MANDATORY
PRE-OPERATIONAL
OiECKS
2.1
Helicopter
Condit10n
In addition
to the usual examination
of the helicopter.
must be carefully
examined and the mechanism checked
operation.
2.2
Condition
of Sling
The cables,
strops
and shackles
the maximun anticipated
load.
Preparation
of
Condition
2.5
Total
Weight
Any worn or
of carrying
three
times
Loads
of Loading
Remove or tie
thoroughly.
must be capable
Make sure that all participants

are
loads.
Ensure that
the method of suspension
2.4
the release
unit
correct
release
Equipment
The nets.
strops
and slings
must be examined
frayed components are to be discarded.
2.3
for
down all
and Unloading
that
of Helicopter
might
with
well
aware
of the
weight
of
the
is understood.
Areas
be displaced
by the
rotor
downwash.
Load
Define
maximum acceptable
load compatible
with terrain
configuration
and atmospheric
conditions.
Unless the platforms
are in clear
surroundings
and fairly
large.
consider
as maxim~
weight that which
can be held in hover O.G.E.
in calm air over the higher
of the two
platforms
(take-off
or landing).
35082
9.1
89-17
Page 1!
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
AIRBORNELOADS
Heavy loads, such as bags of cement or drLms of kerosen, which are carried
in a net, present no particular
problem.
Special precautions must be taken in the case of bulky loads, which have a
tendency to oscillate
and even to "float"
during transport on the sling.
PermeabilitY to air can have a stabilizing
effect on a bulky load:
for
example, a teleferic
car should be carried with both its doors open.
Never carry an airfoil
alone:
up into the tail rotor.
there
is a great risk
of the airfoil
flying
If several cables are used to sling the load, they must be long enough to
form an angle of less than 45' between cables at the point of suspension
under the helicopter,
experience shows that oscillation
of the load is
thus less likely to occur.
On the other hand, if the load is slung on a single sling cable: it is
preferable that a fairly
short cable be used as there is then less risk
of the load swinging, and it is easier to judge the height of the load
during approach.
For the retrieval
of crashed helicopters
a lifting
ring on the rotor shaft.
it
is generally
possible
to use
Airplanes are carried using straps passing under the fuselage or under
the wings. The cables must be attached in such a way that the airplane
is in a slightly
nose-down attitude when the helicopter
is in the hover.
4
IN-FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS
After hooking on the load the ground mechanic is to check the position of
the sling cables then move away. The pilot must then make sure that the
mechanic has moved clear and then confirm by signs that he may lift
off
the load.
Power must be applied slowly
itself
above the load.
A vertical take-off
ground or striking
Carefully
must be made, avoiding

any obstacle.
avoid flying
If the load starts
enough to allow the helicopter
over houses. vehicles
to swing,
to centre
dragging the load along the

and persons.
reduce speed.
Approach must be made head into the wind with gradual reduction in
airspeed, and transition
into hover high enough above the ground to
eliminate the risk of dragging the load.
Set the load down, then reduce collective
pitch sufficiently
to slacken
the cables before opening the release unit hook; this also allows the
pilot to ensure that the load is deposited. If the cables are long enough,
move sideways a little
before opening the hook, to prevent the ring and
tackle from falling
onto the freight.
350
B2
9.1.
89-17
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
Even after the mechanic has signalled that the load is released. move
away as if it were not;
this is an advisable precaution against possible
misinterpretation
of signals.
Never flyaway with an emptynet or an unballasted sling.
.
.
.350
82
9.1
89-17
Page 3
SECTION
1.
9.2
JOLLIET JE2 EMERGENCY

LOCATORTRANSMmER
GENERAL
The JOLLIET
J.E.2
emergency
locator
simultaneously
on the international
243.0
MHz) to aid
helicopter
search
The unit
operates
automatically
operated
manually
by means of
or by means of a remote
control
MANUAL
transmits
radio
beacon
signals
distress
frequencies
(121.5
MHz and
and rescue
operations.
in the
switch
switch.
event
of crash
impact.
It
may be
on the transmitter
front
panel,
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
-A
locator
beacon is attached
to the structure
and is located
inside
the rear
baggage compartment.
-A
beacon
location
label
is attached
to the outside
of the aircraft.
-A
control
switch
is fitted
underneath
the instrument
panel
on the
pilot's
side.
-An
antenna
is located
on the tail
boom.
-A
label
fitted
close
to the switch
reads:
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
FOR AVIATION
EMERGENCY USE ONLY
3~
3.1
Pre-fliQht
On the
inspection
instrument
-Check
that
remote
control
switch
is
set
to
"AUTO".
On transmitter:
-For
old
.Check
.Press
generation
locator
beacons:
that
the switch
is set
to "AUTO"
in the "RESET" push-button.
-For
new generation
.Set
the switch
.Set
the switch
panel:
(NG) locator
beacons:
to "OFFjRST"
for 2 to 3 seconds
back to "AUTO".
35082
9.2
02-03
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
3.2
Pre-fliaht
.
.
checks
-Select
the international
distress frequency on the aircraft
VHF or UHF
system.
-Set switch beneath instrument panel to "MANU"for approximately one
R
second.
-The transmitter
output signal should be audible in the headphones.
-Set switch back to "AUTO".
R
3.3
Post-fliaht
check
After landing, ensure that the emergency locator

been accidentally
switched on.
4
4.1
transmitter
has not
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Automatic oDeration
The transmitter
is actuated automatically
the switch is set to "AUTO".
Imcact detector
in the event of an impact if

R
reset:
-New generation locator beacon (NG) :

.Select
the locator switch to "OFF/RST", hold it
2 or 3 seconds then select it back to "AUTO".
in this
position
for
-Old generation locator beacon:

.The impact detector may be reset by means of the "RESET" push-button
located on the transmitter;
the reset push-button also stops the
automatic actuation of the transmitter.
4.2
4.3
Manual oDeration
The unit
may be actuated manually by setting
Portable
ODeration
The transmitter
the switch to "MANU".
may be used on the ground as follows:
-Remove the transmitter

from its mount.
-Select
an unobstructed area.
-Pullout
the built-in
antenna.
-Hold the unit upright with the antenna on top.
-Switch on the transmitter
by setting the switch to "MANU".
350
82
99-48
9.2
.
Page 2
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 9.2
2.
1
ELT 96 EMERGENCY
LOCATORTRANSMITTER
GENERAL
The ELT 96 radio beacon is an emergency transmitter
which
the helicopter
in an emergency. It transmits
simultaneously
international
frequencies
(121,5 -243 -406
MHz).
is
used to locate
on the
The transmitter
starts
operating
automatically
in case of impact or in case
of cable breakage.
It may be switched on manually via the switch located
on the top face of
the transmitter
or via the remote control
switch located
under the
instrument
panel.
COMPONENTLOCATION
-A transmitter
attached to the structure
inside
the rear cargo hold.
-An
external
label indicating
transmitter
location.
-An AUTO -MANU control
switch located
under the instrument
panel on the
pilot's
side.
-An AUTO TEST/RESET pushbutton
located
next to the control
switch.
-A red XMIT ALERT indicator
light
located
on the instrument
panel on the
pilot's
side.
-An antenna on the LH side of the cabin roof.
-A label
fitted
close to the switch reads:
EMERGENCYLOCATORTRANSMITTER FOR AVIATION EMERGENCY
USE ONLY.
3~
3.1
Pre-fliQht
InsDection
Check the following

-The
remote control
CAUTION:
under the instrument

panel:
switch is set to "AUTO".
IF THE SWITCH IS SET TO "AUTO" AND THE CONNECTORIS UNP~UGGED,

THE TRANSMITTER WILL OPERATE.
Check the following

on the transmitter:
-The
connector
is plugged in.
-The
switch is set to "AUTO".
N
350 82
9.2
02-03
Page 3
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
..
3.2
Pre-fliaht
Checks
-Tune in to 121.5 or 243 MHz.

-Press and hold pressed the "AUTOTEST/RESET"pushbutton.
The following should occur:
.The red "XMIT ALERT" light comeson.
.The transmitter
should be heard on the distress frequency.
~
3.3
: If the indicator light flashes, it indicates

are faulty or the transmitter is inoperative.
Post-fliaht
Check
After landing, check for untimely transmitter

ALERT" light should be extinguished).
Check the following
-The
that the batteries
operation
(the red "XMIT
on the transmitter:
switch is set to "OFF".
4 OPERATING
PROCEDURE
4.1
Automatic Ooeration
The transmitter
will begin operating automatically in case of impact if
the remote control switch is set to the "AUTO"position.
The red "XMIT ALERT" light comes on during transmitter operation.
ResettinQ the imoact detector
-Control
switch set to "AUT{)".
-Press the "AUTOTEST/RESET"pushbutton.
-The transmitter
should cease operating.
~
4.2
: If the transmitter continues transmitting,

perform the operation
again. If, after several attempts, the transmitter
remains in
operation. set the switch on its top face to "OFF".
Manual Ooeration
The transmitter
will begin operating when the remote control switch is
set to "MANU".
The red "XMIT ALERT" light comes on during transmitter operation.
4.3
Portable Ooeration
The transmitter
may be used on the ground as follows:
-Set the switch to "OFF".

-Remove the transmitter
from its support.
-Work in a clear space.
-Hold the transmitter
in the vertical
position with the antenna upwards.
-Set the switch to "MAN/RESET"to begin transmission.
N8
35082
9.2
02-03
Page 4
..
SECTION
3.
1
MANUAL
9.2
NARCOELT 910 EMERGENCY

LOCATORTRANSMITTER
GENERAL
The NARCO ELT 910 emergency
locator
simultaneously
on the international
243.0
Mhz) to aid
helicopter
search
transmits
radio
beacon
signals
distress
frequencies
(121.5
Mhz and
and rescue
operations.
COMPONENTS -LOCATION
-A
locator
beacon.
attached
rear
baggage
hold.
-An
external
identification
-A
control
unit,
located
on
-An
antenna,
located
on the
-A
label
fitted
close
to the
to
the
structure.
is
label
of the locator
the instrument
panel.
tail
boom.
switch
reads:
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
FOR AVIATION
positioned
inside
the
beacon.
EMERGENCY USE ONLY.
3~
3.1
Pre-fliaht
On the
InsDection
instrument
-check
that
remote
On transmitter,
-ON-OFF-ARM
3.2
-Select
UHF
-Set
-The
-The
-Set
3.3
Pre-fliaht
panel:
control
check
is
set
After
landing,
accidentally
is
set
to
"ARM".
that:
to
"ARM".
Checks
the international
system.
control
unit
switch
indicator
light
on
transmitter
output
control
unit
switch
Post-fliaht
switch
distress
frequency
on the
to "ON" for
approximately
the remote
control
unit
signal
should
be audible
to "ARM".
aircraft
VHF or
two seconds.
lights
up.
in the headphones.
Check
ensure
that
been switched
the
on.
emergency
locator
transmitter
has
not
350 82
9.2
!)2-03
Page
--C~PLEMENTARY
FLIGHT
MANUAL -"""~
..
4
4.1
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Automatic
ODeration
The transmitter
is actuated automatically
in the event of an impact,
assuming the switch is set to "ARM".

~
: In order to reset the locator beaconfollowing automatic

actuation, proceed as follows:
-Select the remote control switch "ON" for two seconds, or
the transmitter selector to "OFF".
-Re-select the switch to "ARM".
4.2
ManualODeration
The unit maybe actuated manually by setting the switch to "ON".
4.3
Portable ODeration
The transmitter maybe used on the ground as follows:
-Remove the transmitter from its mount.

-Select an unobstructed area.
-Extend the antenna.
-Place the unit upright with the antenna on top.
-Switch on the transmitter by setting the "ON-OFF-ARM"
switch to "ON".
.
N8
35082
9.2
02-03
Page6
COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MAfI/UAL
I RR7B I
SECTION 9.2
KANNAD 406 AF EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
1 GENERAL
The emergency locator transmits radio beacon signals simultaneously on
the international distress frequencies 121.5 MHz, 243.0 MHz and 406.025 Mhz
to aid helicopter search and rescue operations.
It can be actived manually or automatically in case of a crash.
2 DESCRIPTION
The KANNAD 406 AF beacons consist essentially of the following:
-A transmitter, located in the rear cargo compartment is fitted with "ARM-ON-OFF" switch,
-An antenna, located in the upper section of the intermediate structure,
-A remote control switch, located in instrument panel.
a
a
ON
ARMED
0:
>"
0:
lESTIRESET
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL

KEY
REPERE
1
DESCRIPTION
Amber light
FONCTION
-ON : transmission is effective
-Test mode:
.One long flash indicates
.
good test.
.A series of short flashes indicates bad test.

.Beginning of the test is indicated by a short flash.
2
Buzzer
-Aural signal
3 position switch
The switch of the ELT is in position" ARM"

-ON : beacon is actived.
-ARMED: arms the shock sensor circuit.
-TEST/RESET:
.Self-test mode.
.In case of activation, the ELT can be
reset by switching to TEST/RESET.
350B2 9.2
.
02-20
Page 7
*RR*
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
I RR7B I
.3
OPERATION
3.1 Pre-Fliaht Check
-On transmitter:
check that ARM-OFF-ON switch is set to ARM.
-In cockpit: check that remote control switch is set to ARMED.
3.2 Operation Testino

The self-test mode is a temporary mode.
This mode is selected either:
-When switching from OFF to ARM the switch of the ELT.
-When switching to TEST/RESET on the remote control panel (provided
that the switch of the ELT is in position ARM).
The buzzer operates during the self-test procedure.
r:!Qrg : It is strictfy prohibited to test the EL T by transmitting.
3.3 Post-Fliaht Check
After landing, set the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to ensure that the
emergency locator transmitter has not accidentally been switched on.
4 OPERATING PROCEDURE
4.1 Automatic Operation

The transmitter is actuated automatically in the event of an impact
assuming the switches are set to ARMED.
r:!Qrg: The TEST/RESET position stops locator transmitting and resets the
impact detector.
4.2 Manual Operation
The unit may be actuated manually by setting one control switch to ON.
4.3 Portable Operation
The transmitter may be used for self-contained operation on the ground
as follows :
-Remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket.
-Disconnect the coax from the aircraft antenna.
-Select an unobstructed area.
-Extend the built-in tape antenna.
-Place the unit upright with the antenna on top.
-Switch on the transmitter by setting the ARM-OFF-ON switch to ON.
.350B2
9.2
02-20
Page 8
'RR'
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
9.3
SCHERMUL
Y FLARES
1
GENERAL
SCHERMULY
flares are used to Illunlnate
the ground during night operations.
Two flares are carried on a support on the port side of the fuselage.
.
i
LOCATIONOF SCHERMULY
FLARES
2
PILOT'S CONTROLS
Firing of the flares
canprises :
-a
-a
"FLARES" pushbutton (1) situated

firing
pushbutton on the pilot's
The firing
circuit
fuse panel.
3
is controlled
is protected
electrically.
The control
systen
on the contro 1
cyclic control grip.
by a fuse situated
on the control
console
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
The maximun altitude
for firing
the flares is 1500 ft (500 m).
For maximun effectiveness,
the second flare should be fired at an altitude
of at least 800 ft (250 m).
It should be noted, however, that firing
the flares below 1200 ft (400 m)
may be dangerous if a fire hazard exists in the area to be Illuninated.
.350
82
9.3
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 9.4
.AIR
AMBULANCE
INSTALLATION
1
GENERAL
The air ambulance duty version is designed to carry one or two ~tretcher
patients accompanied by one or two medical assistants seated on the RH
rear seat.
&!
f'
R
.
.
DESCRIPTION
The air ambulance installation

occupies the LH portion of the cabin and
thus precludes any other use of the LH side of the aircraft.
It is therefore necessary to remove the copilot's
seat, the dual controls
.and
in somecases the LH rear passenger seat. The lower stretcher (6)
is placed on the cabin floor and is secured by straps (3 and 5) to
tie-down rings and fittings.
The upper stretcher (1) is held by brackets (2) on the rear bulkhead,
carried by a support frame (4) at the front. and secured by straps (7) to
the floor tie-down rings.
c
c
~
0;
.;"'
>'
350 B2
9.4
99-38
Page 1
'"j
J
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
::
c
UTILIZATION
Three configurations
-1
-2
are possible:
stretcher (upper or lower)

stretchers
: If only one stretcher

the lower stretcher.
is being used it will
be time-saving to use
Whennot in service the stretchers are folded and stowed with their straps
in the baggage hold. The upper stretcher support frame folds down onto
the cabin floor.
Stretchers are installed
1. Lower stretcher
2. Upper stretcher
3.1
order:
(6)
(1).
Preparation of the Cabin

Installation
preliminary
3;1.1
in the following
of the air ambulance duty version requires a number of

cabin alterations.
Lower Stretcher
-Remove:
-Fold
3.1.2
dual controls, copilot's

seat, seat cushions from L.H.
rear passenger seat.
upL.H. rear passenger seat against rear bulkhead.
Upper Stretcher
-Remove:
dual controls (tail rotor control pedals need not be

removed), copilot's
seat, seat cushions from L.H. rear
passenger seat, L.H. carpeting.
-L.H.
rear passenger seat remains open.
-Raise the support to vertical position and se~ure.
3.1.3
Upper and Lower Stretchers

-Remove : du~l controls, copilot's
seat, L.H. rear passenger seat
cushions and seat, L.H. carpeting.
~
: For the "plush" version, both armrests of the L.H. rear

passenger seat must be removed.
350 82
9.4
89-17
'"""
'
,~
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2
Installing
the Stretchers
-Open the port side doors.

-Load the stretchers
into place in the cabin forwards.
.Set the lower stretcher on the cabin floor
.Set the upper stretcher on the support post.
-Engage the rear handles of the stretchers in the brackets on the rear
bulkhead.
-Secure the retaining straps and hooks at the front and .Plp. pins
at the rear.
CAUTION: THE PATIENTSARE STRAPPED
TO THE STRETCHERS
AND MUSTBE
EMBARKED
FEET FORWARDS.
HEADTOWARDS
THETAIL.
.'.
.
.350
B2
9.4
89-17
Page 3
SECTION 9.5
SWIVELLI~~;;;;:LIGHT
1~
This swivelling
landing
light
that can be orientated
optional
equipment
item designed
to improve safety
phase and taxiing
operations.
This optional
equipment
the lower structure.
Its
lighting
power
is
is
installed
on the bottan,
forwa-d
A four-way
landing
light
assembly.
are
located
switch
is used to
retract
and extend
the
on the pilot's
is
confirmed
by
panel or on the
landin9
light.
are
protected
-a
2.5-Amp.
fuse
-a
2O-Amp. fuse
as follows:
on the R.H.
in the
side
electrical
panel
master
for
the
box for
control
the
circuits,
lighting
circuit.
B2
9.5
89-17
of
CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Circuits
.350
side
CONTROLS
An ON/OFF switch
is used to control
the lighting
which
the illumination
of an indicator
light
on the instrunent
Warning-Caution-Advisory
panel.
R.H.
450 Watts.
The controls
of the swivelling
collective
pitch
lever handgrip
in azimuth.
is an
during the approach
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
SECTION9.6
.RETRACTABLE-~:~
1
~ LANDING
LIGHT
GENERAL
This swivelling
and azimuth,
the approach
landing light
that can be orientated
is an optional
equipment designed
phase and taxiin9
operations.
This optional equipment is installed

the lower structure.
Its
lighting
to
both in elevation
improve
safety
during
on the bottom, forward LH side of
power is 450 Watts.
.I
g
,:
~
0
.,0;
,;
~
2 CONTROLS
The controls of the retractable swivelling landing light are located on

the pilot's
collective pitch lever handgrip assembly and optional, on
the copilot's collective
pitch lever.
An ON/OFFswitch is used to control the lighting which is confirmed by
the illumination
of an indicator light on the instrument panel or on the
Warning-Caution-Advisory panel.
The rear (spring return) position of the "ON" switch must be used to
retract the searchlight.
This ensures that the searchlight is always switched off when it is in
the "RETRACTED"
position.
The extension and orientation of the searchlight are carried out using
the four-way control button.
Circuits are protected as follows:

-a 2.5-Amp. fuse on the RHside panel for the control circuits.
-a 20-Amp. fuse in the electrical
master box for the .lighting circuit.
9.6
99-38
Page 1
~
-~-
;;c.~
:;,"~
=",
R
R
R
R
R
R
3 CIRCUIT.PROTECTION
350 B2
R:
R
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION
9.7
SEARCHLIGHT
GENERAL
The LOCATOR searchlight
by a swivelling
light
rescue,
surveillance...).
installation
bean in order
is intended
to facilitate
to ill~inate
the
certain
missions
ground
(search,
COMPONENTLOCATIONS
This
-A
of
.a
.a
.a
.a
-A
installation
consists
mainly
of :
450-W power light

(Detail
A) secured to the bottom,
the lower structure,
forward
L.H. side,
comprising:
glass done (3),
a swivelling
parabolic
fixed-arc
lanp (5),
housing (2),
mount (1).
reflector
forward
L.H.
side
is hooked
onto
(4),
control
handgrip
(Detail
8) which, when not used,
support
located
between the two seats.
-An
amber light
near the control
handgrip
indicate
that the searchlight
is on.
support,
which
ill~inates
to
.
4
Detail
.350
Detail
82
9.7
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FlIGHT MANUAL
OPERATION
~~-~
pushbutton(6) located on the control grip is used to switch on
and off the LOCATORsearchlIght
Installation.
Full brightness is obtained 15 secondsafter the search1ight has been

switched on. This is confirmed by the illuninatlon
of the amber indicator
light.
A four-way button (7) is used to operate the reflector
the light bean in the desired direction.
~
for orientating
: To prevent any premature damageto the lamp it is advisable:

-after
the searchlight has been switched on. to wait 15 seconds
before switching it off,
-after
the searchlight has been switched off.
seconds before switching
to wait 3O.to 60
it on again.
.
.
.
350
B2
9.7.
89-17
Page 2
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION9.8
FUELTRONFUEL FLOWMETER
1~
The *FUELTRON#
fuel
fuel consunpt1on.
canputer
From a given quantity

-The
-The
-The
is a device used to monitor a helicopter's
of fuel
stored
in its memory the device can compute,
amount of fuel burned

amount of fuel remaining
flying time remaining.
These values are computed from the momentary consumption which depends
on existing flIght parameters.
The computer is powered from the aircraft
supply via the battery contact
or the *RAZ-FUEL* pushbutton (if installed)
on the control pedestal. The
computer memory has its own battery
2
supply.
DESCRIPTION
0:
~
7
The indicator
on the instrument
panel consists
mainly of :
-A
digital
read-out (1) which indicates anyone of the following:
.the amount of fuel remaining
.the amount of fue 1 burned
.the flying time remaining (in hours and tenths of an hour).
-A digital
read-out (2) which indicates the manentary consl.lnption.
-A selector switch (3) with which one of the functions of (1) may be
chosen.
-A test selector (6) which:
.in *Test* position,
shows if 1 and 2 are functioning
correctly
.in *DIM* position.
reduces the brightness of items 1,2 and 7.
.350
82
9.8
89-17
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
-A
-A
selector switch (4)

.full
.quantity
added
.no addition
switch (5)
used to enter the initial
used to store
-An amber caution light (7)

is less than 0.8 hour.
-A white 1 ight (9)
accessible.
-A
pushbutton (8)
fuel data:
.
in memory the fuel quantity.

which comes on when the remaining flying
which indicates
the canputer
time
is on and the memory is
used to enter data regard Ing fue 1.
3 OPERATION
~~TRON~
measures the fuel flow rate but does not take in~ account
the fuel contained in the helicopter's
fuel tank. It is therefore
essential to program the amount of fuel on board at the beginning of the
flight.
The memory is accessible only when the white light is on. Thus, in order
to enter or add a fuel quantity or to enter a new value, the power must
be cut off using the RAZFUEL pushbutton (or by swItching off the battery
on units not equipped with this function).
NOTE: ~hen the engine is shut down but the booster pump is running, the
-unburned
regulator bleed fuel flow is approximately 45 litres/hour
(12 U.S. Gal./hour).
This flow dIsappears when the engIne is
started.
A) Test
Displays
should read all
8) EnterIng
a Fuel QuantIty
-3
..6
-4
-5
-5
-9
-7
-6
-3
8's.
In
In
In
in
ADDposItIon
8RIGHTor DIM positIon as required
ADDposItIon
STOREposition:
.one pulse for units
.two pulses for tens
.three
pulses for hundreds
.four pulses for thousands.
in SET position to set digits
on
on
in TEST position and 8 held depressed until light 9 goes out and
lIght 7 dIms
in FUEL REMAININGposition.
Read fuel quantity entered.
350
82
9.8.
89-17
Page 2
C) Recalling
-3
-5
-9
-7
-4
-8
-3
Paral!1eters
before
Switching
in ADO position
in BRIGHT or OIM position
on
on
in NONE position
held depressed until
light
in FUEL REMAINING position.
D) Adding
Off
Battery
as required
9 goes out
Read fuel
and light
quantity
7 dims
stored
in memory.
Fuel
-Switch
-3
in
-5
in
-4
in
-5
in
off .power supply to illuminate

light
9 (RAZ-FUEL
ADD position
BRIGHT or DIM position
ADD position
STORE position:
.one
pulse for units
.two
pulses for tens
.three
pulses for hundreds
.four
pulses for thousands
in SET position
to set digits
-5
-9on
-7
on
-8
light
-3
in FUa. REMAINING position.
added fuel).
E) Entering
a Preset
Refuelling
9 goes out.
Light
Read sun of fuel
7 dims
(remaining
or battery)
fuel
plus
Quantity
.This function
is available
when the required
fuel
quantity
has been
stored
in memory as per procedure
set forth
in paragraph 8.
-9
on
-4
in FUU. position
-5
in BRIGHT or DIM position
-5
in middle posItion
-8
light
9 goes out.
Light
7 dims.
F) In-Flight
Use
-3
-3
-3
in BURNEDposition.
quantity
of fuel burned since
in FUa. REMAINING position.
quantity
entered
less
in TIME REMAINING position
FUEL REMAINING
FUEL FLOW
-FUEL FLOW displayed
by lower readout.
.350
memory entry
quantity
burned
B2
9.8
89-17
Page 3
.COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
SECTION g.g
.SKI
INSTALLATION
l~
The ski installation
is designed for takeoff
snow-covered ground.
or landing on normal or
DESCRIPTION
The skis are secured to the pads via clamps. SEFAskis have a glassfiber/resin
laminate structure and SURFAIRskis have a metal structure.
The rear spatula of the ski is reinforced with one or two struts.
SURFAIRskis enable 4 pairs of Alpine skis to be carried.
R
R
R
R
SEFA
g
0
.;
~
>
SURFAIR
.~
~
"c
g
,;
~
OPERATION
Special attention
.landing
is required to the tail
rotor ground clearance when
in deepsnow.
3SD82
9.9
99-38
~~
Page 1
..,
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION9.10
.FREON
AIR CONDITIONER
.1~
The air conditioning
temperature
within
system is designed
the cabin.
to maintain
a comfortable
SYSTEMCONTROLSAND INDICATORS
-Available
to the pilot
0;
.;
g
g
~
ITEM
4
-Available
EVAP EVAP COND COND
DESCRIPTION
Rocker switch:
.OFF
.FAN
.A/C
FUNCTION
neutral
engaged
engaged
Rocker switch:
.lOW neutral
.HI
engaged
.MED engaged
Protection
fuses for condenser
and fan blowers
Ventilation
to
Stops system operation

Switches on ventilation
Switches on ventilation
air conditioning
Slow ventilation'
Fast ventilation
Medium ventilation
and
outlets
the passenqers
Six swivelling
and adjustable
ventilation
rate.
I
outlets
used to
obtain
the desired
R
350 B2
9.10
99-38
Page 1
~,
MANU~l
UTILIZATION
System operation
-Set
rocker switch 1 to FANto obtain cabin ventilation

to A/C to obtain air conditioning
-Select
ventilation
rate using rocker switch 2.
System shutdown
-Set rocker switch 1 to "OFF" (neutral position).
-Should the system fail,
set rocker switch 1 to "OFF".
4
PERFORMANCE
DATA
The impact of the air conditioning system on the perfonnance data given in
the Basic Flight Manual is negligible.
350 B2
9.10
99-38
:.
.;--
.
.
Page 2
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
UTILIZATION
;;:-~ation
-Set
rocker switch 1 to FANto obtain cabin venti lation

to A/C to obtain air conditionIng.
-Select
ventilation
rate using rocker switch 2.
System
shutdown
-Set
rocker switch 1 to OFF (neutral
-Should
4
the system fail.
set rocker
posltiQ1)
switch 1 to OFF.
PERFORMANCE
OATA
The impact of the air condItioning system on the performance da~
in the basic Flight Manual 1s negligible.
given
.
.350
82
9.10
89-17
Page 3
.I
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
f!
SECTION9.11
.FAURE
HERMAN
FUELFLOWMETER
1~
This system is used to monitor

helicopter.
the quantity
of fuel
The device can compute the following,

taking into
instantaneous
flow rate measured and the quantity
memory:
-The
-The
-The
amount of fuel burned

amount of fuel remaining
flying
time remaining.
contained
account
of fuel
in the
the
stored
in its
ENG.
GTM
OPERATINGPRINCIPLE
ill
1 Temperature signal
2 Temperature probe
3 Turbine
4 Permanent magnet
5 Flowrate signal
6 Digital
indicator
.5
.
.Figure
DEBIT FLOW
[:~:I]I[~~]]a REST.6
l___~-=-1~~~~~~~Jmn
-T
REH.O x 10
LIMIT
e-Q+~
Kg 0
TEST
PRESET IIDIM~
1 -Functional
diagram
35082
9. 11
99-38
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY.cflIGHT
MANUAL
3 DESCRIPTION
.
3.1
Indicator
I
Front
face
Back
face
3
LBS
"1
UNITE
UNIT
ILICIPTERE
-9
.;
~
c
.;
.GAL
14'.GAL
6
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
LH side digital
displays
-When switch (7) is in the center position, they

indicate;
.the remaining flight time (in hours and
minutes)
RH side digital
displays
-According to the position of switch (7), they

indicate;
.the hourly consumption rate of the engine
.the
amount 'of fuel
remaining,
.the amount of fuel loaded at the start,

previously displayed by switch (5).
-Indicates
the measuring unit according to the
position of switch (8) on the rear face
Removable units
label
"TEST" "DIM"
push-button
-When rotated, adjusts the brightness of the

display lighting.
-When pressed, tests the lighting of the displays
by making the eights appear.
"PRESET"switch
-Displays
the amount of fuel when switch (7) is in
bottom released position.
Reading in tens of units is displayed in (2)
-Switch position:
.Centre;
.I
..II
rest
LH ; amount displayed reduces slowly

RH : amount displayed increases rapidly.
35082
9. 11
99-38
Page 3
,.
~
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANU~
t;
~
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
/--~
,
6
.T.LIMIT"
indicator
amber
light
Three-position
function switch
-Comes on when only 40 minutes of flight remain,

or during test routine providing that the hourly
fuel consumption remains the same.
-Flashes when the indicator batteries are used.
-Up position:
indicates hourly fuel consumption
of the engine (RH display)
-Centre Dosition : indicates remaining flight time
(LH display) and the amount of fuel remaining
(RH display).
-Down position:
displays the amount of fuel
available in the fuel tank.
This position is protected by a locking detent.
.UNIT" switch
Used to select the desired measureunit.
"HELICOPTERS
lYPE" switch
Switch must be set to the corresponding type of

aircraft.
"'-;C-
R
R
R ~
4 OPERATION
NOTE: The standard aircraft
fuel quantity gauge readings must take
precedence over the fuel flowmeter computer.
4.1
In fliqht
-Flow (debit) read on display unit (2).
-Remaining time (T) read on the LH display and remaining quantity
(REM.Q) read on the RH display (2).
4.2
On the qround
This operation is carried out when fuel is added in the tank.
-Trip
selector switch (7) to down position (position protected by a
locking system).
The amount of fuel
remaining is indicated
on the RHdisplay.
Actuating selector switch "PRESET"(5) :

-toward position (-) slowly reduces the value displayed.
-toward position (+) rapidly increases the value displayed.
After displaying the actual amount of fuel on board, return selector

switch (7) to its initial
position.
?
,;;c.!
1.
3[
350 82
9. 11
99-38
99:-38
Page 4
Page 2 ';;~i:;;.J~
:'j':;:;"r1~-
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 TESTING THE INDICATOR

When pushbutton
indicator
light
(4) is pressed all 8's

(6) should come on.
should appear on the displays,
and
If this light flashes the indicator

battery must be changed (the "amount of
fuel remaining" information
retained in the memory is not valid).
.I
.
N
.35082
9.11
92-12
Page 5
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SEmON 9.12
WANDELAND GOlTERMANN
HAILERS
1~
QE-1.lli
The hailers are designed to transmit

or a continuous signal (siren).
either
messages of a high sound level,
The installation
of this optional system does not affect the approved
sections of the Flight Manual. The effect on the additional
performance
data is negligible.
2 DESCRIPTION
~~:
mainly
consists
of :
-two amplifiers
located in the lH side baggage hold,
-four
hailers
fixed two by two on the rear cross beam of the landing gear,
-one microphone located on the RH side of the copilot's
seat and fitted
with two push-buttons:
a black one for the mike function and a red one
for the siren.
The system is
a fuse.
swtiched on by means of a push-button
and is protected
by
.
.
.350
82
9. 12
93-05
Page 1
..COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
SECTION 9.27
MINI-HUMS SYTEM
1
GENEREAL
The MINI-HUMS SYSTEMis used as a maintenance aid to perform the

acquisition,
analysis and recording of the parameters monitored during
the flight.
The results of the monitoring operation are processed after
the flight
in order to determine the maintenance tasks to be carried out
before resuming the flights.
2
DESCRIPTION
2.1
General
layout
The MINI-HUMS installation

comprises the following items:
An airborne acquisition
and monitoring unit which achieves:
-data acquisition,
-data processing,
-data
recording,
-user
interface function.
An assembly of sensors and wires performing the interface between
the airborne unit and the aircraft.
.A ground station used to process and analyze the recording parameters
and thus determine the maintenance tasks to be performed on the
aircraft.
The data are transferred from the airborne unit to the ground station
via a removable magnetic card of the PCMCIAtype.
2.2
Control
and display
unit
-/~\~
.e
~~@~~/STB3 @]~ e
DDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
~~~~[]
~
~
~~~~~~
DATA
AKE
/1
5
35082
9.27
99-48
--
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
ITEM
1
DESCRIPTION
Annunciator
FUNCTION
lights
-ENG 1
-EXCD
-assurance
-ENG 2
-STB 1, STB 2 & STB 3
-PC
-DCU
Illuminates when an action pertinent to that

engine is in process: automatic engine-power
Illuminates check,
when alimit
limit exceedance
exceedance occurs.
Non-active annunciator light (function used on
twin-engine aircraft
only).
Used in conjunction with the automatic engine
power assurance check: their status shows
which phase of the power check session has
been reached.
Illuminates
to show the absence of the PCMCIA
card or a fault condition on the card.
Illuminates
to show a fault condition on the
computer of the airbone unit.
Display panel
Alpha-numeric display
monitoring data.
Vernier
Used to change pages on the display screen and

to increment or decrement the value of a
selected parameter.
"TAKE DATA" push-button
Push-button
knob
-PAC 1
-SUMM
-CFRM
-EVNT
-PAC 2
-GMT
-EXCD
-TEST
-PARM
-SLING
6
Locking knobs
Used to validate
modified.
of the checking and
the data which have been
Used to access the engine-power assurance

check function.
Used to summarize the various cycles and
operating times.
Used, at the end of a flight
session, to
confirm the parameters recorded during the.
flight(s)
of the session.
Used to mark an event which occured, in
flight,
during the data recording time.
Non-active position (used on twin-engine
aircraft
only).
Used to display the date.
Used to display the limit exceedances which
may have occured.
Used to access the test function and adjust
the display brightness.
Used to display, in real time, the monitored
parameters.
Used to count the SLING or HOIST cycles.
Used to lock/unlock the front face to get
access to the PCMCIAcard readers.
350 B2
9.27
99-48
Page 2
..COMPLEMENTARY
2.3
FLIGHT MANUAL
PCMCIAcard readers
These
front
~:
card
face
readers
of the
can be accessed
airborne
unit.
.
.
unlocking
and
folding
down
the
To handle the card. it is recommendedto have the aircraft

network de-energized.
after
..
..
~
on
on
..
~
>
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
Loading orifices
Used to insert
two readers.
Push-button
Used to eject
reader.
Indicator
Green: nonmal operation

Red: card not inserted or, if
inserted,
fault condition.
light
a PCMCIAcard in one of the

the PCMCIAcard out of the
the card is
35082
9.27
99-48
Page 3
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
3 OPERATION
~~~up,
theairborne
unitis energized
andtheself-testsequence
is .
initiated.
During this test, if no fault is detected on the computer or
on the PCMCIAcard, the PC and DCUlights must be out and the data related
to the aircraft
are displayed (refer to the approved section of the Flight
Manual).
3.1
"TEST" function:
test
and briahtness
adiustment
The first press on the "TEST" push-button initiates

sequence. A press on another push-button tenninates
a computer test
the test function.
A second press on the "TEST" push-button initiates

the test of the
annunciator lights and of the alpha-numeric display panel. The test
sequence lasts until another push-button is pressed.
A third press on the "TEST" push-button gives access to the brightness
adjustment function.
The following procedure must then be observed:
.Rotate the vernier knob to adjust the brightness of the alpha-numeric
display panel.
.When the desired brightness is obtained, press the "TAKE DATA"
push-button to pass on to the next adjustment.
.Rotate the vernier knob to adjust the brightness of the push-buttons.
.When the desired brightness is obtained, press the "TAKE DATA" pushbutton to pass on to the next adjustment.
.Rotate the vernier knob to adjust the brightness of the lights.
.When the desired brightness is obtained, press the "TAKE DATA" pushbutton to pass on to the next adjustment. Then the sequence reverts
to the adjustment of the display panel brightness and so on.
A press on another push-button tenninates the brightness adjustment
function.
3.2
"GMT" function:
time and date display
One press on the GMTpush-button allows the initial

showing the time and date, to be displayed.
power-up screen,
To modify these data, the following procedure must be carried out:

.Press the "TAKE DATA" push-button.
.The Hours field starts to blink and the figure can be modified by
means of the vernier knob.
.Press the "TAKE DATA" push-button again to validate the time and pass
on to the next field,
and so on.
This function will tenninate when all the fields have been selected.
MQI : The modification

of the date and time in flight does not affect
the flights
of the session being recorded. The modification will
only come into effect when a new session starts.
i}
35082
9.27
99-48
Page 4
.
.
..COMPLEMENTARY
3.3
FLIGHTMANUAL
"PAC 1" function:
automatic
enaine-power assurance check
During the flight,

a press on the PAC1 push-button initiates
an
automatic power assurance check cycle. Whenthe checking process starts.
a blue indicating
light illuminates
on the instrument panel.
MQIl : During all the phases of the engine-power assurance check cycle,
the procedure described in section 4.2 of the Flight Manual must
be applied.
The progress of the automatic power assurance check is shown. on the
alpha-numeric display panel, by the illumination
of STBI, STB 2 or STB 3
annunciator light.
Each phase of the engine-power assurance check
corresponds to a parameter stability
check. The further the check
progresses, the more stable the parameters must be. In case of inadequate
stability
for one of the parameters. the check will automatically
revert
to the previous phase.
At the end of phase No.3, the indicating light on the instrument panel
extinguishes.
showing that the engine-power assurance check is over. The
three STB I, STB 2 and STB 3 lights are illuminated simultaneously and
the result is displayed on the alpha-numeric panel. A rotation of the
vernier knob displays the parameters which have given this result. The
result remains displayed until a new function is selected.
NOTE: If another function is selected during the stabilization
phases
of the automatic engine-power assurance check, the checking cycle
is aborted.
3.4
"PARM"function:
display
of parameters in real time
A press on the PARMpush-button causes the real-time value of the

monitored parameters to be displayed on the alpha-nume"ric panel. A
rotation of the vernier knob allows the desired parameter to be selected.
MQIl : The ~Ng parameter is not to be taken into
350 BB and 350 Bl versions.
3.5
"EVNT" function:
account on the 350 BA,
event markina
During the flight,

the pilot can mark the occurrence of an event for
future analysis by pressing the EVNTpush-button. A file containing
the following items is thus created:
.The number of the event since the beginning of the session,
.The
time,
.The airspeed,
.The OAT
.The altitude.
350 B2
9.27
99-48
Page 5
:)
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
3.6
"SLING" fuction
: countina of SLING or HOISTcvcles
A press on the SLING push-button gives access to the SLING cycles

counting function.
A rotation of the vernier knob causes the desired
value to be displayed.
A press on the "TAKE DATA"push-button validates this value.
At that stage, a new rotation of the vernier knob will have no effect.
A prolonged press on the SLING push-button gives access, after a certain
time, to the HOISTcycles counting function. A rotation of the vernier
knob causes the desired value to be displayed.
A press on the "TAKE DATA" push-button validates this value.
At that stage, a new rotation of the vernier knob will have no effect.
3.7
"EXCD" function:
When a limit
illuminates.
If the limit
ciator light
monitorina
of the limit
exceedance is detected,
exceedances
the EXCDannunciator
light
exceedance concerns an engine parameter, the ENG1 annunilluminates

too.
The limit exceedances can be reviewed by pressing the EXCDpush-button.

The last exceedance that occured will be displayed.
A rotation of the vernier knob allows all the 1imit exceedances recorded
during the session to be reviewed.
An exceedance file includes:
.The number of the exceedance,
.The parameter concerned,
.The time of the exceedance,
.The limit concerned,
.The duration of the exceedance,
.The peak value reached.
3.8
"SUMM"function:
summarvof the various cvcles and oDeratina time.
A press on the SUMMpush-button gives access to a brief summaryof the

flights
performed during the latest session. A rotation of the vernier
knob allows various parameters (such as those given below) to be
selected:
.Number
.Flight
of take-offs,
duration,
.Engine cycles,
.Number of alarms,
.Number of exceedances
i)
35082
9.27
99-48
Page 6
..COMPLEMENTARY
3.9
.
"CFRM"function:
of the session.
FLIGHTMANUAL
confirmation
of the data recorded durina the fliahts
This function can only be used on the ground, with the engine and the
rotor stopped. A press on the CFRMpush-button activates the function
penmitting the data recorded during the session to be validated.
NOTE: All the data are validated by default. An information is not
erased when it is not validated.
It is simply marked as
"REJECTED".
~i
.
.
By pressing one of the "SUMM", "PAC1", "EVNT", "EXCD" push-buttons, the

pilot can review the recording reports associated with each function. A
rotation of the vernier knob allows the various reports of one same
function to be displayed. Whenthe report to be rejected is displayed on
the screen, press the "TAKE DATA" push-button:
The "REJECTED"message should appear.
The confirmation of the alarms met during the session can be perfonmed
at the end of the limit exceedance confirmation session.
350B2
9.27
99-48
Page 7
.
.
"
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION10
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE
DATA
CONTENTS
10.1
RESERVED
10.2
BASIC PERFORMANCE
DATA
10.3
EFFECT OF EQUIPMENTITEMS ON PERFORMANCE

DATA
10.4
PERFORMANCE
DATAWITH;
-SAND FILTER INSTALLED

-PROTECTION OF THE AIR INTAKE
R
R
.
.N
350 B2
10.0.P6
99-38
Page 1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION10.1
CONVERSION
TABLES
km/h -kt
km/h
km/h -kt
-kt
km/h
1.852
3.704
5.556
7.408
9.260
11.112
12.964
14.816
16.668
18.520
20.372
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
22.224
24.076
25.928
27.780
29.632
31.484
33.336
35.188
37.040
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
38.892
40.744
42.596
44.448
46.300
48.152
50.004
51.856
53.708
55.560
57.412
0.540
1.080
1.620
2.160
2.700
3.239
3.779
4.319
4.859
5.399
5.939
-kt
94.452
~6.304
98.156
100.008
101.860
103.712
105.564
107.416
109.268
111.120
112.972
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
27.535
28.075
28.615
29.155
29.695
30.234
30.774
31.314
31.854
32.394
32.934
6.479
7.019
7.559
8.099
8.638
9.178
9.718
10.258
10.798
114.824
116.676
118.528
120.380
122.232
124.084
125.936
127.788
129.640
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
33.474
34.014
34.554
35.094
35.633
36.173
36.713
37.253
37.793
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
11.338
11.878
12.418
12.958
13.498
14.037
14.577
15.117
15.657
16.197
16.737
131.492
133.344
135.196
137.048
138.900
140.752
142.604
144.456
146.308
148.160
150.012
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
38.333
38.873
39.413
39.953
40.493
41.032
41.572
42.112
42.652
43.192
43.732I
59.264
32
17.277
151.864
82
44.272
61.116
62.968
64.820
66.672
68.524
70.376
72.228
74.080
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
17.817
18.357
18.897
19.436
-19.976
.20.516
21.056
21.596
153.716
155.568
157.420
159.272
161.124
162.976
164.828
166.680
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
44.812
45.352
45.892
46.431
46.971
47.511
48.051
48.591
75.932
77.784
79.636
81.488
83.340
85.192
87.044
88.896
90.748
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
22.136
22.676
23.216
23.756
24.296
24.835
25.375
25.915
26.455
168.532
170.384
172.236
174.088
175.940
177.792
179.644
181.496
183.348
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
49.131
49.671
50.211
50.751
51.291
51.830
52.370
52.910
53.450
92.600
50
26.995
185.200
100
53.990
.35082
10.1
92-12
Page1
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
mm
ft
-ft
m-
ft
---ft
0.305
0.610
0.914
1.219
1.524
1.829
2.134
2.438
2.743
3.048
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3.281
6.562
9.843
13.124
16.405
19.685
22.966
26.247
29.528
32.809
15.545
15.850
16.154
16.459
16.764
17.069
17.374
17.678
17.983
18.288
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
167.326
170.607
173.888
177.169
180.450
183.730
187.0ll
190.292
193.573
196.854
3.353
3.658
3.962
II
12
13
36.090
39.371
42.652
18.593
18.898
19.202
61
62
63
200.135
203.416
206.697
4.267
4.572
4.877
5.182
5.486
5.791
6.096
6.401
6.706
7.010
7.315
7.620
7.925
8.230
8.534
8.839
9.144
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
45.933
49.214
52.494
55.775
59.056
62.337
65.618
68.899
72.180
75.461
78.742
82.023
85.303
88.584
91.865
95.146
98.427
19.507
19.812
20.ll7
20.422
20.726
21.031
21.336
21.641
21.946
22.250
22.555
22.860
23.165
23.470
23.774
24.079
24.384
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
209.978
213.259
216.539
219.820
223.101
226.382
229.663
232.944
236.225
239.506
242.787
246.068
249.348
252.629
255.910
259.191
262.472
31
32
101.708
104.989
24.689
24.994
81
82
265.753
269.034
33
34
35
108.270
lll.551
ll4.832
25.298
25.603
25.908
83
84
85
272.315
275.596
278.877
9.449
9.754
10.058
10.363
10.668
10.973
36
ll8.ll2
26.213
86
282.157
11.278
11.582
11.887
12.192
37
38
39
40
121.393
124.674
127.955
131.236
26.518
26.822
27.127
27.432
87
88
89
90
285.438
288.719
292.000
295.281
12.497
12.802
13.106
13.4ll
13.716
14.021
14.326
14.630
14.935
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
134.517
137.798
141.079
144.360
147.641
150.921
154.202
157.483
160.764
27.737
28.042
28.346
28.651
28.956
29.261
29.566
29.870
30.175
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
298.562
301.843
305.124
308.405
3ll.686
314.966
318.247
321.528
324.809
15.240
50
164.045
30.480
100
328.090
.
.
N
3508210.1
.
92-12
Page2
.
.
,; ,
;:
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
kg -lb
ko
kg
-lb
kg
lb
-lb
0.454
0.907
1.361
1.814
2.268
2.722
3.175
3.629
4.082
4.536
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.205
4.409
6.614
8.818
11.023
13.228
15.432
17.637
19.842
22.046
23.134
23.587
24.041
24.494
24.948
25.402
25.855
26.309
26.762
27.216
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
112.436
114.640
116.845
119.049
121.254
123.459
125.663
127.868
130.073
132.277
4.990
5.443
5.897
11
12
13
24.251
26.455
28.660
27.670
28.123
28.577
61
62
63
134.482
136.686
138.891
6.350
6.804
7.258
7.711
8.165
8.618
9.072
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
30.865
33.069
35.274
37.479
39.683
41.888
44.092
29.030
29.484
29.938
30.391
30.845
31.298
31.752
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
141.096
143.300
145.505
147.710
149.914
152.119
154.323
9.526
9.979
21
22
46.297
48.502
32.206
32.659
71
72
156.528
158.733
10.433
10.886
11.340
11.794
12.247
12.701
13.154
13.608
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
50.706
52.911
55.116
57.320
59.525
61.729
63.934
66.139
33.113
33.566
34.020
34.474
34.927
35.381
35.834
36.288
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
160.937
163.142
165.347
167.551
169.756
171.960
174.165
176.370
14.062
14.515
14.969
15.422
31
32
33
34
68.343
70.548
72.752
74.957
36.742
37.195
37.649
38.102
81
82
83
84
178.574
180.779
182.983
185.188
15.876
16.330
16.783
17.237
17.690
18.144
35
36
37
38
39
40
77.162
79.366
81.571
83.776
85.980
88.185
38.556
39.010
39.463
39.917
40.370
40.824
85
86
87
88
89
90
187.393
189.597
191.802
194.007
196.211
198.416
18.598
19.051
19.505
19.958
20.412
20.866
21.319
21.773
22.226
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
90.389
92.594
94.799
97.003
99.208
101.413
103.617
105.822
108.026
41.278
41.731
42.185
42.638
43.092
43.546
43.999
44.453
44.906
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
200.620
202.825
205.030
207.234
209.439
211.644
213.848
216.053
218.257
22.680
50
110.231
45.360
100
220.462 J
.35082
10.1
92-12
Page3
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
Litre
Litre
-US
--US
aal
gal
Litre
-US
Litre
-US
al
gal
3.785
7.571
11.356
15.142
18.927
22.712
26.498
30.283
34.069
37.854
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0.264
0.528
0.793
1.057
1.321
1.585
1.849
2.113
2.378
2.642
193.055
196.841
200.626
204.412
208.197
211.982
215.768
219.553
223.339
227.124
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
13.473
13.737
14.001
14.265
14.529
14.794
15.058
15.322
15.586
15.850
41.639
45.425
49.210
11
12
13
2.906
3.170
3.434
230.909
234.695
238.480
61
62
63
16.114
16.379
16.643
52.996
56.781
60.566
64.352
68.137
71.923
75.708
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3.698
3.963
4.227
4.491
4.755
5.019
5.283
242.266
246.051
249.836
253.622
257.407
261.193
264.978
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
16.907
17.171
17.435
17.699
17.964
18.228
18.492
79.493
83.279
87.064
90.850
94.635
98.420
102.206
105.991
109.777
113.562
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
5.548
5.812
6.076
6.340
6.604
6.868
7.133
7.397
7.661
7.925
268.763
272.549
276.334
280.120
283.905
287.690
291.476
295.261
299.047
302.832
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
18.756
19.020
19.284
19.549
19.813
20.077
20.341
20.605
20.869
21.134
117.347
121.133
124.918
128.704
132.489
31
32
33
34
35
8.189
8.453
8.718
8.982
9.246
306.617
310.403
314.188
317.974
321.759
81
82
83
84
85
21.398
21.662
21.926
22.190
22.454
136.274
36
325.544
86
22.719
140.060
143.845
147.631
151.416
37
38
39
40
9.774
10.038
10.303
10.567
9.510
329.330
333.115
336.901
340.686
87
88
89
90
22.983
23.247
23.511
23.775
155.201
158.987
162.772
166.558
170.343
174.128
177.914
181.699
185.485
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
10.831
11.095
11.359
11.623
11.888
12.152
12.416
12.680
12.944
344.471
348.257
352.042
355.828
359.613
363.398
367.184
370.969
374.755
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
24.039
24.304
24.568
24.832
25.096
25.360
25.624
25.889
26.153
189.270
50
13.209
378.540
100
26.417
.
N
3508210.1
.
92-12
Page4
: ! t:';
Litre
Litre
-UK--9-al
4.546
9.092
13.638
18.184
'
.350
gal
Litre
Litre
-UK~al
-UK
gal
1
2
0.220
0.440
231.846
236.392
51
52
11.218
11.438
3
4
0.660
0.880
240.938
245.484
53
54
11.658
11.878
22.730
250.030
55
12.098
1.320
254.576
56
12.318
31.822
1.540
259.122
57
12.538
36.368
1.760
263.668
58
12.758
40.914
45.460
9
10
1.980
2.200
268.214
272.760
59
60
12.978
13.198
50.006
54.552
59.098
11
12
13
2.420
2.640
2.860
277.306
281.852
286.398
61
62
63
13.418
13.638
13.858
63.644
14
3.080
290.944
64.
14.078
68.190
15
3.300
295.490
65
14.298
72.736
16
3.520
300.036
66
14.518
77.282.17
81.828
86.374
18
19
3.739
3.959
4.179
304.582
309.128
313.674
67
68
69
14.738
14.958
15.178
90.920
20
4.399
318.220
70
15.398
27.276
-UK
1.100
95.466
21
4.619
322.766
71
15.618
100.012
22
4.839
327.312
72
15.838
104.558
23
5.059
331.858
73
16.058
109.104
24
5.279
336.404
74
16.278
113.650
25
5.499
340.950
75
16.498
118.196
122.742
26
27
5.719
5.939
345.496
350.042
76
77
16.718
16.938
127.288
131.834
28
29
6.159
6.379
354.588
359.134
78
79
17.158
17.378
136.380
30
6.599
363.680
80
17.598
140.926
145.472
150.018
154.564
159.110
31
32
33
34
35
6.819
7.039
7.259
7.479
7.699
368.226
372.772
377.318
381.864
386.410
81
82
83
84
85
17.818
18.038
18.258
18.477
18.697
163.656
36
7.919
390.956
86
18.917
168.202
172.748
37
38
8.139
8.359
395.502
400.048
87
88
19.137
19.357
177.294
39
8.579
404.594
89
19.577
181.840
40
8.799
409.140
90
19.797
186.386
190.932
195.478
200.024
204.570
209.116
213.662
218.208
222.754
227.300
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
9.019
9.239
9.459
9.679
9.899
10.119
10.339
10.559
10.779
10.999
413.686
418.232
422.778
427.324
431.870
436.416
440.962
445.508
450.054
454.600
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
20.017
20.237
20.457
20.677
20.897
21.117
21.337
21.557
21.777
21.997
B2
10.1
92-12
Page 5
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
nm -inch
inch
nm
nm
nm
--inch
--inch
25.4
50.8
76.2
101.6
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0.039
0.079
0.118
0.157
0.197
0.236
0.276
0.315
0.354
0.394
1295.4
1320.8
1346.2
1371.6
1397.0
1422.4
1447.8
1473.2
1498.6
1524.0
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2.008
2.047
2.087
2.126
2.165
2.205
2.244
2.283
2.323
2.362
279.4
304.8
330.2
U
12
13
0.433
0.472
0.512
1549.4
1574.8
1 600.2
61
62
63
2.402
2.441
2.480
355.6
14
0.551
1625.6
64
2.520
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
15
16
17
18
19
20
0.591
0.630
0.669
0.709
0.748
0.787
1651.0
1676.4
1701.8
1727.2
1 752.6
1778.0
65
66
67
68
~9
70
2.559
2.598
2.638
2.677
2.717
2.756
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
660.4
685.8
711.2
736.6
762.0
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
0.827
0.866
0.906
0.945
0.984
1.024
1.063
1.102
1.142
1.181
1803.4
1828.8
1854.2
1879.6
1905.0
1930.4
1955.8
1981.2
2006.6
2032.0
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
2.795
2.835
2.874
2.913
2.953
2,992
3.031
3.071
3.110
3.150
787.4
812.8
838.2
863.6
889.0
31
32
33
34
35
1.220
1.260
1.299
1.339
1.378
2057.4
2082.8
2108.2
2133.6
2159.0
81
82
83
84
85
3.189
3.228
3.268
3.307
3.346
914.4
939.8
965.2
990.6
1016.0
36
37
38
39
40
1.417
1.457
1.496
1.535
1.575
2184.4
2209.8
2235.2
2260.6
2286.0
86
87
88
89
90
3.386
3.425
3.465
3.504
3.543
1041.4
1066.8
1092.2
1117.6
1143.0
1168.4
1193.8
1219.2
1244.6
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
1.614
1.654
1.693
1.732
1.772
1.811
1.850
1.890
1.929
23U.4
2 336.8
2 362.2
2 387.6
2413.0
2438.4
2463.8
2489.2
2 514.6
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
3.583
3.622
3.661
3.701
3.740
3.780
3.819
3.858
3.898
1270.0
50
1.969
100
3.937
L2540.0
.
N
35082 10.1
.
92-12
Page6
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
bar -psi
bar
bar -psi
-Dsi
bar
-Dsi
0.069
0.138
0.207
0.276
0.345
0.414
0.483
0.552
0.620
0.689
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14.506
29.011
43.517
58.023
72.529
87.034
101.540
116.046
130.551
145.057
3.516
3.585
3.654
3.723
3.792
3.861
3.929
3.998
4.067
4.136
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
739.791
754.296
768.802
783.308
797.814
812.319
826.825
841.331
855.836
870.342
0.758
0.827
0.896
U
12
13
159.563
174.068
188.574
4.205
4.274
4.343
61
62
63
884.848
899.353
913.859
0.965
1.034
1.103
1.172
1.241
1.310
1.379
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
203.080
217.586
232.091
246.597
261.103
275.608
290.U4
4.412
4.481
4.550
4.619
4.688
4.757
4.826
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
928.365
942.871
957.376
971.882
986.388
1.000.893
1.015.399
1.448
1.517
1.586
1.655
1.723
1.792
1.861
1.930
1.999
2.068
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
304.620
319.125
333.631
348.137
362.643
377.148
391.654
406.160
420.665
435.171
4.895
4.964
5.032
5.101
5.170
5.239
5.308
5.377
5.446
5.515
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
1.029.905
1.044.410
1.058.916
1.073.422
1.087.928
1.102.433
1.U6.939
1.131.445
1.145.950
1.160.456
2.137
2.206
2.275
2.344
31
32
33
34
449.677
464.182
478.688
493.194
5.584
5.653
5.722
5.791
81
82
83
84
1.174.962
1.189.467
1.203.973
1.218.479
2.413
35
507.700
5.860
85
1.232.985
2.482
2.551
2.620
2.689
2.758
36
37
38
39
40
522.205
536.7U
551.217
565.722
580.228
5.929
5.998
6.067
6.135
6.204
86
87
88
89
90
1.247.490
1.261.996
1.276.502
1.291.007
1.305.513
2.826
2.895
2.964
3.033
3.102
3.171
3.240
3.309
3.378
3.447
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
594.734
609.239
623.745
638.251
652.757
667.262
681.768
696.274
710.779
725.285
6.273
6.342
6.4U
6.480
6.549
6.618
6.687
6.756
6.825
6.894
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
1.320.019
1.334.524
1.349.030
1.363.536
1.378.042
1.392.547
1.407.053
1.421.559
1.436.064
1.450.570
.35082
10.1
92-12
Page 7
I
SECTION
10.2
BASIC PERFORMANCE
DATA
Figure
-DETERMINING
-TAS/CAS
THE CORRECTED WEIGHT
IN FAST CRUISE
-RECOMMENDED CRUISE DATA
C'
-FUEL
CONSUMPTION -RANGE
-FUEL
CONSUMPTION -ENDURANCE IN RECOMMENDEDCRUISE
-RANGE
IN FAST CRUISE
4
5
IN RECOMMENDEDCRUISE
-FUEL CONSUMPTION
-ENDURANCE
IN CRUISEAT MINIMUM
HOURLY FUEL CONSUMPTION
-DISTANCE
TO CLEAR A 50-FT
OBSTACLE ON TAKE-OFF
-DISTANCE
TO CLEAR A 50-FT OBSTACLE ON LANDING
;Zr~:;;;:c
N
18
350B2
10.2
92-12
Page 1
".
,.Tgure
;lAS/CAS
~~~U~~E
IN
CONDITION
FAST CRUISE
-Stabilized
level
flight
.350
B2
10.2
92-12
--
Page 3
33 .
>.
,.
,.
: .;
L
i!
.,
~
.0
..!
i
i;
-40
-30-20
-10
TEIf' .EXT.
10
20
I O.A. T.
30
40
50
80
(.C>
I~
2000
MASSE CMRIIEE
Figure
NOTE:
weight
limitations
with
are given in section
2
internal
load
I Cl$llECTED
\EICJiT
CORRECTEDWEIGHT TO
DETERMINE SPEEDS
(on facing
page)
N
350
82
10.2
.
92-12
Page 2
.
.
-..COMI'LtMtNTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
s..
....
~'
..0 -~
-20'-10 0 10 20 ~ 40 50 eo
TEW,EXT./O.A.T.
loCI
1.
I
I
100
200
,
,
110"
220
~lbII\l2&O
I
I
"
I
I
120 TM 1'30IKtJ 140
~'
,
"
.I
1S!
'\
~~
200
.I_"'
I I I , I , , I I I I I I I I I I I
80
100 ~
120 CAS 140 IKtJ
Figure 2
;lAS/CAS
~~~U~~E
IN
CONDITION
FAST CRUISE
-Stabilized
level
flight
.350
82
1 0.2
92-12
Page 3
COMPtEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
31
33
as .
-
..
.'
---ii
eO;:
~
l-
~
g
i;
-10
10 20 ~
40 50 60 1500
TEIf'.EXT.I O.A.T. ('C)
2000
MA& ~IE
2500
-3500
I ~CTiD
1100
Figure 1
NOTE:
weight limitations
with
are given in section 2
internal
load
CORREmD WEIGHTTO
DETERMINESPEEDS
(on facing page)
N
35082
E ~~
1 0.2
92-12
Page 4
10.2
92-12
Page 2
"' "
"c
C~NTARY
.11
FLIGHT MANUAL
00:
...
"\ ...'"
..
""
,'1;
.'
1
-40-30-20-10
0 10 20 30 40 eo eo 1~0
TEMP.EXT./.O.A.T.
('C)
200
__L _'_'l
TAS go Vp100
2eo
r
0
kkOl/h)
,
,i,
,
I
I
110
1120
130(k~)
~.,~-
"\
"
...
O' .+'\0..
..~
.'I'
t~
~~
..'I'~
.~
.I.~~
~.,_.~. "1:
'"
eo
I , I I I I I I , I I I I I I I
80
100
120(k~)140
VC /
CAS
Figure
CONDITIONS
-Stabilized
-TAS
level
flight
and CAS correspond
to
RECOMMENDED
the Ng read on the upper LH

pressure altitude
curves
CRUISE DATA
N
.350
82
1 0.2
92-12
Page 5
--""
"-
COMPtrMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL
(kg/hI)
.
r
+"
300
100
250
110
...90200
.
.
.
-40 -~
-20 -10 0
..70
10 20 ~
40 50 50
TEIfI.EXT/O...T.IOtl
0.5
0.6:
0.7
0.8
0.91kQ1k81I
"'1,1""'11""'"
1.0
li2
1.4
1.6
l.8 (k~*)
, , , I I C, , , I , , , , I , , , , I
2.5:
3
3.5 11b1181
4
~./VIT.
CQG./~ED
{tal 1000
:
(kil
400 I
aM>i
IX)
i
~ 100
i
~ 0 0
Figure 4
CONDITION
-Stabilized
FUEL CONSUMPTIONRANGEIN FAST CRUISE

level
flight
N
3S0
82
10.2
.
92-12
Page 6I
COMprEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
Ik;/kal
o.g
IkgII8)
(ID/ItI)
I.
3.5
0.8
Q
...3
..~~
I.
~ 0.7
..."
G
~
'" 0.6
I.
2.S
--
.I.
g O.S
.2
'"
0.8
o.
_30
.20
-..
';10
...
~
... 0
~-10
-20
-30
:=
i 4
i:I
0 i
.;
~
0
70
S?
.
~
..,.
go
I
200
100
'
110
.,
120
.I
~.
'
.,
250
H 1 lQft.y ~.
130
,
140
I
ISO
.,
300
160Ikg/h)
,
350 IID/hl
Figure 5
CONDITION
-Stabilized
level
FUEL CONSUMPTIONENDURANCE
IN
RECOMMENDED
CRUISE
flight
.350
82
1 0.2
92-12
Page 7
COMPtEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
f- 2200
(Kg)
~J:
-(lb)
.4500
:;:
~ 2000 """
.~
~
" 1800 -.:;:r-~
...~...
0
(I)
4000
,-;!
<1
~
..."
1600
'
3500
...
1400
'\
2000
!\
1\
4000
!j;
"
6000
,..
\ .\ \X~
'\
\
\\
;\
\..
12000
1\
.I
\ \
\\!
.\
~
L\J\N
\,
\ ,
..\.\
,
'\
..\
1000
\,
'"
.\
10000
(M]
.,
.\
8000
\
1\
Cl
(ftl
\,
.\;~
1\
I
ISA-20
MASSE/wEIGHT
-2200
2000
11
Kg
Kg
1800 Kg
ISA-l0
I
I
STDIISA
i'
I ...
ISA 10
'I
t i
I
I'
200
I
400
I
tOO
200
-Stabilized
300
400
DISTANCES / RANGE
Figure
CONDITION
II
I.
600
I
Ii
"I
...0
.~.!
ISA 20
:j
!.
,.
800
(KmJ
1000
(NmJ
500
RANGEIN
RECOMMENDED
CRUISE
level
flight
I
N
350
82
10.2.
92-12
--
Page
8,1I
,
..-COMPLEMENTARY
(kll/h)
FLIGHT MANUAL!
(1b,,100>
.:
"\
't"
~
4
~
.u
\
50
t~
~q'
, ~
c.~
.~
I
60
-40 -~ -20 -10 O' 10 20 ~

TEW.EXT.-,
O.A.T.
L\
Ib,,100>
(kg/h)
1
l
\
40 50
(OC)
tI.
1\
\
~
~
~
I'
9:'
J-c
200 ~
~
7
.~O
:
'I
.'I
~
,~
220
..;
)...
Q-
9c'
~
1\
rJ
'
\
."'" '.
.1\
.U
L' I
(1b/l\)
2eo
240
1"
'4..-
:...
1\
'!
11
~1~
~ l\
~ -l\ '"'
I\
,I
,,
AUTONOMIE -' E~ANCE
(h)
fI:iI
~..o-'
'J.~
%
180 ".
'
O-.~
~
.co
140
~~'
:"'~-d
~
il
I"."
180 ~
100
II
120~
Figure 7
CONDITION
-Stabilized
level
flight
-FUEL
CONSUMPTIONENDURANCEIN CRUIS
AT MINIMUM HOURLY
FUEL CONSUMPTION
N
.35082
10.2
92-12
Page 9
--
--LOMPtEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
~
~ ~;.
8
i
O_.
~ r.
15.
DISTNa
8000
2400
1ft)
..7000
6000
II
la)
2000
0
...I
N
..
.."
5000
1500
4000
~'
1000
3000
2000
500
1000
0
0
0
0
(K8/h)
IKt)
..10
10
20
20
-40
.
t-
30
[-50
30
V~
fo6O
.;
~
rl!
~
70
~O
0
100
200
!""""."""","""",""",..""!"".","""".,.,.""","".,..,.,"",',."
0
50001STANCE
Figure
CONDITIONS
-Nonnal
takeoff
-True
wind
-Applicable
to
300
55 kts
all
-RANGE
1000
1ft)
400
1300
I.A.S.
weight
(8)
DISTANCE TO CLEAR
A SO-FOOT OBSTACLE
ON TAKEOFF
requirements
J
N
350
B2
10.2
.
92-12
---
Page 10
-cOMPtrMENTARYFLIGHT MANUAL
.j
vI ~
kt
"t~O
11581
OISTAtCE
8000
2400
11't!
II
L 7000
I~
1.1
2000
.6000
i:;
I
I
~OOO
I~
.4000
.",
1500
II
3000
1000
2000
II
1/
500
1000
0
Ii
(K./h)
(Kt)
10
=
; 10
20
..0
20
0
0
30
.;
~
~
70
40
100
200
1""1"""""""".""""."""""""""""'I"""""
0
500 DISTANCE -RANGE

Figure
300
(.1
1000
(ft)
400
1300
CONDITIONS
-Approach
-True
.350
65 kts I.A.S
DISTANCETO CLEAR
wind
-Applicable
A SO-FOOT OBSTACLE
to all
weight
requirements
ON LANDING
B2
10.2
92-12
Page11
.,
(OMPLEMENTARY~FLIGHT
MANUAL
SECTION 10.3
.EFFECT
OF EQUIPMENTITEMS ON PERFORMANCE
DATA
Fast cruise
Recorrmended cruise
Hourly
Equipment installed
Heating and demistin~

systems *
Sand filter
.High
gear
hoist
Emergency
flotation
gear
.
.
Range
Airspeed
km/h kt
-4
+ 4 %
-5
-4
-2
% -4
-2
-1.5
+ 4 %
Range
-5
-4
-2
-1.5
-2
-1
-1
-2
-1
-1
-6
-3
-2
-6
-3
-2
-4
-2
-1.5
-4
-:2
-1.5
Protection
of the air
intake against
induction
of snow *
Float type
undercarriage
-2
fuel
co~sump
tlon
Refer to SECTION 10.4
Skis
..Electric
fuel
co~sump
tlon
landing
Hourly
Airspeed
krn/t kt
R
R
R
Refer to SECTION 10.4
-10
-10
-19
-10
* Reduction in fast or recommended cruise performance is not to be taken into

account when engine is running at max. torque
-Increase
in hourly fuel consumption and decrease in range are to be taken
into account in all cases.
35082
10.3
99-38
--.J
P,age 1
:
R
R
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
<-
SECTION 10.4
.PERFORMANCE
DATA WITH :
SAND FILTER INSTALLED AND
PROTECTIONOF THE AIR INTAKE AGAINST INDUCTION OF SNOW
SAND FILTER NOT OPERATING

Protection
aaainst
induction
R
of snow
R
Figures
-DETERMINING THE CORRECTED

WEIGHT
-TAS/CAS IN FAST CRUISE
-RECOMMENDEDCRUISE DATA
-FUEL CONSUMPTION-RANGE IN FAST CRUISE
.
-FUEL
CONSUMPTION -ENDURANCE
-RANGE
1
2
3
4
---5
6
SAND FILTER OPERATING
.2
The performance data are to be calculated

to 6. as indicated
in the table below:
from the values
OUTSIDE AIR
TAS/CAS in fast
cruise
of figures
TEMPERATURE
Lower than
+5.C
Between +S.
and +3S.C
Higher than
+3S'C
Fig.2
Fig.2 minus
2 krn/h
Fig.6 minus
10 krn/h
R
TAS/CAS in recommended cruise

.Fuel
consumption
in fast
cruise
Fig.3.
Fig.4
Fig
plus
Fig.4
Fig.4
2.5%
Fuel consumption
cruise
in
recommended
Range in recommended cruise
minus
3%
Fig.5 plus
2.5%
Fig.5
Fig.6 minus
2.5%
Fig.6
3%
Fig 5 minus
3%
minus
Fig.6
5%
350 B2
minus
10.4
99-38
',Page 1
~
f:
'
g
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANU~-
".
-~
35
36
38
~
40
~~~~
42
~~
~
2
4
100)
.
6
~~
..QC5
~Q
4)C5
II
,.:
...
..
~
0
..
~
-40-30-20-10
10
OAT
20
30
40
50
601500
2500
(OC)
CORRECTED
3000
3500
WEIGHT
CONDITIONS
-ALL
UP
LOAD:
WEIGHT
2250
kg
LIMITATION
(4961
Ib)
WITH
INTERNAL
CORRECTED
WEIGHT
FOR
DETERMINE RATE OF CLIMB

(on facing page)
Figure
1
.
35082
10.4
99-38
:,.~
t"I
;:
Page
;.OJ
Ca1PLEMENTARY FLIGHT
MANUAL
.-40
-30 -20 -10
0 10 20
OAT (OC)
180
.100
200
.110
220
.120
240 (km/h)
.1~0(kt
)140
TAS
.0
.;0
..
~
150
ci
'
200
'
80
100
'
CAS
250 ( km/h )
I
'
120
'
140
(kt)
CONDITIONS
-STABILIZED
LEVEL FLIGHT
-SAND FILTER NOT OPERATING
OR
PROTECTION
AGAINST INDUCTION
.Figure
OF SNOW
IN
TAS -CAS
FAST
CRUISE
350 B2
10.4
99-38
.,."",;,
Page 3
~..
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAT
"'
31
33
35
:.
2
4
6
6
~
~~~
100)
.
6
,.:.;.
.::
~Q
0
0
..
tO)
0
cO
"'
-40-30-20-10
0 10 20 30 40 50601500
OAT
2500
('C)
3000
CORRECTED
3500
WEIGHT
CONDITIONS
-ALL UP WEIGHT LIMITATION
LOAD:
2250 kg (4961 Ib)
WITH
INTERNAL
CORRECTED
WEIGHT
DETERMINE
RATE
(on
facing
OF
FOR
CLIMB
page)
Figure
1
.
350 82
c(
;~
10.4
99-38
Page 4
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHTMANUAL
---10
20 30
OA T (0 C)
80
'
9'0
00'
\..
'
100
'
1101 '
120
'
13C (kt)
~t)",
..~
.<..
,,"I-
O~
\0;
:'{\Q
8g
.
0
cD
*00
150
ri,
60
'
'
80
200
'
'
100
'
250 ( km/h )
'
CAS
'
'
120
140
'
(kt)
CONDITIONS
-STABILIZED
LEVEL
FLIGHT
-SAND
FILTER
NOT OPERATING
OR
PROTECTION
AGAINST
INDUCTION
OF
SNOW
RECOMMENDED
CRUISE DATA
Figure3
R
35082
10.4
99-38
Page 5
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANU~
(kg/h)
170
16
(Ib/h)
350..
15
C1J
z
0
U
~
~~
14
13
300 >
~
12
~
0
250
:I:
110
80.
10
90
200
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1 (kg/km)
'1~0' I '1~2' I '1~4' I '1~6' I '1~8' (kg/kt)
OAT (.C)
.,
(NM)
1000
500
km)
, .I ..,
2.5
400
800
~
z
, I ' , , , I'
3
3.5
, , , I
4
(lb/NM)
CONS./SPEED
600
300
-0:
EI:
200
g
~
F"UC((%)
400
10200
.;N
~
~U)
,,:
w
CONDITIONS
-STABILIZED
LEVEL FLIGHT
-SAND
FILTER NOT OPERATING OR
PROTECTION
FUEL
CONSUMPTION-RANGE
IN FAST CRUISE
Figure
4
350 82
10.4
99-38
_."~
..,.
Page 6
JL
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
(kg/km)
(kg/NM)
(lb/NM
0.9
1.6
0.8
3.S
1.S
1.4
C 0.7
w
~
~ 0.6
1.3
8 O.S
0.9
1.2
1.1
2.S
0.8
0.4
60
50
..40
30
20
..
Q 10
I-
,':::
<
0 -10
-20
-30
-40
~6
::'S
w 4
()
z
< 3
II:
~2
70
'I'
80
I
.I
~
g
90
.I
'
100
.I
.I
.I
110
'
200
'I
120
.I
250
>
w
'
130
I
'
.I
140
'
.I
150
.I
'
160 (kg/h)
' I
300
HOURLY CONS.
'I
3S0
(Ib/h)
CONDITIONS
,
.-SAND
:
-STABILIZED LEVEL FLIGHT

PROTECTION
AGAINST
INDUCTION
FUEL
OF SNOW
CONSUMPTION-
ENDURANCE
IN
RECOMMENDED
CRUISE
.FigureS
35082
10.4
99-38
":page 7
..
'""
.
.
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANU~1
2200
( Ib )
C)
=- 2000
4500
...
:I:
1800
..J
4000
..
1600
co
3500
~
0
,-,...
...
1400
0
2000
( m )
=-
4000
!l:
600
1000
2000
8000
10000
3000
12000
-20
WEIGHT
-2200
-10
---1800
kg
2000 kg
kg
"ffftt
~
+10
+200
~
~
I' ...I
0
100
200
I
100
300
I
400
I' ..,
200
500
I'
600
...I'
.,
700
.I'
.,
300
800
.I
400
900
I'
1000 (km)
...I'
..
500
(NM)
RANGE
ci
>'
'"
w
CONDITIONS
-STABILIZED
LEVEL FLIGHT
-SAND
-PROTECTION
RANGE
RECOMMENDED
IN
CRUISE
Figure
6
350 82
10.4
99-38
Page 8
..AMERICAN
EUROCOPTER CORPORATION
2701 Forum Drive
Grand Prairie, Texas 75053
FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
FOR
AEROSPATIALE MODELS AS3S0B, B1, B2, BA,
C, D, D1 HELICOPTERS
EQUIPPEDWITH
AIR CRUISERS EMERGENCY FLOATS
Registration:
Serial No.:
Sections 1, 2, 3 and 4 of this documentcomprise the Approved Flight Manual Supplement.

Compliancewith Section 1, Limitations, is mandatory. Section0, General,containsadditional
information and is not DOT Approved.
This supplementmustbe attachedto the DGAC Approved Rotorcraft Flight Manual, Code C,
when the helicopter is modified by the installation of the Air Cruisers EmergencyFloats in
accordancewith AerospatialeHelicopterCorporationDrawing List No. 350A-82-1157,Revision
AL, or later FAA approvedrevisions andSupplementalTypeApproval (STA) NumberSH88-18.
The information and datacontainedin this documentsupersedesor supplementsthat contained
in the basic Approved Flight Manual"Supplementin thoseareas listed herein. For Limitations,
Procedures,and Performance not contained in this document, refer to the Approved Flight
Manual and other applicable Approved Flight Manual Supplements.
Departmentof Transport (Canada)Approved:
CANADA
OEPARTI.!ENT OF TRANSPORT
AERONAUTICAL
ENGINEERING
DIVISION
~JAN 5 1994
;S
J. iamant Bouslead
Regional Airworthiness Engineer -Rolorcraft
Ontario Region
.Revision
DOT Approved: June 29, 1988

1: January 05,1994
Page 1 of 5
";
AMENDMENr
RECORD
SHEET
Amendment
No.
Date
1
Affected
Pages
AMENDED
.
Signature
94/01/05Pg.1,Company
name
change,
addmodels
AS350B1,
B2,BA,Dwg.ListRef.Change
Pg.2, Change
Format
Pg.4,(Sect.
1.7)remove
c.g.graph
Pgs.all,Change
numbering,
Pg.6deleted.
.
DOT
Approved:
June
29,1988
Revision
I: January
OS,
1994
Page
2ofS
,..
.0.0
G~NERAL(UN~PPRO.VED)
0.1
-An
-A
1.0
(2) float modules,including inflation bottleslocatedon eachside of

the aircraft, securedto the skid tubes
electrical float inflation system
manual float inflation system
LI1\fiTAnONS
In addition to the specific limitations indicated below, the limitations specified in the
Basic Manual remain applicable.
1.1
Floats Folded -SIstem Not Anned

No specific limitations
1.2
This equipmentconsistsessentiallyof:
-Two
..
This supplementIS applicable when the Air Cruisers Emergency Flotation Gear is
installed on low or high skid gear.
Float Stowed -SIstem Anned

Never exceed speedin this caseis 169 km/h (105 mph, 91 kts) I.A.S.
1.3
Inflation of Floats
Maximum speedfor inflation is 136 km/h (85 mph, 74 kts) I.A.S.
1.4
Flotation Gear Inflated

Never exceedspeed:
.-Low
0
1.5
Skid Gear 0 225 km/h (140 mph, 122 kts) I.A.S.

High Skid Gear 0 169km/h (105 mph, 91 kts) I.A.S.
Maximum Inflation Altitude

The maximum altitude for float inflation is 3048 meters (10,000 feet) P.A.
Inflation abovethis altitude may result in insufficient buoyancyto insureflotation.
1.6
Take-off Followin2 Water Landin&

A take-off is prohibited following a water landing.
.DOT
Approved:June29, 1988
~ev;.ion 1: JanuaryOS,1994
Page3 of 5
1.7
Center of Gravitv Limits
The aft center of gravity limit is reducedto 3.505m (138.0 inches)with low skid
gear, and 3.472m (136.7 inches) with high skid gear.
1.8
Lateral Center of Gl'"llvitv Limit!; 1350Bl and B2 onl1:)

1.8.1 Low Skid Gear
Weight .oS:.
4,700 Ib
Weight> 4,700 Ib
No Change
.:t 5.20 in.
1.8.2 Hi2h Skid Gear

Weight .oS:.
4,700 Ib
Weight> 4,700 Ib
2.0
No Change
.:t 3.90 in.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
In addition to theproceduresindicatedbelow, thenormal procedurespecifiedin thebasic
manualremains applicable.
2.1
External Checks
The float closure fabric is correctly secured
-The
bottle inflation pressureis correct, 3140.:t 240 psi at.:t 15 degrees

celsius with a correction of approximately.:t 100 psi per .:t 10 degrees
celsius.
2.2
FIi~ht Over Water

-Take-off
-before take-off over water, arm theelectrical actuationsystem.
After achieving a safecombinationof airspeedand altitude, but in no case
later than 169 krn/h (105 mph, 91 kts), disarm the electrical actuation
system.
~
-~
Wheneverthe float electrical actuationsystemis armed, the

"Float Armed" segmentin the annunciatorpanel shouldbe
illuminated.
-If an airspeedgreaterthan 169krn/h (105 mph,91 kts)is desired

enroute, the float armed systemmust be off.
-AQQroach
-In preparation for a landing, the electrical actuation system
shouldbe armed between 169 krn/h and 121 hm/h (75-105 mph, 65-91
kts).
DOT
Approved:
June
29,t988
Revision
t: laouaryO5.
1994
Page
4of5
-.
."
..
..
3.0
2.3
Fli&ht Over Land

-Set
the float armed switch to off.
EMERGENCY PROCED~
In the event of an emergency necessitatingditching of the aircraft, carry out the
emergencyprocedure outlined in the basic manualas well as that detailedbelow:
Below 169 km/h (105 mph, 91 kts), arm float electrical inflation system
-Reduce
-Inflate
-If
airspeedto 121 km/h (75 mph, 65 kts)
the floats by actuatingthe firing switch on thecyclic stick (inflation time approximately 3 secondsfrom actuationof switch)
the electrical actuation system fails, or float inflation cannot be visually

verified, the floats may be inflated by pulling the manualactuationhandle
~
-Avoid
.
.DOT
4.0
The handle musttravel approximately10.16 cm (4 inches)before

actuationwill occur.
ramming of the water at the front of floats on touchdown. Jettison the

doors by normal jettison procedure after touchdown.
PERFORMANCE -No Change.
Approved:June29, 1988
Revision1: January05,1994---~--
Page5 of 5
Group of Companies
AS350 Series Repetitive

Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins
A/C Reg.:___________ A/C W.O. No.:___________

A/C T.A.T.:_____________ Date:_______________
* Denotes certification by approved pilots is acceptable
AD or SB Number
Subject Description
Compliance
Due At
*AD T2000-340-080
(A) R2
Inspection of T/R drive shaft fwd fairing IAW Alert Service

Bulletin # 05.00.35. (Applicable to AVO only)
Daily & 100

hrs
*AD 92-078(B) R2
MO5 chip plug inspection IAW SB 292-72-0157

(Applicable to IUX)
Daily or 8
hrs
*AD 84-064-037(B) R3
Insp. of T/R spar without disassembly IAW SB 05-11R5
30 hrs
SB 65-00-38
T/R spider bearing/plate assembly inspection
100 hrs
AD 84-064-037(B) R3
Insp. of T/R spar without disassembly IAW SB 05-11R5
100 hrs
*AD T2001-640-089
(A)
Insp. of T/R Blade trailing edge IAW Alert Telex 05.00.40

Paragraph 2.A NOT TO EXCEED 10 HOURS
Daily or
10hrs
AD 89-155-054(B)R4
Greasing of M/R swash plate bearing with Aeroshell #7 IAW

SB 62-12R2
(N/A to HMZ, HAF, IUX, GSC, AVO, GSW, GSP, FHN,
RTM, RTL)
100 hrs
AD 93-090-067
Insp. of sliding windows IAW SB 05-25R1

(N/A to GSC, AVO, GSP, FHN)
100 hrs
AD 98-173-073(a)
Insp. of mounting and greasing of T/R drive shaft bearings

with Aeroshell #22 IAW SB 05-00-08R5
100 hrs
AD 2002-044(A)
Insp. of Siren Cargo Hook for corrosion on the lock catch.

IAW SB 05-00-41 (Applicable to AVO only)
Daily with
underslung
load
AD2002-344-093(A)
Insp. Of Sliding Door Aft Guide Roller and Middle Rail. IAW
Alert Telex 05.00.41
(Applicable to HMZ, GSW, AVO, & FHN)
100 hrs
E:\MAINT\INSPECT\AS350\AS350 Series AD's & SB's.doc

12/4/2002
Initial
Group of Companies
AS350 Series Repetitive

Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins
A/C Reg.:___________ A/C W.O. No.:___________

A/C T.A.T.:_____________ Date:_______________
* Denotes certification by approved pilots is acceptable
AD1990-064 (A) R1
Engine compressor erosion check IAW maintenance manual

Chapter 71-00-08 SB A292-72-230 issue 1 (N/A to AVO)
400 hrs
AD 84-064-037(B) R3
Insp of T/R spar with disassembly IAW SB 05-11R5
500 hrs
AD 85-135-042(B)
Check that FUEL is engraved on A/F fuel filter every time

the filter is replaced IAW SB 01-14
(N/A to AVO)
500 hrs
AD 86-097-047(B)
A/F fuel filter bowl tightening procedure IAW SB 28-08

(N/A to AVO)
500 hrs
AD 86-125-48(B) R1
Behavior of helicopter on the ground with rotors turning IAW

SB 01-17A
500 hrs or at
each
occurrence
AD 90-198-056(B)
Check presence of shunt on the battery temp probe IAW SB

01-29R1 (N/A to AVO OR ANY WIRING HARNESS WITH 3
WIRES ON THE BATTERY PROBE)
500 hrs or at
each battery
installation
AD 2001-580085(A)R1
Tail Servo control- Eye end fitting for proper locking IAW
Alert Telex No. 05.00.37
550 hrs
E:\MAINT\INSPECT\AS350\AS350 Series AD's & SB's.doc

12/4/2002
"':fl/fl:,1:;,',;'.'
; ;~~
'!',r "2-:~""
~,';;;~ilij.~-
;.i~ii;;;~,*'"
~.,:I.."';)\":::"
'"." -:-
.''i.;;~:~"'j.\'"'!;;t
'Ai\~f;.~\',:;:"
')i.1~'~"..!.~~
"'i"4!;-';"~;;'
;~~'i)':'
r"
;7
OPERATIONAL
TIPS FOR A STAR OPERATORS
J Here is a q~ick review of how to countcycleson the Arriel engines. The pilot shouldrecordboth powerturbine
and gas turbine cycleswith eachentrymadein the flight log book.
I. Powe-rTurbine (Np)
Powerturbine cyclesarestraightforward: 1 FLIGHT = 1 CYCLE
where a flight is: One startfollowed by
One engineaccelerationto take off power followed by
Oneshutdown.
2. Gas Turbine (Ng)
Gasturbine cyclesarecalculatedusingthe following formula: Ng Cycles = Kl + K2 calculations
whereKI is the coefficientfrom table 1 colTesponding
to the maximumNg reachedduringthe flight
and K2 is the coefficientfrom table2 colTesponding
to the Minimum Ng reachedat or below 85%
during the flight.
TABLE!
Max Ng
durina fli ht
100
99
98
97
~--j
TABLE 2
Kl
Coefficient
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
Min Ng
K2
at or below Coefficient
85%
81-85
.05
76-80
.10
75 & lower
.15
96
95
0.6
94
93 or lower
0.55
0.5
Notes:
1. Do not include the Ng reached as part of the normal shut
down
2. Do not countanycycles for groundruns (Np orNg).
Example:
100%
100%
%
Ng noted during flight
80% on Approach
Land
To
Start Up
Max Ng during flight = 100%

Min Ng during flight = two times at 82%
one time at 80%
___~
&
Shut Down
Kl = 1.0
K2 = 2 x 0.05
Ng cycles= 1.0+ (2 x 0.05)+ .10 = 1.20
K2 = .10
Np cycles= 1.0
.~~
eurocopter
canada
~:~.~-

Eurocopter AS350B2 RFM Rev - 06 2002

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Eurocopter AS350B2 RFM Rev - 06 2002

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

FLIGHTMANUAL

FLIG HT MAN UAL

DOT TYP~ APPROVAl. No. H.S3

aircraft and consists

and SUROCOPTER FRANCE.

RevIsIons JO 1hla manual are made by EU~OCOPTER

Plroctlcn T~ch"'~uo SIJppOri -1~72S M_.lgn_n" O""ex .Franca

This nanual assigned to the helicopter ~ntioned on the title

Applicable before condition

AIRwOR1HINESS DIRECTIVE No 90-105B

No 0125B (and further

Page 7 ~B2~ 90-29

Page 2 ~B2~ 90-29

Revision does not apply

0.OP3 Page 1 ~B2~ 92-33 detection system.

Page 5 ~RC~ 92-33

ID1)roved engine fire

0.OP3 Page 1 *B2* 92-39 Note:

Page 5 *B2* 92-39

NOTE : The date

Modification AMS072598 supersedes

is coded and consists

RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

MANUEL DE VOL COMPLEMENTAIRE

LlSTE DES DERNIERES

This manual a$s1gned to the he11copter mentfoned on the t1tle

cond1tfons a~e compliedW1th.

NOTE I The date 1& coded and consIsts of the last

of- the year

are covered by sections

Special Systems and Procedures

requirements maynecessitate modifications to the

text or layout of certain pages.

Special features of a particular

Normal revisions fully or partially

Rush revisions partially

Rush revisions are identified

Conditional revisions RC (printed on pink paper)

The revised manual issued on white pages. corresponds to the reconmended ~.

: These pages are unaffected by nonnal and rush revisions or by

: Unless otherwise specified.

speed values used refer to indicated

in degrees centigrade -O.A.T.

is approved, out of icing

is approved in the "NORMAL"category

of FAR PART 27.

: Flight in falling snow.

than 1500 m (0.81 /11) :

Flight when visibility

; For the preparation before flight.

APPROVEDFLI GHT ENVELOPE

ISA +35*C limited

ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATION

speed for rotor

transient torque (10 sec.)

When airspeed is equal to or higher

than 40 kt (74 km/hr) (46 MPH):

11.1 Gas Generator Speed

Ng = 107.5 % -Ng diff

-Maxim~ takeoff rating (5 minutes)without P2air bleed -Ng diff -0

with P2 air bleed

for engine starting

0.OP3 Page 1 B2 92-39 Note:

Page 5 B2 92-39

5.2 Fire in Flight (FIRElight on)

ALL OFF switch